Docstoc

4pp Cover_Course Catalogue v4.indd

Document Sample
4pp Cover_Course Catalogue v4.indd Powered By Docstoc
					www.uws.ac.uk




Worlds of
Possibility
Undergraduate
Course Catalogue
2010
Business                4
Computing              42
Creative Industries    66
Design                 88
Education             102
Engineering           112
Health                126
Languages             140
Science               146
Social Sciences       198
Sport                 214
                                      1



Say hello
to your future.
Making the move to university
will change your life.
You’ll develop the skills and
knowledge on which you’ll build
a career; learn not only about your
chosen subject but also about
yourself; and forge friendships
that will last you a lifetime.
2                                                                                                                                                                                                      3

Our courses                                                                                                        Levels of study
                                                                                       For the most
                                                                                       up-to-date information
                                                                                       on our courses, and
                                                                                       on the University,
                                                                                       visit www.uws.ac.uk
                                                                                       or call 0800 027 1000
                                                                                       (44 141 848 7044).




At Scotland’s biggest modern university, our 20,000                                    Career-focused              Degree and Honours Degree study
students come from all walks of life (and from                                         programmes from             These are the most advanced levels of study within our undergraduate
countries all over the world) – they’re the reason                                     Scotland’s biggest          portfolio, generally involving three years (ordinary/pass degree) or four years
                                                                                       modern university:
why UWS is such a friendly and diverse environment.                                                                (Honours degree) of full-time study (more if you choose a programme with a
Ask them why they chose UWS, and they’ll give you                                      Business                4   sandwich placement element). Depending upon the area of study, the award
a host of reasons – from our choice of career-focused                                  Computing              42   will be a Bachelor of Arts (BA), Bachelor of Science (BSc), Bachelor of Education
courses, to our notable research, and our welcoming                                    Creative Industries    66   (BEd), Bachelor of Accounting (BAcc) or Bachelor of Engineering (BEng).
campuses in Ayr, Dumfries, Hamilton and Paisley.                                       Design                 88
                                                                                                                   International students
                                                                                       Education             102
With a £250 million investment programme underway to enhance our                                                   International students may find our degree and Honours degree programmes
                                                                                       Engineering           112
facilities further, you’ll benefit from excellent resources, a high-standard                                        within this catalogue of particular interest. If you’re not sure about which
                                                                                       Health                126
of teaching, outstanding student support and a wide range of academic,                                             programme to choose and would like advice, tel 0800 027 1000
                                                                                       Languages             140
sporting and social facilities. A world of opportunity awaits.                                                     (44 141 848 7044 outwith UK).
                                                                                       Science               146
             When choosing your programme and the level of study you
                                                                                       Social Sciences       198   Advanced entry
think may be right for you, you need to think about what qualifications you
                                                                                       Sport                 214   Across many programmes advanced entry (Year 2 or 3) opportunities are
currently hold and what you want to do when you complete your studies.
                                                                                                                   available with appropriate certificate/diploma qualifications. Pre-entry
You’ll find that many professions have particular requirements for entry –
                                                                                                                   modules are also offered to help with the transition from school or college
you should find out about these in advance, so that you can plan ahead
                                                                                                                   to University. See our undergraduate Mini Guide for more details.
and choose the right course for you. We’re happy to advise, so if you want
to talk to us about your options, just give us a call on the number above.                                         Certificate of Higher Education/Diploma
                                                                                                                   of Higher Education
                                                                                                                   The University portfolio includes a small number of specialised courses at
                                                                                                                   Certificate and Diploma level, designed to offer the chance to progress to
                                                                                                                   degree studies in related areas. Certificates of Higher Education (CertHE)
                                                                                                                   and Diplomas of Higher Education (DipHE) are recognised by employers in
                                                                                                                   the private and public sectors. A CertHE can be gained after one year’s
                                                                                                                   full-time study while a DipHE programme is awarded after two years’
                                                                                                                   full-time study. These qualifications are recognised as being equivalent
                                                                                                                   to an HNC or an HND, respectively.
                                                                                                                   Make your mark
                                                                                                                   The structure of a number of our degrees allows you to sample a range of
                                                                                                                   topics before deciding on a final degree route and title. You can also gain
                                                                                                                   hands-on experience through sandwich placement or work-based learning.
                                                                                                                   By working, or carrying out project work, in industry as part of studies you’ll
Using this guide
This guide gives details of the undergraduate programmes available at University of                                gain the practical skills sought by employers and enhance your CV even
the West of Scotland for entry in 2010. Use it in conjunction with our Mini Guide to                               before you graduate. We’ve links with over 400 companies and our students
get an idea of student life at UWS.                                                                                have worked with some of the biggest names in the industry including Sony,
                                                                                                                   Volkswagen, Channel 4 and Microsoft.
4          5




Business
6                                                                                                                                                                                                                     7

At UWS Business School we offer
high-quality education, training,
research and consultancy with a
real-world, vocational emphasis.

The breadth of our experience, the quality of our programmes and our           Section contents               Employability                                                                  “After leaving UWS,
commitment to our students allow us to play an important role in helping       Accounting                12   Our collaboration with industry at the design stage of our programmes           I began working for
to develop business excellence in our communities.                             Business Analysis         14   ensures they meet the needs of today’s job market and provide a strong          Scottish Water. My
                                                                               Business Economics        16                                                                                   Business Analysis degree
Our key values                                                                                                platform from which our graduates can launch their careers. Guest speakers
                                                                                                                                                                                              equipped me with skills
                                                                               Business Studies          18   from industry regularly come to talk to students and to share their real-
•     Quality                                                                                                                                                                                 and abilities that I had
                                                                               Business study at              world experience. They include University of the West of Scotland Honorary
•     Employability                                                                                                                                                                           only begun to discover
                                                                               Dumfries Campus           11   Professor Chris Gorman, a successful entrepreneur and a mentor on the
•     Empowerment                                                                                                                                                                             in the workplace prior
                                                                               Corporate Real Estate          Channel 4 programme ‘Make Me a Million’, who has delivered an ongoing           to attending university.
Quality                                                                        Management (Joint)        20   series of workshops for our students.                                           Now I’m back in the
The feedback and performance of our graduates speaks for itself.               Enterprise              22                                                                                     working world I feel
Our graduates have been hired by some of the country’s top organisations       Event Management        26     Be entrepreneurial
                                                                                                                                                                                              more confident and
and they appreciate the positive impact their experience with us has made      Human Resource                 Our nationally-recognised Enterprise Research Centre has carried out a          prepared for any
to their lives.                                                                Management              28     range of consultancy projects in the area of business start-up. We also offer situation that arises.
       We have developed core activity in internationally recognised,          Information                    you great support to start your own business. We are currently the only UK      Despite only being
business-related research, which underpins curriculum development,             Management              30     university which has an agreement with the Prince’s Trust to promote and        at Scottish Water for
teaching and learning and staff development.                                   International Marketing 34     support self-employment and business creation amongst young people.             four months I was
       UWS Business School has three main areas of research (accountancy       Law                     36     As well as building features into all of our degrees that boost employability, recently promoted to a
                                                                               Management              38     we offer other opportunities to help you secure your ideal job after you        Development Planner’s
and finance, business and management, and European studies) and is
                                                                                                              graduate, including work-based learning and the chance to undertake             role, from my initial role
developing a research group in the field of law. In the recent government       Tourism                 40
                                                                                                              in-company projects. By seizing these opportunities, you’ll be able to          as Business Analyst.
research assessment, UWS achieved representation in the highest possible                                                                                                                      I believe that my UWS
                                                                                “Without my Accounting        demonstrate the practical skills you’ve gained in the workplace on your CV.
(4*) rating in a number of areas – signifying quality that is world-leading in degree skills, I could                                                                                         Business School Business
terms of its originality, significance and rigour. The latest teaching audits in                               Personal development planning, an integral part of our degrees, helps you       Analysis programme,
                                                                                 never have secured
economics and accounting commended the quality of our teaching, learning my current job. At the               to set personal goals and develop a practical plan to achieve them.             and particularly my
and learning resources.                                                          University I learned         Empowerment                                                                     dissertation, allowed
       We have also built a reputation for quality in consultancy. Projects      about working to tight       We’re committed to your success. Going to university is a new departure         me to adapt quickly
recently undertaken include a multi-million dollar World Bank/EU-funded          deadlines and gained                                                                                         to Scottish Water
                                                                                                              for most people and can be a life-changing experience. We aim to help you
                                                                                                                                                                                              and helped me get
consultancy project, which introduced international accounting standards to skills in analytical              to get the best from the opportunity. Our vision is to give you the practical
                                                                                                                                                                                              my promotion.”
the Republic of Azerbaijan, and a Scottish Government-commissioned study investigation regarding              skills and knowledge to be highly-effective in your chosen career. We aim
                                                                                 the background of                                                                                            Claire Cochrane,
into the importance of minority ethnic businesses to the Scottish economy.                                    to help you develop the skills and attitude of mind to be a leader, ready to    Scottish Water
                                                                               trades and the economic
Working with the UK’s leading companies                                        factors behind it.”
                                                                                                              tackle challenges and to adapt in an ever-changing world.
•     we work with many of the UK’s top companies on a variety of              Joy Carson,                    We encourage you to take advantage of the many great opportunities
      activities, from providing learning programmes for their staff to        Financial Analyst,             available at UWS, such as work placement, work-based learning, and study
      organising work experience for our students                              Morgan Stanley                 abroad opportunities; industry projects; and student societies and clubs.
•     a team of our business students reached the Grand Final of the                                          These can broaden your life experience and boost your employability –
      national IBM Business Challenge in 2008, one of only 10 teams from                                      as well as being fun. >
      an initial cohort of 232 to reach this stage
8                                                                                                                                                                                          9




Flexibility                                                                   “The Information            Business entrance requirements
•      flexible degree structure giving you the chance to explore subjects      Management course          Higher BBCC including English, plus Mathematics @ S Grade.
       of interest                                                             was a fascinating area     A-Level CC, plus three GCSEs including English and Mathematics.
                                                                               of study. It offered us,
•      extensive use of Blackboard, our internet-based virtual learning                                   Year 2 Advanced entry with HNC in a relevant business subject.
                                                                               as students, a chance
       environment, providing access to useful learning materials and          to understand what
                                                                                                          Year 3 Advanced entry with HND in a relevant business subject.
       discussion boards online                                                keeps an organisation      Direct entry
•      wide range of online library resources enabling access when and         functioning                Students entering after Year 1 will be given advice about the degree options
       where you need it                                                       i.e. information.          available to them, which depend on study previously undertaken, and on
•      full-time, part-time and open-learning study options                    The degree’s a ‘must’,     possible work experience options. Direct entry students should contact
                                                                               if you are thinking of
Study abroad                                                                                              our Undergraduate Admissions Officer, Dr Adrian Lavercombe, e-mail
                                                                               going into management,
You’ll have the opportunity to spend time abroad, gaining credit towards       as I have found out!”
                                                                                                          adrian.lavercombe@uws.ac.uk or tel 0800 027 1000 (44 141 848 7044).
your degree, at one of our 60 partner institutions. There are many benefits of Mark McCulloch,             Single, Major, Minor, Joint degree titles
the study abroad scheme – it’s a great opportunity to experience a different Retail Manager trainee       Our induction sessions at the start of term give you the chance to
culture and to meet new friends; it gives you a different perspective on your                             discuss your study options with us – so, if you have chosen, for example,
studies; you’ll have the chance to learn a new language; and your CV and                                  Management, you may decide that you want to combine it with another
employment prospects will be enhanced.                                                                    subject, such as International Marketing. The sessions give you the chance
Degree structures                                                                                         to shape the degree you want, choosing the areas of study that interest you
We consult regularly with major academic and professional bodies,                                         most. In most cases you’ll have flexibility and choice in the structure of your
employers and students to ensure that our programmes meet their                                           degree and you’ll receive advice on planning your studies. For example you
requirements. All our degrees include two key elements:                                                   could study for a –
Business essentials                                                                                       •      Single degree in one specialist subject e.g. BA International Marketing
Key learning and employability skills to give an academic underpinning                                    •      Major/Minor degree combination e.g. BA International Marketing
which will enable you to succeed at university and in the workplace.                                             with Law (approximately two-thirds of emphasis on the Major subject
These include skills such as researching, analysis, critical thinking and                                        and one third on the Minor subject)
problem-solving, as well as transferable skills such as team working,                                     •      Joint degree combination e.g. BA International Marketing and
oral presentation and IT skills.                                                                                 Management (equal emphasis on each subject) >

Specialist subjects
Different degree titles require different levels of specialism. The number
of specialist subjects you will be required to study will depend on how
defined or broad the focus of the degree you select. Some degrees, such as
Business Studies, are broad-based and give maximum flexibility in module
choice while others, such as Accounting or Law, have a specifically defined
focus and the professional bodies for these areas require more subject-
specific, compulsory modules. The option to study a modern language to
complement your business study is usually possible.
10                                                                                                                                                                                          11

                                                                                   Business
                                                                                   Business study at
                                                                                   Dumfries Campus
You can keep your options open until the end of Year 1, at which stage             At our Dumfries Campus a range of broad-based                                 UCAS
you’ll choose your degree title and thereafter follow a defined route to            business subjects is offered to enable you to tailor                          See below.
that degree.                                                                       a programme to suit your interests and career                                 Entry
                                                                                   aspirations. Select from Enterprise, Human Resource                           Higher BBCC including
Delivery of Business programmes                                                                                                                                  English plus Maths at
Undergraduate business programmes are delivered on all four of our                 Management, International Marketing and
                                                                                                                                                                 Standard Grade.
campuses in Ayr, Dumfries, Hamilton and Paisley. The table below indicates         Management to achieve a Joint degree or Joint
                                                                                   Honours degree in two of these subjects. Full-time                            A-Level CC plus 3 GCSE
which degrees and degree streams are available at each campus.                                                                                                   passes including English
                                                                                   and part-time study is offered.
Degree title                  Ayr*       Dumfries       Hamilton        Paisley                                                                                  and Maths.
Accounting                     -            -              ✓              ✓        From a flexible core framework providing the basis for the study of business   Year 2 Entry with an HNC
Business Analysis              -            -              -              ✓        you have the opportunity to select a chosen specialist path and get an        in an appropriate subject.
Business Economics             -            -              -              ✓        excellent grounding in the business skills valued by employers. You will
Business Studies               -            -              ✓              ✓                                                                                      Year 3 Entry with an HND
                                                                                   undertake varied assessment formats, including examinations, coursework,
Enterprise                     -           ✓^              -              ✓                                                                                      in an appropriate subject.
                                                                                   presentations, case studies, portfolio building and receive support
Event Management               -            -              ✓              ✓                                                                                      Duration
                                                                                   for supplementary areas such as essay writing, referencing, and time
Human Resource                                                                                                                                                   BA 3 years
Management                     ✓*           ✓^             ✓              ✓        management. Advanced entry with relevant HNC or HND qualifications,            BA Hons 4 years
Information Management          -            -             -              ✓        or equivalent, to Years 2 and 3 of the programme respectively, is possible.   Contact
Law                             -            -             ✓              ✓        Joint degree options available in Dumfries                                    Dr Adrian Lavercombe
Management                     ✓*           ✓^             -              ✓        (all courses offered subject to demand):                                      Undergraduate Admissions
International Marketing         -           ✓^             ✓              ✓                                                                                      Officer 0800 027 1000
                                                                                   •      BA/BA (Hons) Enterprise and HRM (UCAS NN26 D BA/EHRM)
Tourism                         -            -             -              ✓                                                                                      (44 141 848 7044
                                                                                   •      BA/BA (Hons) Enterprise and International Marketing
(Joint) Corporate Real                                                                                                                                           outwith UK)
Estate Management               -            -              -             ✓               (UCAS NN25 D BA/EIM)
                                                                                   •      BA/BA (Hons) Enterprise and Management (UCAS N291 D BA/EMgt)
^In Dumfries, Enterprise, Human Resource Management, International Marketing and
                                                                                   •      BA/BA (Hons) HRM and International Marketing
Management can be combined to achieve a Joint degree or Joint Honours degree in
                                                                                          (UCAS NN65 D BA/HRMIM)
two of these subjects, see page 11.
*In Ayr, the degree titles HRM and Management or HRM with Management are           •      BA/BA (Hons) HRM and Management (UCAS NN62 D BA/HRMMgt)
available at Level 3 only for students entering with appropriate Higher National   •      BA/BA (Hons) International Marketing and Management
qualifications, or equivalent.                                                             (UCAS NN52 D BA/IMM)
                                                                                   Career Prospects
                                                                                   Graduates will find employment in both the private and public sectors,
                                                                                   including local government, health trusts, banks and retail companies.
                                                                                   Typical jobs will include human resource manager, marketing manager
                                                                                   and retail manager.
12                                                                                                                                                                                                                      13

Business
Accounting

Accountants are in demand in just about every                                  UCAS                            Year 2                                                                            Contact
business sector all over the world. This programme                             Hamilton –                      Year 2 develops financial and management accounting and introduces                 Dr Adrian Lavercombe
offers you the necessary academic grounding, as                                N400 H BAcc/A                   specialised areas of accounting such as tax and financial management.              Undergraduate Admissions
                                                                               Paisley –                                                                                                         Officer 0800 027 1000
well as work placement opportunities, to enable                                                                There is also the opportunity to undertake an optional subject of your
                                                                               N400 P BAcc/A                                                                                                     (44 141 848 7044
you to meet the challenges of this demanding and                                                               choice, for example, a language or an accounting topic such as Accounting         outwith UK)
                                                                               Campus
stimulating career.                                                            Hamilton, Paisley
                                                                                                               for International Business or anything from the wide range of business topics.
                                                                                                                                                                                                **At time of print,
The programme covers the full range of accountancy subjects from financial      Entry                           Optional Sandwich Placement                                                       new accreditation for the
and management accounting to financial management, taxation auditing            Higher BBCC including           As part of your BAcc degree you can apply for a sandwich placement in             course is being sought.
and ancillary areas ensuring students acquire the necessary specialist and     English plus Maths at           an appropriate business setting between Years 2 and 3. This provides a            Contact Admissions Officer
                                                                               Standard Grade.                 year’s work experience, which considerably enhances your employability.           for update.
generic transferable skills relevant to a career in the field of accountancy.
        The programme can be studied at either Paisley Campus or Hamilton      A-Level CC at GCE plus          It also gives you the opportunity to develop skills and to acquire valuable
Campus and is delivered by a core teaching staff of qualified professional      3 GCSE passes including         experience that will facilitate a better understanding of the academic
accountants who are responsible for both module development and                English and Maths.              aspects of your programme in succeeding years. In the past, students have
teaching (you can also study part-time at the Hamilton Campus).                Year 2 Entry with an HNC        found placements in a wide range of companies in Scotland as well as in
This ensures our students achieve a good balance between practical             in an appropriate subject.      the rest of the UK.
and theoretical knowledge, thereby enhancing their employability.              Year 3 Entry with an HND        Year 3
        Students will be strongly encouraged to obtain relevant experience     in an appropriate subject.      Year 3 takes financial and management accounting to their highest level.
through work placement with one of the many employers that the                                                 Tax and auditing are also studied, as well as another optional subject,
                                                                               An appropriate HNC/HND
University has built up strong links with over the years. This will not only   award with the level of entry   allowing you to gain excellent practical and theoretical knowledge.
enhance students’ experience but also their employability as they gain         and/or credit being awarded
key transferable skills. This enables students to boost their CV with work                                     Year 4
                                                                               being subject to the content
placement in blue chip companies, chartered accountancy firms and the                                           In the Honours year you will complete a dissertation on your choice of
                                                                               of the HN programme.
like throughout the UK, where they are supervised by qualified accountants                                      subject as well as looking at contemporary issues in accounting and
                                                                               Applicants may also be          accounting theory and history.
to ensure a good breadth of knowledge is obtained. This experience also        considered with other
involves useful participation in the interview skills and CV preparation       academic, vocational or         Professional Exemptions
processes which the University offers.                                         professional qualifications      Accountancy opens up many opportunities to students; you can take
        Accountancy is a great all-round business degree which opens up        deemed to be equivalent.        professional exams with the main accountancy bodies such as ICAS, ACCA
opportunities in finance and if you look at the top management in any           Duration                        and CIMA for which maximum exemptions are in place**or you can use
organisation, accountants figure heavily.                                       BAcc 3 years                    your degree as a launchpad into general business or finance and perhaps
                                                                               BAcc Sandwich 4 years           look at other professional exams such as Chartered Institute of Bankers.
Course Content                                                                 BAcc Hons 4 years
Year 1                                                                                                         The Bachelor of Accounting offers specialised study for a degree with
                                                                               BAcc Hons (Sandwich)
Students will undertake a range of accountancy subjects, such as financial                                      maximum professional accreditation and exemptions.
                                                                               5 years
and management accounting as well as more general modules where
accountancy is put into perspective in the business world.
14                                                                                                                                                                                                15

Business
Business Analysis

Our Business Analysis programme has been offered for                              UCAS                         Year 2
over ten years. During this time we have continually                              G240 P BA/BusAn              Year 2 has three specified modules in Business Analysis. Two modules
developed the programme to ensure it is up-to-date and                            Campus                       develop your technical skills in statistics and business analysis techniques
relevant to a practical education in the application of                           Paisley                      such as scheduling. The third module is concerned with enhancing your
mathematical and statistical approaches to business.                              Entry                        personal and interpersonal skills. You then select three other modules based
                                                                                  Higher BBCC including
                                                                                                               on the graduating title you require.
Our teaching team bring a wealth of experience to the classes based on their      English plus Maths at
studies, research and consultancy. This ensures that you receive a rigorous       Standard Grade.              Industrial Placement
and practical education in line with the aims of the programme. In broad          A-Level CC at GCE plus       Students studying Single, Joint or Major/Minor degree combinations have the
terms, the aims of the programme are to enable you to develop critical and        3 GCSE passes including      opportunity between Years 2 and 3 to undertake a year’s industrial placement.
analytical problem-based learning skills as well as other more general            English and Maths.           This provides practical experience in their subject area and added insight into
employability skills to prepare you for graduate employment. We encourage                                      industry, which will enhance student employability after graduation.
                                                                                  Year 2 Entry with an HNC
a holistic and cross-disciplinary approach to solving problems in business,       in an appropriate subject.   Year 3
although you will develop particular strengths in the more mathematical                                        The third year has a module common to virtually all programmes in business
                                                                                  Year 3 Entry with an HND
and statistical approaches. So, you will develop an ability to enhance the                                     which prepares you for both research in general and within your subject.
                                                                                  in an appropriate subject.
performance of companies by being immersed in a problem-solving culture                                        You can then select two, three or four modules in Business Analysis,
                                                                                  Duration
which emphasises the development of skills in, for example, modelling,            BA 3 years                   depending on the title you wish to select and the amount of the subject
interpretation, rigorous analysis, sensitivity analysis and judgement, using      BA Hons 4 years              you wish to study. The modules are selected from Linear Programming,
both mathematical and non-mathematical approaches to a range of business          Contact                      The Survey Process, Managing Projects and Simulation Modelling.
applications. Your tutors will supplement normal classes with visiting speakers   Dr Adrian Lavercombe
from industry or by using their own experience of consultancy and research.       Undergraduate Admissions
                                                                                                               (Optional) Work-Based Learning
       One of the subjects studied concerns the planning and running of a         Officer 0800 027 1000         Students intending to graduate with a Single subject Honours degree have
project for delivery on-specification, on-time and on-cost. So, how would          (44 141 848 7044             the opportunity to undertake work-based learning during Year 3. This allows
you plan the introduction of another terminal at Glasgow Airport? Our             outwith UK)                  students to apply their academic learning and skills within the workplace
module in Project Management gives you a good start. Another module                                            and gain credit for appropriate work experience before entering their
tackles the problem of questionnaire design and analysis. You will study                                       Honours year. Students also complete two distance learning modules.
this topic in our Survey Process module. How do we get the food we need                                        Year 4
when we need it, who decides how much and what food to send where                                              In the Honours year, you will take a double module covering the Honours
and when? Some of the answers are studied in our Logistics module.                                             Dissertation plus two, three or four modules in Business Analysis, depending
The programme is available as a Single, Major, Joint and Minor title.                                          on the title you selected in Year 3.
Course Content                                                                                                 Career Prospects
Year 1                                                                                                         Graduates from our degree in Business Analysis have obtained jobs in
In the first year, you will study a module which develops your basic                                            business analysis with companies such as Corus and Scottish Water.
mathematical and statistical skills. You also take a module common to all                                      Of course many graduates have embarked on mainstream management
business students which supports you in the development of your learning                                       careers in, for example, banks and the health service. Other graduates have
skills. You can select a further four modules which enables you to preserve                                    taken up positions with, for example, the police force or in air traffic control,
other graduating titles which can be taken along with Business Analysis,                                       to highlight a couple of the varied career opportunities offered.
or you can use these options to achieve an alternative business title.
16                                                                                                                                                                                                                17

Business
                                                                                                                                                                                             Related course(s):
                                                                                                                                                                                             Economics,
                                                                                                                                                                                             see page 204.

Business Economics

Business Economics seeks to promote a knowledge                                UCAS                         Year 2
and critical awareness of how the economy works                                L110 P BA/BEC                You will study both microeconomics and macroeconomics at an
and how economic principles influence business                                  Campus                       intermediate level. Intermediate microeconomics examines the exchange of
behaviour and decision-making in both the public                               Paisley                      goods and services between individuals, stemming from the need of people
and private sectors.                                                           Entry                        and organisations to trade resources. As well as theory, policy issues will be
                                                                               Higher BBCC including
                                                                                                            explored and students will have the opportunity to relate theory to practice.
The programme is taught by staff who have a wealth of experience in            English plus Maths at
                                                                               Standard Grade.
                                                                                                            In addition there is scope to study other areas of business in business
teaching, research and consultancy. Beginning with the foundation modules
                                                                                                            decision-making and to enhance personal and interpersonal skills.
of microeconomics and macroeconomics, a body of theory and evidence is         A-Level CC plus 3 GCSE
developed. These areas are studied more deeply at intermediate level and       passes including English     Industrial Placement
then more broadly in the various branches of the discipline. This provides a   and Maths.                   Students studying Single, Joint or Major/Minor degree combinations have the
basis for the study of other areas such as management, business strategy                                    opportunity between Years 2 and 3 to undertake a year’s industrial placement.
                                                                               Year 2 Entry with an HNC
and for the move to study at higher levels. In addition, various other         in an appropriate subject.   This provides practical experience in their subject area and added insight
modules enhance generic, specific and transferable skills necessary in the                                   into industry, which will enhance student employability after graduation.
                                                                               Year 3 Entry with an HND
business world. Students learn quantitative, analytical and research skills                                 Year 3
                                                                               in an appropriate subject.
that distinguish them from students on a number of other degree courses.                                    Students will study more specialised economics subject areas including
In addition, they acquire other transferable skills that will make an          Applicants may also be
                                                                               considered with other        industrial economics, managerial economics and the economics of
invaluable contribution in their chosen career. Skills in problem-solving,                                  evaluation. In addition, there are optional modules in international
                                                                               academic, vocational or
IT and statistical methods are also developed.                                                              economics, principles of econometrics, growth and structural change and
                                                                               professional qualifications
Course Content                                                                 deemed to be equivalent.     public and social economics.
Year 1                                                                         Duration                     (Optional) Work-Based Learning
Students are introduced to the basic economic concepts in microeconomics       BA 3 years
                                                                                                            Students intending to graduate with a Single subject Honours degree have
and macroeconomics. You will also have the opportunity to study other          BA Hons 4 years
                                                                                                            the opportunity to undertake work-based learning during Year 3. This allows
related business subjects such as management, marketing and IT.                Contact
                                                                                                            students to apply their academic learning and skills within the workplace
                                                                               Dr Adrian Lavercombe
Microeconomics examines the fundamental economic problem of scarcity                                        and gain credit for appropriate work experience before entering their
                                                                               Undergraduate Admissions
and choice, introducing such concepts as opportunity cost, incentives,         Officer 0800 027 1000         Honours year. Students also complete two distance learning modules.
equilibrium, the margin, property rights, gains from voluntary exchange        (44 141 848 7044             Year 4 (Honours)
and the production possibility frontier (trade-offs). Macroeconomics deals     outwith UK)                  All students will complete a double module dissertation in the Honours year.
with aggregate variables within the traditional neo-classical economic
                                                                                                            In addition you will study economics and public policy.
framework. Issues surrounding economic growth, employment, inflation and
the balance of payments are examined individually as are the important                                      Career Prospects
linkages between them.                                                                                      The skills that students acquire in their study of business economics make
                                                                                                            them some of the most sought-after graduates in the country. Graduates
                                                                                                            in business economics work in many fields in both the public and private
                                                                                                            sector including banking, accounting, law, the police, manufacturing,
                                                                                                            journalism, government and teaching. A degree in business economics will
                                                                                                            therefore open up many career pathways.
18                                                                                                                                                                                                19

Business
Business Studies

This degree gives you the option to study for a                                   UCAS                         a later stage in the year in running their own virtual company, where key
general business degree or to specialise in a                                     Hamilton –                   decisions will be made either individually or as part of a team. Throughout
particular area such as marketing, HRM, finance                                    N101 H BA/BST                your first year, you will continually develop both personal and educational
                                                                                  Paisley – N101 P BA/BST
and retail management. With the opportunity for                                                                skills through subjects such as “The Learning Environment”. Students will
                                                                                  Campus
placement – giving you the chance to put your                                                                  also have an opportunity to either study a general business degree or to
                                                                                  Hamilton, Paisley
knowledge into practice in the real-world – this                                                               specialise in one area. Areas of specialism include marketing, HRM, finance
                                                                                  Entry
degree gives you a great basis on which to launch                                 Higher BBCC including
                                                                                                               and retail management.
your business career.                                                             English plus Maths at        Year 2
This is a newly developed degree which builds on existing provision at a          Standard Grade.              In Year 2, you will develop skills and knowledge, either across a range of
number of our campuses. It offers a wide degree of flexibility in the subjects     A-Level CC plus 3 GCSE       disciplines or in a chosen specialist area such as marketing, HRM, financial
studied and is offered in both full-time and part-time formats. It is available   passes including English     services or retail management.
as a Single and Major degree. The main features of the course are:                and Maths.                   Industrial Placement
•       a flexible core framework providing the basis for the study of business    Year 2 Entry with an HNC     You have the opportunity between Years 2 and 3 to undertake a year’s
•       the opportunity to study business as part of a general degree or to       in an appropriate subject.   industrial placement. This provides practical experience in your subject area
        follow a chosen specialist path                                           Year 3 Entry with an HND     and added insight into industry, which will enhance your employability
•       an excellent grounding in the business skills valued by employers         in an appropriate subject.   after graduation.
•       opportunities to integrate work-based learning into the programme         Duration
•       placement opportunities with local employers
                                                                                                               Year 3
                                                                                  BA 3 years
                                                                                                               In Year 3, students develop an understanding of the complex issues at work
•       learning in (and from) the workplace                                      BA Hons 4 years
                                                                                                               in the general and specialist areas and learn how to research business
•       talks from, and visits to, local and national employers                   Contact
                                                                                                               topics effectively.
•       opportunities to spend time studying abroad under the Erasmus             Dr Adrian Lavercombe
        student exchange scheme                                                   Undergraduate Admissions     (Optional) Work-Based Learning
•       opportunities to participate in international student competitions held   Officer 0800 027 1000         Students intending to graduate with a Single subject Honours degree have
        throughout Europe                                                         (44 141 848 7044             the opportunity to undertake work-based learning during Year 3. This allows
                                                                                  outwith UK)                  students to apply their academic learning and skills within the workplace and
•       varied assessment formats, including examinations, coursework,
        presentations, case studies, portfolio building                                                        gain credit for appropriate work experience before entering their Honours year.
•       support available for supplementary areas such as essay writing,                                       Students complete two distance learning modules, related to their degree, during
        referencing, and time management                                                                       the work-based learning placement as preparation for entry to Honours study.
•       advanced entry with relevant HNC or HND qualifications to 2nd and                                       Year 4
        3rd years of the programme, respectively                                                               In Year 4, students undertake a dissertation in an area of their choice in
•       a strong basis for further study                                                                       conjunction with further study in their specialist area and will learn why
Course Content                                                                                                 ethics are a critical factor in modern business decision-making.
Year 1                                                                                                         Career Prospects
You will be introduced to key areas of the business environment. This will                                     Graduates will find employment in both the private and public sectors,
include examination of the various functions within a business as well as                                      including local government, the NHS, banks, insurance companies, and retail
the differing business sectors. Students will then apply this knowledge at                                     companies. Typical jobs will include financial services consultant, human
                                                                                                               resource manager, marketing manager and retail manager.
20                                                                                                                                                                                            21

Business
Corporate Real Estate
Management
This specialist option examines the billion pound                                      UCAS                         Course Content (Joint)
commercial property market, opening up a range                                         Apply for the degree         Students undertake 6 modules in total at each level.
of career routes including property development                                        subject (International
                                                                                       Marketing or Law, for        Year 1
and estates.                                                                                                        •     Introduction to Scots Law
                                                                                       example) that you would
The degree in Corporate Real Estate Management (Joint) is a unique course              like to combine CREM         •     The Learning Environment
that considers the commercial property market from the perspective of                  with, using the UCAS         •     Business & Property
the business occupier. The programme examines the retail, business and                 code for that subject.*      •     Plus 3 modules from Joint title
industrial sectors within Scotland, the rest of the UK and also overseas.              Campus
                                                                                       Paisley                      Year 2
       Businesses are constantly reviewing new ways to manage their                                                 •     Real Estate Valuation
                                                                                       Entry
operational real estate in an effective and efficient way, in order to                                               •     Law of Property
                                                                                       Higher BBCC including
minimise costs and maximise profit. Real estate is often the most visible                                            •     The Built Environment
                                                                                       English plus Maths at
representation of an organisation, from a strategic headquarters building              Standard Grade.
in the City of London, through to small shops on a busy high street. The                                            Industrial Placement
total capital value of all property stock in Scotland at the end of 2005 was           A-Level CC plus 3 GCSE       Students studying Joint or Major/Minor degree combinations have the
                                                                                       passes including English     opportunity between Years 2 and 3 to undertake a year’s industrial
around £51 billion. The retail market is the largest sector in Scotland, worth
                                                                                       and Maths.                   placement. This provides practical experience in their subject area and
around £20 billion (2005), with around £14 billion of property having been
purchased by investment organisations such as Prudential and Standard Life.            Year 2 Entry with an HNC     added insight into industry, which will enhance student employability
       The programme explores real estate from a multi-disciplinary                    in an appropriate subject.   after graduation.
perspective, including: real estate valuation, design and layout, legal/               Year 3 Entry with an HND     Year 3
administrative issues and the strategic, facilities and asset management               in an appropriate subject.   •     Investing in Real Estate
viewpoints.                                                                            Applicants may also be       •     Commercial Leases
       Corporate Real Estate Management can be taken as a Joint degree,                considered with other        •     Facilities Management
combined with one of a range of UWS business options, or as the Minor                  academic, vocational or      •     Business Research Methods
component of a Major/Minor degree. The main option streams include Law,                professional qualifications
                                                                                       deemed to be equivalent.
                                                                                                                    Year 4 (Honours)
Marketing, Event Management, Tourism and Human Resource Management.
                                                                                       Duration
                                                                                                                    •     Corporate Real Estate Management
Other popular options include Management and Information Management.
                                                                                       BA 3 years                   •     Strategic Corporate Real Estate Management
       The programme is delivered in both full-time and part-time modes.
                                                                                       BA Hons 4 years              •     Dissertation
The full-time Honours programme lasts 4 years, while the Ordinary degree
                                                                                       Contact                      Career Prospects
lasts 3 years. In part-time mode, the equivalent timescales are 6 years and
                                                                                       Dr Adrian Lavercombe         Graduate opportunities are available in a number of areas including;
4.5 years. Where student numbers permit, some classes will be offered on
                                                                                       Undergraduate Admissions
an evening basis.                                                                                                   estates departments within major retailers and service industries,
                                                                                       Officer 0800 027 1000
                                                                                                                    property developers and management agents/advisers, local government
*During the induction period before you start your University studies, you will meet   (44 141 848 7044
with subject tutors in the Business School to decide on the most appropriate modules   outwith UK)                  departments including estates and administration, and also the
to meet your course interests. At this point you will be able to select your CREM                                   voluntary sector.
options. The Business School Admissions Officer would also be happy, at any stage,
to discuss CREM study routes and application.
22                                                                                                                                                                                             23

Business
Enterprise

Dream of owning your own business? Or want to                                 UCAS                          Year 2
play a key role in the public or private sector?                              N190 P BA/Ent                 All students will study:
Entrepreneurship is essential for a healthy and                               Campus                        •      Entrepreneurship and Enterprise
thriving modern economy, and this degree will give                            Paisley                       •      Integrated Business Solutions
                                                                              (Some modules in Enterprise
you the skills to build a career in this exciting field.                                                     •      Personal & Interpersonal Skills
                                                                              may also be studied as
Entrepreneurship occurs in all organisations – voluntary, charity and the     part of business-related      You will also study 3 optional modules from any discipline, such as
private sectors – and the course takes a broad view of enterprise. The        programmes at the Hamilton    Marketing, Management, Tourism, Events Management or Accounting.
programme aims to equip students with the necessary skills to play a          and Dumfries campuses.)       The modules at this level will develop some of the key themes from Year 1
creative role in any sector of business and will examine issues that affect   Entry                         and explore in greater depth some key issues, such as why are there fewer
                                                                              Higher BBCC including         women entrepreneurs than men? Why are minority ethnic groups more
the modern enterprise economy and provide opportunities for you to play
                                                                              English plus Maths at         likely to be self-employed and owners of small businesses? What is the role
a full part in that economy.
                                                                              Standard Grade.
        Small to Medium-sized Enterprises (SMEs) are increasingly identified                                 of small businesses in the modern Scottish economy?
as the driving force behind the modern enterprise economy, so many of the     A-Level CC plus 3 GCSE
                                                                              passes including English
                                                                                                            Industrial Placement
modules will focus on the issues surrounding the SME sector. For SMEs to                                    Students studying Single, Joint or Major/Minor degree combinations have
                                                                              and Maths.
become established requires people with skills in enterprise.                                               the opportunity between Years 2 and 3 to undertake a year’s industrial
        The course also offers the opportunity for students to seriously      Year 2 Entry with an HNC
                                                                                                            placement. This provides practical experience in their subject area and
consider owning and managing their own business as an alternative career      in an appropriate subject.
                                                                                                            added insight into industry, which will enhance student employability
option. Students also have the opportunity of undertaking an optional         Year 3 Entry with an HND      after graduation.
industrial placement between Years 2 and 3. Modules are backed up with        in an appropriate subject.
guest lectures and site visits. Some modules use interactive methods of                                     Year 3
                                                                              Applicants may also be
teaching and learning such as ‘Dragons’ Den’ scenarios.                                                     All students will study:
                                                                              considered with other
                                                                                                            •      Innovation and Entrepreneurship
Course Content                                                                academic, vocational or
                                                                              professional qualifications    •      Social Entrepreneurship
Year 1                                                                                                      •      Business Research Methods
                                                                              deemed to be equivalent.
All students will study:                                                                                    •      Business Venturing
                                                                              Duration
•      The Learning Environment
                                                                              BA 3 years                    You will also study 2 optional modules from any discipline, such as
•      Introduction to Entrepreneurship and Enterprise                        BA Hons 4 years
•      Economics for Accountants                                                                            Marketing, Management, Tourism, Events Management or Accounting.
                                                                              Contact                       The modules at this level will explore enterprise in third sector organisations,
You will also study 3 optional modules from any discipline, such as           Dr Adrian Lavercombe
                                                                                                            backed up by guest speakers and a site visit to Kibble, one of Scotland’s
Marketing, Management, Tourism, Events Management or Accounting.              Undergraduate Admissions
                                                                              Officer, 0800 027 1000
                                                                                                            largest social enterprises. Additionally, in Business Venturing, students
These modules will introduce students to the core concepts and ideas,                                       will develop a business plan so that they can appreciate the necessary
                                                                              (44 141 848 7044
looking at Enterprise in a broad sense. Guest speakers will be utilised                                     factors which have to be considered in establishing a new enterprise.
                                                                              outwith UK)
within the Enterprise module to provide real-life experiences of owning                                     The importance of innovation to the economy is explored in the module
and managing a small business.                                                                              Innovation and Entrepreneurship. >
24                                                                                                               25

                                                                                     I’m Geoffrey
                                                                                     from Marseille, France
                                                                                     I’m 21
                                                                                     I’m studying Business.
                                                                                     I plan to continue my
                                                                                     studies at a French
                                                                                     business school and
                                                                                     start my own business
                                                                                     as soon as possible.
                                                                                     I like sports and travel.
                                                                                     I don’t like rain.
(Optional) Work-Based Learning
Students intending to graduate with a Single subject Honours degree have
the opportunity to undertake work-based learning during Year 3. This allows
students to apply their academic learning and skills within the workplace
and gain credit for appropriate work experience before entering their
Honours year. Students complete two distance learning modules, related to
their degree, during the work-based learning placement as preparation for
entry to Honours study.
Year 4 (Honours)
All students will study:
•      Honours Dissertation
•      Product Policy and Innovation
•      International Entrepreneurship
•      The Entrepreneurial Organisation
•      Entrepreneurial Finance
Students will have the opportunity to develop a topic of their own, with
appropriate supervision, in which they can demonstrate their abilities
to engage in serious research. An examination of entrepreneurship and
enterprise in other countries will be undertaken along with the key aspect
facing all enterprises, namely the issue of raising finance. Within the module
Entrepreneurial Organisation, students will explore enterprising activity
within large organisations.
Professional Recognition
Depending on the modules taken, recognition and exemption of relevant
professional bodies may be possible.
Career Prospects
Graduates with a degree in Enterprise will have a wide choice of career
options. Whilst some graduates want to pursue their dream of becoming
an entrepreneur and owning their own business, it is widely acknowledged
that the transferable skills acquired during this course of study will enable
graduates to play a key role in any organisation: public, private or third sector.
26                                                                                                                                                                                              27

Business
Event Management

Events graduates work in a range of sectors –                                    UCAS                         Year 2
you could find yourself organising a major business                               Hamilton –                   Event management knowledge and understanding are expanded through
conference or planning a music festival. This degree                             N820 H BA/EM                 the study of event venue management and the planning and development
                                                                                 Paisley – N820 P BA/EM
will give you the essential knowledge and practical                                                           of events plus event operations, and other related business subjects.
                                                                                 Campus
work experience to build a career in this                                                                     Industrial Placement
                                                                                 Hamilton, Paisley
stimulating area.                                                                                             Students studying Single, Joint or Major/Minor degree combinations have the
                                                                                 Entry
The programme offers you the opportunity to achieve the range of                 Higher BBCC including        opportunity between Years 2 and 3 to undertake a year’s industrial placement.
management and technical skills required to work within the dynamic event        English plus Maths at        This provides practical experience in their subject area and added insight into
management industry. The degree has been specially designed in association       Standard Grade.              industry, which will enhance student employability after graduation.
with representatives from the event industry and offers a strong business        A-Level CC plus 3 GCSE       Year 3
programme combined with the specialist event management knowledge                passes including English     You will study more specialised event management subject areas, including
required for effective operation in the industry and related sectors.            and Maths.
                                                                                                              event design and development and event operations, including aspects of
       Studies will focus on the diverse issues affecting the event industry,    Year 2 Entry with an HNC     technical production. Studies also include event and tourism marketing,
including the impact of events on the global economy, local and                  in an appropriate subject.   plus conference management and business tourism. Research and self-study
international environments and on the business community. You will also          Year 3 Entry with an HND     skills are developed through the assessment process and in a specialist
study a range of subjects covering the issues that the event industry has        in an appropriate subject.   research methods module.
had to face in the recent past and contemporary political and industrial
issues that it encounters today.
                                                                                 Applicants may also be       (Optional) Work-Based Learning
                                                                                 considered with other        Students intending to graduate with a Single subject Honours degree have
       Depending on their career goals, students may be able to pursue           academic, vocational or
specialist interests through particular modules and their research and project                                the opportunity to undertake work-based learning during Year 3. This allows
                                                                                 professional qualifications
assignments. This programme offers a range of modules that will enable                                        students to apply their academic learning and skills within the workplace and
                                                                                 deemed to be equivalent.
graduates to manage and stage a variety of events in a number of different                                    gain credit for appropriate work experience before entering their Honours year.
                                                                                 Duration
sectors such as: corporate events, hospitality and tourism, community and                                     Students also complete two distance learning modules.
                                                                                 BA 3 years
cultural events, festivals, arts and entertainment, leisure and sport.           BA Hons 4 years              Year 4 (Honours)
       Course content includes elements relating to the development of           Contact                      All students will complete a dissertation in the Honours year. Further
operational skills across a range of sectors, as well as project management,     Dr Adrian Lavercombe         specialised study may include: the comparison of international events,
legislation and risk management. The development of lifelong learning skills     Undergraduate Admissions     strategic management of events, risk management and safety, plus
is embedded in each area of study and a special feature will be the close        Officer 0800 027 1000         contemporary issues in event management.
                                                                                 (44 141 848 7044
liaison with industry leaders in the events arena.
                                                                                 outwith UK)                  Career Prospects
Course Content                                                                                                The course is designed to meet the current needs of industry and prepare
Year 1                                                                                                        you for a successful career in event management. Events have an increasing
As part of your first year, you will explore the background to the event                                       significance in society, business and in the international arena. In Scotland,
industry and gain an understanding of event management processes                                              the Edinburgh Festival, T-in-the-Park and Celtic Connections are globally
through subject specialist study. Students will have the opportunity to study                                 recognised. There is now, more than ever, a greater need for effective event
related areas such as tourism in addition to other business subjects.                                         management. Employment opportunities range across the public and private
                                                                                                              sectors in the events arena from conventions and conferences to festivals
                                                                                                              and commercial retail events.
28                                                                                                                                                                                                                  29

Business
                                                                                                                                                                                                Dumfries Campus
                                                                                                                                                                                                Related course(s) in
                                                                                                                                                                                                Dumfries, see page 11.

Human Resource
Management
People are crucial to the success of any organisation.                            UCAS                         Year 3                                                                    *Delivery at Ayr Campus
Human resource practitioners play a fundamental                                   Ayr – (see opposite)*        In Year 3 you have the option of undertaking credited work-based learning  In Ayr the degree titles
role not only in managing people but also in                                      Hamilton –                   in an employing organisation or continuing to study on campus. On campus, HRM and Management or
                                                                                  N600 H BA/HRM                                                                                           HRM with Management
playing a key role in the performance of today’s                                                               you will study the core HRM topics of employee relations, performance,
                                                                                  Paisley – N600 P BA/HRM                                                                                 are available at Level 3 only
organisations. If you think you can bring out the best                                                         reward and employment law. In addition, you will also study business       for students entering with
                                                                                  Campus
in people, this degree could be just right for you.                               Ayr*, Hamilton, Paisley
                                                                                                               research methods and strategic management.                                 appropriate Higher National
Most organisations know that their people are their most important assets.        Entry                        (Optional) Work-Based Learning                                             qualifications, or equivalent.
It is only through the creativity, innovation and performance of people that      Higher BBCC including        Students intending to graduate with a Single subject Honours degree have         UCAS
organisations, in all sectors of the economy, can achieve their goals.            English plus Maths at        the opportunity to undertake work-based learning during Year 3. This allows      HRM and Management –
                                                                                  Standard Grade.              students to apply their academic learning and skills within the workplace        UCAS NN62 A BA/HRMMgt
        This means that managing people is a key task for managers.
And at the heart of managing people is Human Resource Management.                 A-Level CC plus 3 GCSE       and gain credit for appropriate work experience before entering their            HRM with Management –
The BA Human Resource Management (HRM) programme provides you with                passes including English     Honours year. Students complete two distance learning modules, related to        UCAS N6N2 A BA/
the skills and knowledge to operate successfully in a professional capacity       and Maths.                   their degree, during the work-based learning placement as preparation for        HRMWMgt
in HRM, playing a key role in the performance of today’s organisations.           Year 2 Entry with an HNC     entry to Honours study.
The course covers both specialised areas of human resource and general            in an appropriate subject.   Year 4 (Honours)
management which ensures that you have the flexibility to pursue a                 Year 3 Entry with an HND     You will undertake an Honours dissertation, which allows you to investigate,
generalist management or specialist HR role.                                      in an appropriate subject.   in-depth, an HRM problem or issue. In addition, you continue to specialise
Course Content                                                                    Applicants may also be       in HRM, dealing with subjects such as HR strategy, international HRM and
Year 1                                                                            considered with other        equality and diversity.
Students are introduced to the study of Human Resource Management                 academic, vocational or
                                                                                                               Career Prospects
(HRM), developing an awareness of the contribution of HRM to                      professional qualifications
                                                                                                               A degree in HRM will offer you flexibility in terms of your career. The general
organisations. In addition, students will gain an overview of other key           deemed to be equivalent.
                                                                                                               management modules will provide you with the knowledge and skills to
business disciplines such as law, information management and marketing.           Duration
                                                                                  BA 3 years                   begin your career at a junior general management level position if you
Year 2                                                                            BA Hons 4 years              choose, whilst the specialist knowledge and applied HRM skills will equip
From Year 2 onwards, the HRM specialism is developed through the study of         Contact                      you to pursue a career within an HRM function. Recent HRM graduates
the core HRM topics of recruitment and selection, learning and development        Dr Adrian Lavercombe         are now employed in organisations such as Ford, Scottish Power, Tarmac,
and human resource planning. You will also study additional subjects that         Undergraduate Admissions     Motorola, IBM, Scottish Enterprise, various local councils and the NHS.
are important in the management of people in organisations. These include         Officer 0800 027 1000
organisational behaviour, business decision-making and personal and               (44 141 848 7044
interpersonal skills.                                                             outwith UK)

Industrial Placement
Students studying Single, Joint or Major/Minor degree combinations have the
opportunity between Years 2 and 3 to undertake a year’s industrial placement.
This provides practical experience in their subject area and added insight into
industry, which will enhance student employability after graduation.
30                                                                                                                                                                                        31

Business
                                                                                 Part-time option also
                                                                                 available, contact
                                                                                 University Direct tel

Information                                                                      0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                 uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


Management
In our rapidly changing world, the effective                                     UCAS                         Year 2
management of information is critical. This degree                               P110 P BA/IM                 The specialist Information Management modules in Year 2 are Information
provides a thorough grounding in the knowledge                                   Campus                       for Business and Information Management. The Information for Business
and skills essential for information management                                  Paisley                      module looks at information needs of managers across functional
and gives you the opportunity to put your skills                                 Entry                        departments e.g. HRM, marketing etc. Organisation structure will also be
                                                                                 Higher BBCC including
into practice through work-based learning in a                                                                examined as well as the utilisation of information as a resource within
                                                                                 English plus Maths at
business setting.                                                                Standard Grade.
                                                                                                              an organisation. The Information Management module will look at the
                                                                                                              importance of information, the relationship of information management
Information is now widely accepted as being one of the most important            A-Level CC plus 3 GCSE       to other academic disciplines and will include a basic introduction to
assets of a modern business. Effective utilisation of information is now an      passes including English
                                                                                                              information and communication technologies. Students are strongly
essential skill required of modern managers and its importance is increasing     and Maths.
                                                                                                              encouraged to undertake a year’s paid placement in industry which gives
on a daily basis as a result of the speed of technological development.          Year 2 Entry with an HNC     them excellent practical experience, assists their academic learning and
       Managers today are bombarded with data from every direction, both         in an appropriate subject.   boosts their employability after graduating.
from within the organisation and from external sources. They need to be
                                                                                 Year 3 Entry with an HND
able to separate the wheat from the chaff as far as this data are concerned,                                  Industrial Placement
                                                                                 in an appropriate subject.
processing what is relevant and discarding the excess. From the relevant                                      Students studying Single, Joint or Major/Minor degree combinations have
data they need to be able to extract the information that their organisation     Applicants may also be       the opportunity between Years 2 and 3 to undertake a year’s industrial
                                                                                 considered with other        placement. This provides practical experience in their subject area and
requires. In this way, they will build up a knowledge base that will serve
                                                                                 academic, vocational or      added insight into industry, which will enhance student employability
them well in the turbulent contemporary market place.
                                                                                 professional qualifications
       The Information Management degree has been designed to                                                 after graduation.
                                                                                 deemed to be equivalent.
enhance your information extraction and utilisation skills. It will develop      Duration                     Year 3
an understanding of both the operational and theoretical aspects of              BA 3 years                   Depending on whether students are doing a Single/Major/Joint/Minor
information, as well as modern information management technologies.              BA Hons 4 years              degree they will be expected to do two or more of the following
Topics will include: information strategy, negotiations, managing information,   Contact                      specialist modules:
communications, knowledge management and decision-making strategies.             Dr Adrian Lavercombe         •      Ethics of Information – this module looks at how information
                                                                                 Undergraduate Admissions            management interacts with its technological, social, political,
Course Content
                                                                                 Officer 0800 027 1000
Year 1                                                                                                               professional and economic environments.
                                                                                 (44 141 848 7044
For students taking an Information Management degree the compulsory                                           •      Business Information Systems – will examine the flow of information
                                                                                 outwith UK)
specialist module for Year 1 is the Principles of Information Management.                                            both within and across organisations, and of methods of managing
This module will deal with the practical aspects of Information                                                      organisational knowledge.
Management. Students will study application packages from the Microsoft                                       •      Information and Society – looks at communications in the macro
Office suite and use a range of electronic information systems such as web                                            environment and the broad concepts and theories of information
browsers, internet search engines, and online hosts.                                                                 systems and information and communication technologies.
                                                                                                              •      Business Systems Evolution – examines amongst other things how
                                                                                                                     business information systems have evolved since the 1950s. >
32                                                                            33




(Optional) Work-Based Learning
Students intending to graduate with a Single subject Honours degree have
the opportunity to undertake work-based learning during Year 3. This allows
students to apply their academic learning and skills within the workplace
and gain credit for appropriate work experience before entering their
Honours year. Students complete two distance learning modules, related to
their degree, during the work-based learning placement as preparation for
entry to Honours study.
Year 4
Students will complete two or more of the following modules depending on
whether they are doing a Single/Major/Joint/Minor degree:
•     Business Intelligence – looks at organisational databases, data
      warehousing and expert systems.
•     Information Analysis – will examine the decision-making process,
      planning, negotiating and information and systems evaluation.
•     Information and Competition – looks at using technology for
      competitive advantage and systems analysis and design.
•     Advanced Business ICT – this module examines systems networking
      from the perspective of the business manager.
Career Prospects
As a graduate you can look forward to excellent career prospects within
organisational management. Past graduates who have specialised in
Information Management have commenced careers in international
consultancy, private and public sector management, senior project
management, education and a host of other areas.
Professional Exemptions
Depending on the modules taken, recognition and exemption from relevant
professional bodies may be possible.
34                                                                                                                                                                                                              35

Business
                                                                                 Part-time option also                                                                                       Dumfries Campus
                                                                                 available, contact                                                                                          Related course(s) in
                                                                                 University Direct tel                                                                                       Dumfries, see page 11.

International                                                                    0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                 uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


Marketing
Marketing plays a fundamental role in the modern                                 UCAS                         (Optional) Work-Based Learning
business world – in fact, it can be critical to the                              Hamilton –                   Students intending to graduate with a Single subject Honours degree have
success or failure of an organisation. This exciting,                            N550 H BA/IntMkt             the opportunity to undertake work-based learning during Year 3. This allows
                                                                                 Paisley –
ever-evolving subject equips you with the skills                                                              students to apply their academic learning and skills within the workplace
                                                                                 N550 P BA/IntMkt
and knowledge to build a career in marketing in                                                               and gain credit for appropriate work experience before entering their
                                                                                 Campus
a variety of organisations.                                                      Hamilton, Paisley
                                                                                                              Honours year. Students complete two distance learning modules, related to
                                                                                 Entry
                                                                                                              their degree, during the work-based learning placement as preparation for
The International Marketing degree’s aims are to promote a critical
                                                                                 Higher BBCC including        entry to Honours study.
awareness of the environments in which the marketing disciple operates
both in commercial and not-for-profit sectors. The programme is designed          English plus Maths at        Industrial Placement
                                                                                 Standard Grade.              Students studying Single, Joint or Major/Minor degree combinations have
to facilitate the acquisition of generic and specialist skills that will be
transferable and relevant to a wide range of working environments and            A-Level CC plus 3 GCSE       the opportunity between Years 2 and 3 to undertake a year’s industrial
be relevant to your chosen career path.                                          passes including English     placement. This provides practical experience in their subject area and
        The programme is delivered to both full-time and part-time students.     and Maths.                   added insight into industry, which will enhance student employability
The full-time programme lasts 4 years (with 3 years for the Ordinary degree).    Year 2 Entry with an HNC     after graduation.
In part-time mode, the programme can be completed in 4.5 years (for the          in an appropriate subject.   Career Prospects
Ordinary degree) and 6 years for Honours. There is flexibility in delivery with   Year 3 Entry with an HND     Students should expect to have acquired a range of theoretical and
students attending during the day, in the evening and on an infill basis          in an appropriate subject.   practical skills that will enable them to develop their careers in a diverse
where students can attend classes during the day and/or evening to suit                                       range of sectors. Graduates will possess the necessary marketing skills to
                                                                                 Applicants may also be
their individual needs. On occasion, it has been possible to meet the needs      considered with other        add value for any given organisation with both the theoretical knowledge
of small numbers of students wishing to take a particular module by offering     academic, vocational or      and developed practical skills learnt through a structure process of
it on an open learning/drop-in basis and there will be opportunities for         professional qualifications   applied exercises. Graduates can expect to present potential employers
work-based learning within the programme. Students who are undertaking           deemed to be equivalent.     with developed knowledge in the Marketing subject area with a broad
a Single Honours programme will be eligible for inclusion on the work-           Duration                     understanding of the business environment. In addition, graduates will have
based learning route.                                                            BA 3 years                   a range of interpersonal skills such as presentation skills; ability to work
                                                                                 BA Hons 4 years
Course Content                                                                                                in teams and autonomously when required; project management skills;
                                                                                 Contact
•     Marketing Concepts                                                                                      selling skills and negotiating skills. These skills will have been developed
                                                                                 Dr Adrian Lavercombe
•     Business & Marketing Research                                                                           via specific programme modules and practical exercise as a course of
                                                                                 Undergraduate Admissions
•     Personal & Interpersonal Skills                                            Officer 0800 027 1000         their studies.
•     Marketing Planning & Control                                               (44 141 848 7044             Professional Recognition
•     Understanding Global Markets                                               outwith UK)                  Students on completion of their studies are encouraged to join the Chartered
•     Consumer Behaviour                                                                                      Institute of Marketing and strive towards Chartered Marketer status.
•     Business Research Methods
•     Marketing Communications Mix
•     Global Strategy
•     Marketing in Emerging Markets
•     Strategic Marketing
•     Honours Dissertation
36                                                                                                                                                                                           37

Business
Law

The Law programme seeks to promote knowledge,                                     UCAS                         Industrial Placement
understanding and a critical awareness of a range                                 Hamilton –                   Students studying Single, Joint or Major/Minor degree combinations have
of major concepts, values, principles and rules of the                            M100 H BA/Law                the opportunity between Years 2 and 3 to undertake a year’s industrial
                                                                                  Paisley – M100 P BA/Law
Scottish legal system.                                                                                         placement. This provides practical experience in their subject area and
                                                                                  Campus
                                                                                                               added insight into industry, which will enhance student employability
Students are given the opportunity to study in-depth a variety of specialist      Hamilton, Paisley
                                                                                                               after graduation.
branches of law, as well as gaining an understanding of the workings of the       Entry
Scottish legal system and court structures. You will be encouraged to adopt       Higher BBCC including        Year 3
a contextual approach to the study of law, with special emphasis attached to      English plus Maths at        All students must study the core module Legal Research Methods.
the relevant social, economic, and political contexts in which law operates.      Standard Grade.              Additionally, you can choose to specialise in subjects such as Criminal
        The programme seeks to offer undergraduates a demanding                   A-Level CC plus 3 GCSE       Procedure and Legal Aid, Criminology, Law of Information Technology,
programme of study. Not only will you gain a thorough knowledge of legal          passes including English     Legal Research Project, Personal Taxation, Law, Ethics and Medicine,
rules and principles, you will also become familiar with the processes of         and Maths.                   Employment Law, Media Law, Succession Law, Law of Evidence, and
critical thought by acquiring an insight into the problem-based nature of         Year 2 Entry with an HNC     Law of Delict.
law. Students will be required to develop sophisticated legal research and        in an appropriate subject.   (Optional) Work-Based Learning
problem-solving skills in order to analyse questions of law, and questions        Year 3 Entry with an HND     Students intending to graduate with a Single subject Honours degree
about law, in a structured way. This systematic approach to legal scholarship     in an appropriate subject.   have the opportunity to undertake work-based learning during Year 3.
will assist students in achieving their academic potential and produce                                         This allows students to apply their academic learning and skills within
                                                                                  Applicants may also be
graduates who are thoughtful and persuasive individuals.                                                       the workplace and gain credit for appropriate work experience before
                                                                                  considered with other
        The course aims to facilitate the acquisition of generic and specialist   academic, vocational or      entering their Honours year. Students also complete two distance
transferable skills relevant to both a career in law and in the wider business    professional qualifications   learning modules.
sector. Students will benefit from a range of practical teaching methods and       deemed to be equivalent.
will build a portfolio of key personal and employability skills. Students will                                 Year 4 (Honours)
                                                                                  Duration
also benefit from professional level training in Westlaw, the legal professions                                 All students will complete an Honours dissertation. You can choose further
                                                                                  BA 3 years
preferred research database. The course includes a number of field visits          BA Hons 4 years              to pursue Honours subjects such as Human Rights Law, Contemporary
including trips to the Scottish Parliament, the High Court and the                Contact                      Legal Issues, Advanced Concepts of Criminal Law, Administrative Law,
Sheriff Courts.                                                                   Dr Adrian Lavercombe         Substantive Law of the European Union, Children and the Law,
                                                                                  Undergraduate Admissions     Environmental Law, and Commercial Leases.
Course Content                                                                    Officer 0800 027 1000
Year 1                                                                                                         Career Prospects
                                                                                  (44 141 848 7044
You will follow a core package of foundation law modules which include                                         Graduates are likely to find opportunities for employment in a wide range
                                                                                  outwith UK)
Introduction to Scots Law, Criminal Law, Principles of Contract, Law and the                                   of areas, including citizens advice, trading standards, paralegal work,
Legal Process, and Public Law.                                                                                 accountancy, human resources, the civil service, local government, legal
                                                                                                               publishing, academia, public boards and authorities, the police force,
Year 2                                                                                                         banks, insurance companies, finance companies, manufacturing and
All students must study the core module Law of the European Union.                                             trading organisations. While the course does not provide students with
Additionally, you can choose to study subjects such as Business Law,                                           a qualification to be a solicitor or advocate, it does provide students with
Company Law and Liquidation, Consumer Law, Family Law, Landlord and                                            valuable knowledge and skills that may be used to seek further
Tenant, Law of Property, and Planning Law.                                                                     professional legal qualifications.
38                                                                                                                                                                                                                    39

Business
                                                                                Part-time option also                                                                                         Dumfries Campus
                                                                                available, contact                                                                                            Related courses in
                                                                                University Direct tel                                                                                         Dumfries, see page 11.

Management                                                                      0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                uni-direct@uws.ac.uk




The BA (Hons) Management degree seeks to promote                                UCAS                         Industrial Placement                                                          *Delivery at Ayr Campus
a critical awareness of the world of management and                             Ayr – (see opposite)*        Students studying Single, Joint or Major/Minor degree combinations have the In Ayr the degree titles
facilitate the acquisition of generic and specialist                            Paisley – N202 P BA/Mgt      opportunity between Years 2 and 3 to undertake a year’s industrial placement. HRM and Management or
                                                                                Campus                                                                                                      HRM with Management
transferable skills which are relevant to your chosen                                                        This provides practical experience in their subject area and added insight
                                                                                Ayr*, Paisley                                                                                               are available at Level 3 only
career path.                                                                                                 into industry, which will enhance student employability after graduation.      for students entering with
                                                                                Entry
The aim of the management programme is to produce management                    Higher BBCC including        Year 3                                                                         appropriate Higher National
practitioners and professionals able to make an effective contribution to       English plus Maths at        In Year 3, you will have the option of undertaking credited work-based         qualifications, or equivalent.
work in a variety of organisations in both the public and private sectors.      Standard Grade.              learning (see below) or continuing your studies on campus. On campus,       UCAS
The management programme has been an integral part of the University’s          A-Level CC plus 3 GCSE       you will undertake a company-based project alongside the study of business *Ayr Campus: HRM
business provision for many years and is reviewed on a regular basis to         passes including English     research methods and strategic management.                                  and Management –
reflect the changes in the field. This programme will help you develop your       and Maths.                                                                                                     UCAS NN62 A BA/HRMMgt
                                                                                                             (Optional) Work-Based Learning
intellectual and imaginative powers, your understanding and judgement,                                                                                                                         HRM with Management –
                                                                                Year 2 Entry with an HNC     Students intending to graduate with a Single subject Honours degree have          UCAS N6N2 A BA/
your abilities to resolve problems effectively and see the relevance of a       in an appropriate subject.   the opportunity to undertake work-based learning during Year 3. This allows       HRMWMgt
wide variety of approaches fundamental to the discipline of management.                                      students to apply their academic learning and skills within the workplace
                                                                                Year 3 Entry with an HND
It should also stimulate you towards an analytical and creative approach,       in an appropriate subject.   and gain credit for appropriate work experience before entering their
encouraging independent judgement and critical self-awareness. You can                                       Honours year. Students also complete two distance learning modules.
                                                                                Applicants may also be
then direct these abilities to continual improvement in your employment
in the field of management. It should also provide you with opportunities
                                                                                considered with other        Year 4
                                                                                academic, vocational or      In the final year, you will undertake an Honours dissertation, allowing
to acquire and develop generic and specialist transferable skills, which are    professional qualifications
relevant to your chosen career paths.                                                                        you the opportunity to investigate a selected management topic in detail
                                                                                deemed to be equivalent.
       This programme is delivered in both full and part-time modes. There is                                whilst at the same time continuing to specialise in the area of management
                                                                                Duration
flexibility in delivery with students attending during the day, in the evening                                through core and recommended subjects such as organisation development,
                                                                                BA 3 years
and on an infill basis where students can attend classes day and/or evening                                   leadership and change and project management.
                                                                                BA Hons 4 years
to suit their individual needs. On occasion, it has been possible to meet the   Contact                      Career Prospects
needs of small numbers of students wishing to take a particular module by       Dr Adrian Lavercombe         A degree in Management offers you flexibility in terms of your career options
offering it on an open learning/drop-in basis and there will be opportunities   Undergraduate Admissions     and direction. After graduation you will have the knowledge and expertise
for work-based learning within the programme.                                   Officer 0800 027 1000         to secure a junior management position within a range of industries and
                                                                                (44 141 848 7044             the public sector. In the recent past, management graduates have secured
Course Content                                                                  outwith UK)
Year 1                                                                                                       employment in a number of organisations such as Boots, Scottish Power,
You will take 5 distinctive core modules. These are the Learning Environment,                                the NHS, Stena Line and the Commonwealth Games Federation.
Business Management, Principles of Information Management, Introduction                                      Professional Exemptions
to Economics and Accounting and Marketing Concepts. You will also select                                     Depending on the modules taken, recognition and exemption from
one optional module.                                                                                         relevant professional bodies may be possible. Graduates may gain
Year 2                                                                                                       exemption from the ‘knowledge and understanding’ requirements of the
The modules you will take will include: Business Decision-Making,                                            Chartered Management Institute. In addition, the one-year placement may
Organisational Behaviour, Operations Management, Personal and                                                count towards the practical experience requirements for full Chartered
Interpersonal Skills, and Employee Development and an optional module.                                       Management Institute membership.
40                                                                                                                                                                                                                       41

Business
                                                                                     Part-time option also                                                                                              Related course(s):
                                                                                     available, contact                                                                                                 Event Management,
                                                                                     University Direct tel                                                                                              see page 26.

Tourism                                                                              0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                     uni-direct@uws.ac.uk




Tourism is a massive global industry. This course is                                 UCAS                              Industrial Placement
designed to meet the needs of that industry and to                                   N800 P BA/Tour                    Students studying Single, Joint or Major/Minor degree combinations have
prepare your for a career that could take you all over                               Campus                            the opportunity between Years 2 and 3 to undertake a year’s industrial
the world.                                                                           Paisley                           placement. This provides practical experience in their subject area and
                                                                                     Entry                             added insight into industry, which will enhance student employability
Now is an exciting time to study tourism in the UK, with international               Higher BBCC including
                                                                                                                       after graduation.
visitors set to increase during the Year of Homecoming Scotland in 2009.             English plus Maths at
Visitor demand will continue to rise with attendance at the London Olympics          Standard Grade.                   Year 3
in 2012 and the Commonwealth Games in Glasgow in 2014. Our Tourism                   A-Level CC plus 3 GCSE            You will study more specialised tourism subject areas including the
programme focuses on enabling students to learn about the nature and                 passes including English          management of tourism operations, optional modules in policy and
scope of the tourism industry, to meet the needs of tourism employers and            and Maths.                        planning for tourism and events such as conferences, tourism marketing,
the expectations of the visitor.                                                                                       environmental and sustainable practice in tourism.
                                                                                     Year 2 Entry with an HNC
        All sectors are explored from visitor management and information to          in an appropriate subject.        (Optional) Work-based Learning
hospitality and customer service, visitor attractions, sustainability in tourism                                       Students intending to graduate with a Single subject Honours degree have
                                                                                     Year 3 Entry with an HND
and tourism development.                                                                                               the opportunity to undertake work-based learning during Year 3. This allows
                                                                                     in an appropriate subject.
        The programme should help you develop a range of management                  Applicants may also be            students to apply their academic learning and skills within the workplace
and operational skills required to work in the tourism and related industries.       considered with other             and gain credit for appropriate work experience before entering their
It should also stimulate an analytical and creative approach, encouraging            academic, vocational or           Honours year. Students also complete two distance learning modules.
independent judgment and critical self-awareness. You can then direct these          professional qualifications
abilities to continual improvement in your experience of the tourism or              deemed to be equivalent.          Year 4 (Honours)
related sectors. It also should provide you with opportunities to acquire                                              All students will complete an Honours dissertation and will study specialist
                                                                                     Direct entry is possible to the
and develop generic and specialist transferable skills which are relevant to                                           areas in international tourism development and strategic tourism management,
                                                                                     Tourism programme at SCQF
your chosen career paths.                                                                                              considering contemporary issues in the global economy, trends, significant
                                                                                     Levels 8, 9 and 10, with the
                                                                                     necessary qualifications or        events and their influences on the future of tourism worldwide.
Course Content
Year 1
                                                                                     pre-requisites.                   Career Prospects
                                                                                     Duration                          Recent graduates have been offered jobs in all areas of the tourism
You will study the nature and scope of the tourism industry; consider
                                                                                     BA 3 years                        and related industry sectors, ranging from airport management, events
industry sectors including travel and transport, hospitality, visitor attractions,   BA Hons 4 years
events and visitor information. You may also have the opportunity to study                                             management, research and development work with environmental agencies
                                                                                     Contact                           to positions in hotels, travel companies, heritage tourism, visitor attraction
related areas such as event management and other business subjects.                  Dr Adrian Lavercombe
                                                                                                                       management, tourist board and other government agency jobs. Some have
Year 2                                                                               Undergraduate Admissions
                                                                                     Officer 0800 027 1000
                                                                                                                       pursued interests in marketing, consultancy and planning and development
Tourism knowledge and understanding are expanded with additional                                                       in tourism and related fields. This is a tourism degree that equips graduates
                                                                                     (44 141 848 7044
subject areas including the administration of tourism and hospitality and                                              to take up many different, senior positions in a wide range of areas.
                                                                                     outwith UK)
tourism operational service delivery. You may also study event planning and
development and other business subject areas.                                                                          Professional Exemptions
                                                                                                                       Depending on the modules taken, recognition and exemption from relevant
                                                                                                                       professional bodies may be possible. Elements of the programme may
                                                                                                                       enable students to become members of tourism and hospitality professional
                                                                                                                       bodies such as the Tourism Society or Institute of Hospitality.
42                                43




Computing
       I’m Heather
       from South Ayrshire
       I’m 22
       I’m studying
       Computer Animation
       with Digital Art.
       I plan to become an
       animator and publish
       my work.
       I like making sculptures
       with Fimo and I don’t
       like cats – they make
       me sneeze!
44                                                                                                                                                                                                                        45

Innovative and career-focused
programmes in a range of
exciting areas.


Degree title                           Paisley        Hamilton       Dumfries     Section contents             Campus facilities                                                                  John Nelson, Computer
Business Technology                       ✓                                       Business Technology     48   Paisley Campus                                                                     Games Technology graduate,
Computer Animation                        ✓                                       Computer Animation      52   •     over 500 PCs in a range of specialist and generalist laboratories            was offered a job as
Computer Animation with Digital Art       ✓                                       Computer Animation                                                                                              Programmer with leading
                                                                                                               •     a PlayStation® Games Development Laboratory for Linux
Computer Animation with Games Development ✓                                       with Digital Art        52                                                                                      games developer DC Studios
Computer Animation with Multimedia        ✓
                                                                                                                     based prototyping                                                            at the end of his degree.
                                                                                  Computer Animation with      •     virtual environment project laboratory
Computer Games Development                ✓               ✓*                                                                                                                                      John worked on a host of
                                                                                  Games Development       52   •     an IBM-supported ‘Super Computer Cluster’
Computer Games Technology                 ✓                                                                                                                                                       exciting projects, including
                                                                                  Computer Animation
Computer Networking                       ✓               ✓                                                    •     audio mastering facilities                                                   the I-Robot and Ice Age
                                                                                  with Multimedia         52
Computing                                 ✓               ✓              ✓                                     •     Cisco supported network laboratories                                         games for mobile phones
                                                                                  Computer Games
Information Technology                    ✓               ✓              ✓                                     •     animation technologies as used by industry                                   after joining DC, who have
Multimedia Technology                     ✓                                       Development             54                                                                                      released over 50 games
Web Development                           ✓                                       Computer Games               Hamilton Campus                                                                    for systems, including the
                                                                                  Technology              56   •    10 PC labs with a wide range of general and specialist software               Nintendo GameCube,
*subject to University approval                                                   Computer Networking 58       •    PC access in library                                                          Sony PlayStation 2 and
Industry expertise                                                                Computing               50
                                                                                                               Dumfries Campus                                                                    Microsoft Xbox.
Seminars and guest lectures from industry professionals give you the              Information Technology 60
                                                                                                               •   3 teaching labs                                                               ”As a valuable member
opportunity to gain a unique insight into industry. Visiting lecturers have       Multimedia Technology 62                                                                                        of our team, John put
                                                                                                               •   Internet cafe suite
included business and e-business consultants, representatives of web              Web Development         64                                                                                      the skills and knowledge
                                                                                                               •   PC access in library
development and music companies, as well as staff from Sony Computer                                                                                                                              he gained from his
Entertainment Europe and Blackrock Studios.
                                                                                 “In the games industry        Research and industrial collaboration                                              course to good use and
                                                                                  no-one can afford to         We have a proven track record in knowledge and technology transfer in the was willing to learn
Professional recognition                                                          stagnate. We have to         form of applied research, training and consultancy:                                new techniques from his
Most of our degree programmes are approved by the British Computer                keep moving, just            •     a growing number of partnerships secured with small to medium-               colleagues, as well as
Society. In addition, the Computer Games Technology programme is one of           to keep up with the                                                                                             independently solving
                                                                                                                     sized enterprises, for whom we have addressed and solved problems
only two such degrees in the UK currently with full accreditation by Skillset,    technology, let alone                                                                                           specific code issues
                                                                                  the market. We need
                                                                                                                     relevant to industry and commerce
the Sector Skills Council for the Audio Visual Industries in the UK.                                           •     UWS is a key partner in the Scottish Centre for Enabling Technologies, which highlights a well-
                                                                                  fresh ideas from those                                                                                          balanced work ethic.“
Get animated                                                                      entering the industry,             based at Glasgow’s Pacific Quay – one of the main creative industry
                                                                                                                                                                                                  Wendy Ellis,
Our degrees in Computer Animation were introduced to respond to the               as well as a good solid            hubs in Scotland
                                                                                                                                                                                                  Operations Director
demand for skilled graduates in the creative industries. Our Computer             understanding of how         •     our IT Academy is one of the largest providers of specialist vendor courses of DC Studios, Glasgow
Animation graduates are well-equipped to work in a number of areas                game development                   in the UK, and has achieved recognition from Microsoft, Linux Professional
including games, animated films, music videos, special effects, web design,        works. It’s great to see           Institute (LPI), Certified Internet Webmaster (CIW) and Adobe Macromedia.
                                                                                  courses, such as the one           It also is a Cisco Networking Academy and successfully built up a network
virtual environment and product display design.
                                                                                  run by the University,             of 10 Cisco Local Academies in central Scotland
                                                                                  striving to provide us
                                                                                                               •     our research achieved representation in the 4* category of the 2008
                                                                                  with the new talent
                                                                                  we need.”
                                                                                                                     Research Assessment Exercise, denoting international standing
                                                                                  Dave Ranyard,                •     we have a successful track record in attracting external income from
                                                                                  Audio Manager London               providers within and outwith the UK >
                                                                                  Studio Sony Computer
                                                                                  Entertainment Europe
46                                                                                                          47




Creative technologies                                                          “Using industry standards,
This is a major growth area encompassing computer games and animation           Skillset has approved
which has become a core area of development for the University, attracting      courses enabling the
                                                                                industry to identify
over £1 million of inward investment to facilitate partnership with industry
                                                                                a good source of
and has led to the establishment of a base at Pacific Quay in Glasgow            graduates and to help
alongside many of the key players in the West of Scotland creative              potential new entrants
industries sector.                                                              find credible routes into
Networking technologies                                                         the industry.”
Networking students have access to a range of up-to-date facilities as a        Ian Livingstone,
                                                                                Eidos Interactive
result of our collaboration with Cisco. Students are able to understand the
practicalities of real network systems as well as how to model them and
configure them for optimum performance. This means our students are able
to enter the employment market with the skills and knowledge that are
directly relevant to the networking industry.
Success in business computing
The business sector has a growing need for graduates with sound business
knowledge coupled with the necessary expertise to exploit modern software
and IT applications. Distinct from computer programming, this area focuses
on how to analyse and propose innovative solutions to business problems
while taking advantage of leading-edge technologies. Students study
subjects that span business and modern technologies and have access to
the latest industry-standard business software and application tools as a
result of our partnerships with Microsoft and other IT providers.
48                                                                                                                                                                                               49

Computing
                                                                                   Part-time option also
                                                                                   available, contact
                                                                                   University Direct tel

Business                                                                           0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                   uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


Technology
The Business Technology degree has been designed                                   UCAS                          Year 2
to reflect the importance of how and why businesses                                 G290 P BSc/BT                 Students undertake modules that provide a more detailed examination of
adopt, and make use of new approaches and new                                      Campus                        subjects vital to the Business Technologist. Topics studied include business
technologies, and to instil graduates with core IT                                 Paisley                       database systems, home and business computer networks, website and
and business skills.                                                               Entry                         multimedia design and authoring, and analysing, innovating, proposing and
                                                                                   Higher BCC preferably
                                                                                                                 procuring business technology requirements and solutions. Students will
The business sector has a recognised and growing need for such graduates,          including English, plus
                                                                                   Mathematics @ Standard
                                                                                                                 also make use of a business simulation tool to gain experience of running
who can couple sound business knowledge with the necessary technical
                                                                                   Grade.                        their own business.
expertise to manage, maintain and improve the technology that is used in
a modern business and to exploit modern software applications to power             A-Level CD, plus three        Year 3
the business and drive its growth.                                                 GCSEs including English       Students study more about ensuring the effectiveness and value of business
        This programme is distinct from more traditional computing courses         and Mathematics.              technology through project management and business analysis as well as
in that it does not focus on programming or other specialist technical             Year 2 HNC in a business      increasing their depth of knowledge about the most recent advancements
skills. Rather, it recognises that there is a need for good general technology     or IT related area.           in business technology such as business intelligence, wireless and the
practitioners working in Small and Medium-sized Enterprises (SMEs) who                                           mobile enterprise.
                                                                                   Year 3 HND in a business
have been educated in the key aspects of business technology and who can           or IT related area.           Year 4 (Honours)
provide organisations with an exemplary technical support and maintenance          Duration                      Students have the opportunity to demonstrate their ability to integrate
skillset as well as being able to function in a key business role. The focus of    BSc 3 years                   business and technology aspects of the programme into a major, individual
this degree programme is influenced by the E-skills UK ITMB (Information            BSc Hons 4 years              research project as well as studying more about key strategic level aspects
Technology Management for Business) syllabus to prime graduates for the            BSc (Sandwich) 4 years        of business and technology.
technology challenges facing business today.                                       BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years
        Students are encouraged to undertake an optional 12-month paid             Contact                       Career Prospects
placement in an organisational setting, either in the UK or abroad. These          Tom Caira or Carolyn          The needs of the business sector have been a driving force in the
placements attract a significant salary and can be taken at the end of Year 2       Begg 0800 027 1000            development of this degree and, as a result, graduates have excellent career
or Year 3.                                                                         (44 141 848 7044              prospects. Their mix of business and IT skills makes them very attractive
                                                                                   outwith UK)                   to employers. In previous years, typical graduates have found employment
Course Content                                                                     uni-direct@uws.ac.uk          with organisations such as Shell UK, IBM, J P Morgan, Ernst & Young and
The course delivers a combination of technology and business related                                             Cap Gemini as well as with companies in the small business sector. The
modules in every year. Many of these modules are designed around                                                 broad-based nature of this course aims to enable you to make an effective
accredited material from organisations such as Microsoft and COMPTIA,                                            contribution to implementing and integrating technology within a modern
affording students the opportunity to supplement academic studies with                                           business environment and to fulfil professional roles such as business
professional certification, if they so desire. Extensive use is made of real life                                 analyst, project manager, technology manager, systems administrator, trainer,
case studies, field trips and guest industry lectures throughout the course.                                      teacher, technology consultant, technical support manager and e-business
Year 1                                                                                                           adviser within almost every business sector.
Students are introduced to the fundamental topics associated with business
technology that focus on the key aspects of contemporary business
functions and applications, supporting desktop PC users and developing
an understanding of modern technology and its use in business.
50                                                                                                                                                                                                                    51

Computing
                                                                                Part-time option also
                                                                                available, contact
                                                                                University Direct tel

Computing                                                                       0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                uni-direct@uws.ac.uk




The BSc Computing degree is built round a series                                UCAS                           In addition to these core elements of your course, you will be able to choose *Subject to University
of modules which follow a number of defined                                      Dumfries –                     from a number of topics to broaden your computing expertise dependent on approval.
computing themes. These include software                                        G401 D BSc/Comp                which campus you are studying at. These will be developed over the successive
                                                                                Hamilton –
development; databases and web development;                                                                    levels of the course and will become increasingly specialised as you progress,
                                                                                G401 H BSc/Comp
enterprise development or computer networking.                                  Paisley –
                                                                                                               for example:
The core of the programme is intended to give you the skills in producing       G401 P BSc/Comp                BSc (Honours) Computing at Paisley Campus
software that will prepare you for a challenging career in computing, while     Campus                         Studying at the Paisley Campus, you have the option to extend the software
offering you the flexibility to study those computing technologies that most     Dumfries, Hamilton, Paisley    development strands in the core of the course to include a wider focus
interest you. This allows you develop a wide-ranging understanding of           Entry                          on the disciplines of software engineering, enterprise technologies and
computing, and to develop skills that will be attractive to employers looking   Higher CCC, plus               web development.
not only for software developers, but also systems analysts or webmasters.      Mathematics and English
                                                                                at least at S Grade.           BSc (Honours) Computing at Hamilton Campus
       It is possible to study Computing on a full-time or part-time basis as a                                Studying at the Hamilton Campus, you have the option to extend the software
Single, a Major, or a Joint programme; as such, it can be awarded on its own A-Level CD, plus                  development strand and the study of database and web development to
or combined with other subjects (subject to timetabling constraints).           Mathematics and English
                                                                                at least at GCSE.
                                                                                                               include a wider focus on the discipline of computer networking.
Course Content                                                                                                 (Optional) Industrial Placement*
                                                                                Year 2 HNC, or equivalent
Core – Paisley, Hamilton and Dumfries campuses                                                                 Students studying at the Hamilton Campus will have the option of taking an
                                                                                qualification, in appropriate
The first year of the course provides a sound introduction to computing          subject area (equivalent to    industrial placement module for two to three months in trimester two of the
as a profession. This introduces software development processes and             120 credits).                  third year of the programme which will allow you to enhance your computing
technologies, including the foundations of programming in a modern                                             skills in an industrial or commercial environment.
                                                                                Year 3 HND, or equivalent
programming language and the development of applications for the internet
                                                                                qualification, in appropriate   BSc (Honours) Computing at Dumfries Campus
and the world wide web.
                                                                                subject area (equivalent to    Studying at the Dumfries Campus, you have the option to complement
       The software development theme of the course continues in second         240 credits).
year, with core modules on the analysis of software requirements and                                           the software development strand in the core of the course with a range
                                                                                Duration                       of topics, including multimedia, before studying a wider range of
the design of software systems and components. These show you how               BSc 3 years
to analyse a system as a set of interacting objects that provide services                                      web-development approaches relevant to the modern business.
                                                                                BSc (Sandwich) 4 years
to each other, and how to design your software based on this idea. You          BSc Hons 4 years               (Optional) Sandwich Placement
also learn how to use modern software modelling tools and development           BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years    This programme offers an optional 12-month paid placement in an industrial or
environments to assist you in analysis, design and coding tasks. Databases      Contact                        commercial setting, providing practical experience to complement academic study.
are also introduced, and you will learn more on how websites and                Glenn Affleck (Dumfries);
                                                                                Miriam Birch (Hamilton);       Career Prospects
web-based applications are developed.
                                                                                Russell Frew (Paisley);        You can look forward to excellent career prospects within the computing
       In the core of the third year, you will study how software projects
                                                                                0800 027 1000                  profession. Jobs may include: software developer or software engineer, web
are managed, and you will be begin to develop deep technical skills in the
                                                                                (44 141 848 7044 outwith       developer, systems analyst, database administrator or database designer,
development of web services and applications and of the database systems
                                                                                UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk       but careers in IT consultancy, networking and infrastructure support, or
which underlie many of them. These themes are continued in the Honours
                                                                                                               technology sales are also possible.
year. The Honours year also includes a substantial individual project.
                                                                                                               Professional Recognition
                                                                                                               Accreditation by the British Computer Society is possible depending on
                                                                                                               subject selection within the degree.
52                                                                                                                                                                                                                        53

Computing Computer Animation
(with options in Digital Art/Games
Development*/Multimedia)
Computer animation is a growth industry, seeing                                 UCAS                             Our degree course will offer you a formally taught course that will encourage     Duration
greater use on the web, on TV, and in multimedia                                Paisley                          the development of your own skills and give you the chance to work with           BA/BSc 3 years
in general.                                                                     • Computer Animation –           others and compare your work with theirs. A degree in animation will be an        BA/BSc Hons 4 years
                                                                                   GW46 P BSc/CA                 indication to an employer that you have the self-discipline required to see       Contact
The market for computer animation is a complex and dynamic one covering         • Computer Animation
                                                                                                                 projects through from beginning to end and be able to meet deadlines.             John McQuillan
such areas as computer games (where income levels now exceed those                 with Digital Art –                                                                                              0800 027 1000
                                                                                   G4W2 P BA/CAWDA
                                                                                                                 These are skills that are of great importance, no matter what branch of the
generated by Hollywood box-office receipts), film and TV, product and                                                                                                                                (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                • Computer Animation             media industry you go into from your degree.                                      UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
architectural visualisation and the digital arts. Among the products of this
sector is the rich, interactive content now available via the world wide           with Games                    Course Content                                                               *At time of print, delivery of
                                                                                   Development* –                Years 1 & 2
web, the creation of special effects and computer generated imagery for                                                                                                                        the Computer Animation
                                                                                   WG66 P Mod/CAWGD              Students concentrate on the principles of animation, planning and practice.
film and advertising and the delivery of audio and video content to mobile                                                                                                                      with Games Development
                                                                                • Computer Animation
telephones and similar devices. For individuals who wish to contribute                                           Animation skills are introduced and developed across both years along with programme is subject to
                                                                                   with Multimedia –
and make an impact on this industry, there is a fundamental requirement            C4WF P BSc/CAWM
                                                                                                                 video production. Students learn how computer tools can be used for artistic final University approval.
of being able to use and adapt modern software applications for artistic        Campus
                                                                                                                 representation. Students work on 2D and 3D animation.
purposes and to use highly creative approaches to problem-solving. The          Paisley                          Year 3
Computer Animation course has been designed to meet these objectives.           Entry                            The emphasis is on developing modelling and animation skills and on
       Computer Animation students can concentrate on animation by              Higher BBC plus English          independent project work. Project work, including the production of a demo
following a Single subject degree route or supplement their animation           and Mathematics at least @       reel to demonstrate skills and ability for presentation to potential employers,
knowledge by combining animation with Digital Art, Games Development*,          S Grade. Higher Art & Design
                                                                                                                 is featured. Students also study character animation in greater depth, along
or Multimedia. The Single subject Honours degree investigates a wider range     or Graphic Communication
                                                                                                                 with modelling and texturing.
                                                                                preferred for Computer
of practical animation skills. The Computer Animation with Digital Art course
incorporates a theme including video, drawing for animation and art.
                                                                                Animation. Higher Art            Year 4 (Honours)
                                                                                and Design or Graphic            In the Honours year, students are expected to demonstrate an ability to work
The Computer Animation with Games Development* course contains a                Communication required for       on their own on a substantial project. The Honours project offers students
theme on how games are designed, what factors contribute to the playability     Computer Animation with          the opportunity to create a piece of animated work that will showcase their
of computer games, and how animation is used in video games. The                Digital Art.
                                                                                                                 skills and assist them when seeking employment at the end of the course.
Computer Animation with Multimedia degree includes a theme on design,
                                                                                A-Level CC plus GCSE             Students also study digital effects for TV and film and virtual reality.
creating content and authoring for multimedia and techniques for delivering     English and Mathematics.
this content.                                                                   A practical art-related          Career Prospects
       A range of project-led themes to establish the importance of             A-Level preferred for            In Scotland alone, over 100,000 people are employed in the creative
Computer Animation and its role within its related disciplines is covered.      Computer Animation. A            industries sector. Graduates from this course will be able to work within a
Considerable time is spent on examining how visual images, first created on      practical art-related A-Level    number of areas such as computer games, animated films, music videos,
paper (2D), can be manipulated and enhanced using computer technology           required for Computer            special effects, web design, product design and display. Not all graduates will
so that the final result (2D or 3D) can be delivered in an animated and          Animation with Digital Art.      go on to work in animation full-time, some will work on short-term contracts
potentially interactive form using digital media such as CDs and websites.      Year 3 HND in a relevant         and some will work in other areas of multimedia and digital design. No
Animation skills within the courses are developed using industry-standard       discipline. Please contact the   matter what area, more and more animation is finding its way into general
software such as Autodesk Maya and Newtek Lightwave.                            Admissions Officer for details.   multimedia and web design and the skills developed during the degree will
                                                                                NB: Applicants may also          be useful in any of these related disciplines.
                                                                                be required to submit a
                                                                                portfolio of artwork.
54                                                                                                                                                                                                                   55

Computing
Computer Games
Development
One of the fastest growth areas for computer games                            UCAS                          Year 2                                                                         *At time of print, delivery
development is casual gaming for such technologies                            Hamilton –                    In Year 2, you will deepen your understanding of gameplay. You will also        of the Computer Games
as netbooks, mobile phones and social webspaces.                              G610 H BSc/CGD                build upon your introductory knowledge of computers with more applied           Development programme at
                                                                              Paisley –                                                                                                     Hamilton Campus is subject
Companies, educators, marketers, lobbyists, and even traditional games                                      knowledge of programming on the internet and mobile phones. Sound
                                                                              G610 P BSc/CGD                                                                                                to final University approval.
developers, use these new technologies as places to embed computer                                          is an important part of entertainment, so you will also learn about the
                                                                              Campus
games. Such games often incorporate other applications: music, video,         Paisley, Hamilton*
                                                                                                            characteristics of sound and how it is used in games.
e-chat and photos. As newer technologies, such as 3G phones and home          Entry                         Year 3
and wireless broadband, become the standard, there is a need to be ever       Higher BBC plus               You will, as part of a studio team, develop a complex portfolio piece game
open to the kinds of games that can be created and the technologies that      Mathematics and English       in a realistic project. This will introduce you to planning and team-working
can be used to create them.                                                   at S Grade.                   in a market-sized game development. Aspects of legal issues and game
       The games programmer for web and personal technologies must be         A-Level CC plus three         testing and quality assurance will also be covered. Finally, there may be
able to work in small studio-based teams and be business aware. Unlike        GCSEs including English       opportunities in areas such as games artwork and entrepreneurship.
the mega-scale of AAA title console games, there is potential in this indie   and Mathematics.
                                                                                                            (Optional) Sandwich Placement
marketplace for the graduate entrepreneur to make their mark, as mobile       Year 1 HNC in                 Students have the option to undertake a year’s placement in industry,
phone and internet companies seek to satisfy their millions of subscribers    a related subject.            in the UK or abroad, to gain valuable work experience in the computer
with a wider range of games and companies seek to create lower cost           Year 2 HNC Computer           games sector.
products for emerging markets.                                                Games Development;
       As a student on the programme, you should bring an awareness           HND Computing; or HND
                                                                                                            Year 4 (Honours)
of games and the growth and spread of digital technologies. You should        Software Development.         In Year 4, you will study the technologies at the leading edge of the indie
also have an openness to creating entirely new gaming experiences on the      Duration                      and alternative games industry and marketplace. Growing areas, including
ubiquitous technologies that exist in almost every pocket, handbag or home    BSc 3 years                   games-based learning, Web 2.0 and virtual reality, where our staff research
in the developed and developing world.                                        BSc (Sandwich) 4 years        and publish, can be investigated as gamespaces. You will also undertake a
                                                                              BSc Hons 4 years              major individual project, creating and evaluating a game or investigating an
Course Content                                                                BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years   aspect of game development.
Year 1                                                                        Contact
In Year 1, you will study subjects that underpin computer games software.                                   Career Prospects
                                                                              John Sutherland
These are the basic skills that are essential to the developer/programmer     0800 027 1000
                                                                                                            There is particular demand for good graduates in this rapidly growing
of video games. You will learn how to write computer program code to          (44 141 848 7044 outwith      market who are skilled to push forward the boundaries of the personal
bring together the gameplay, artwork and music in order to create 2D          UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk      and social entertainment marketplace whilst reducing development costs.
games. You will also be introduced to how animation is created and used                                     As personal and home information technologies become ubiquitous tools,
in video games.                                                                                             taking an ever increasing place in people’s lives, a new kind and range of
                                                                                                            games have emerged. There is demand for the skilled developer who can
                                                                                                            create entertainment, ‘edutainment’ and ‘infotainment’ products that will
                                                                                                            work across this range of technologies and for many kinds of players.
56                                                                                                                                                                                                  57

Computing
Computer Games
Technology
Our Computer Games programmes have been                                        UCAS                             Year 2
designed in collaboration with some of the UK’s                                G451 P BSc/CGT                   In Year 2, the software engineering skills and programme development
top computer games companies. This approach                                    Campus                           techniques studied in Year 1 are expanded. Graphics, animation and
has been successful, and our Computer Games                                    Paisley                          3D modelling techniques are explored and you will study the design of
Technology course is currently one of only two                                 Entry                            computer games. Students continue to develop their skills in modelling,
                                                                               Higher BBCC including
games development degrees in the UK to receive                                                                  underlying physical processes (such as collisions, gravitation and
                                                                               Mathematics and preferably
full Skillset accreditation.                                                   Physics, Computing or
                                                                                                                momentum). Programming skills continue to be developed with options
                                                                               Technological Studies,           in mobile and web games.
In 2007 the games industry was worth $37.5 billion (PricewaterhouseCoopers)
and is forecast to expand by more than 9% annually over the next few           plus S Grade Mathematics         Year 3
                                                                               and English.                     You will study advanced games programming techniques, the use of AI
years to become worth $48.9 billion by 2011. Particularly strong growth has
occurred in indie and on-line gaming, with annual market expenditure of        A-Level CCD including            (Artificial Intelligence) techniques in computer games, and develop a
over £2 billion. Consequently, the demand for a skilled workforce to service   Mathematics and preferably       complete computer game throughout the year. Students develop a large
this growth is expected to be significant.                                      either Physics, Computing        computer game as part of their games portfolio, which can be used to
       Students have access to industry-standard hardware, some of which       or ICT, plus GCSE English,       demonstrate their skills to prospective employees. There are options in the
                                                                               Mathematics and preferably       degree year that allow students to specialise in areas of interest.
has been provided as a direct result of our links with the games industry.
                                                                               Physics. AAB including
One example of this is our Playstation Games Development Laboratory, as        Mathematics and preferably       (Optional) Sandwich Placement
developed with Sony Computer Entertainment Europe. This growth creates         either Physics, Computing        You have the option to undertake a year’s paid placement in industry, in the
a high demand for skilled programmers. At the core of the games industry       or ICT will allow direct entry   UK or abroad, to gain valuable work experience in the computer games sector.
is the games console: Microsoft Xbox 360, Sony PS3, Nintendo Wii and the       to Year 2.
desktop PC.                                                                                                     Year 4 (Honours)
                                                                               Year 2 HNC Computer              In the Honours year, you will study console development techniques (e.g. for
       Developing today’s console games can take years, cost millions of       Games Development;
pounds and involve hundreds of developers: programmers, artists, musicians,                                     the PlayStation console) and the application of virtual reality techniques in
                                                                               HND Computing; or HND
producers, etc. The heart of the video game is written by the console                                           the construction of computer games. Students undertake a major individual
                                                                               Software Development,
games programmer. This creates the entire world where gameplay takes           providing in all cases that
                                                                                                                project to develop a computer game. Options in the final year allow
place, ensuring the player is engrossed in hours, days and even months of      C++ and Mathematics              students to specialise in their areas of interest.
challenging play. To do this, the programmer must know how to create every     have been covered.               Career Prospects
aspect of the interaction between the player and the game.                     Duration                         Graduates of this course have already secured positions as games
                                                                               BSc 3 years                      developers/programmers with some of the sector’s biggest games
Course Content                                                                 BSc (Sandwich) 4 years
Year 1                                                                                                          companies. Graduates have also found employment in a range of
                                                                               BSc Hons 4 years
In Year 1, you will study the hardware and software components of                                               computing-related areas such as software development.
                                                                               BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years
computer games. Programming concepts are introduced and 2D graphics            Contact                          Professional Recognition
programming skills developed. The mathematics of the physical processes        Professor Thomas                 This course is approved by the British Computer Society and has also been
to be modelled in computer games is studied alongside the creative             Connolly 0800 027 1000           accredited by Skillset, the Sector Skills Council for the Audio Visual Industries
processes used in games construction. Computer animation techniques            (44 141 848 7044 outwith         in the UK. For more information, see www.skillset.org
are also introduced.                                                           UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
58                                                                                                                                                                                        59

Computing
                                                                               Part-time option also
                                                                               available, contact
                                                                               University Direct tel

Computer                                                                       0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                               uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


Networking
Few organisations in today’s world operate without                             UCAS                         Year 4 (Honours)
computers. Computers connect to each other using                               Hamilton –                   In the final year, you will study more advanced networking topics, such as
a variety of networks. These may operate over small                            H601 H BSc/CompN             wireless networks, Linux networking, and security, as well as undertaking a
                                                                               Paisley –
or large areas, and be based on copper cables,                                                              network project designed to integrate many of the knowledge and skills you
                                                                               H601 P BSc/CompN
fibre optic links, or wireless technology. In addition,                                                      have built over your years of study.
                                                                               Campus
the computers may require specialised network                                  Hamilton, Paisley            Career Prospects
software. Such infrastructure and software needs to                            Entry                        Other than various areas of software development, system and network
be specified, designed, installed and maintained,                               Higher BBC including one     design and administration are the most buoyant areas of the IT jobs market,
and this programme aims to provide you with the                                from Mathematics, Physics,   and knowledge of new network technologies are particularly valued. As a
knowledge and skills required to work in this area.                            Computing plus S Grade       graduate of the Computer Networking course, you could be expected to be
                                                                               Maths and English.           qualified for jobs such as network administrator, system engineer, network
The BSc Hons Computer Networking course covers general computing
technology in first year, and begins to specialise in networking technology –   A-Level CC including one     manager, system administrator, network support specialist and network
particularly infrastructure such as routers and switches – in second year,     from Mathematics, Physics    support technician.
while remaining fairly broad in outlook. Third year provides an in-depth       or Computing plus GCSE
                                                                               English and Maths.           Professional Recognition
look at Windows and Linux server administration, along with a detailed                                      This course is approved by the British Computer Society. Contact Admissions
look at how networks operate. Finally, if you opt to study to Honours level,   Year 3 HND in a relevant
                                                                                                            Officer for further details.
you will have the opportunity to study specialised areas such as wireless      computing or networking
networks and security, and you’ll have the opportunity to complete your        discipline.
own networking project.                                                        Duration
                                                                               BSc 3 years
       Since the programme is accredited by the British Computer Society,
                                                                               BSc Hons 4 years
you have a route towards professional engineering qualifications such as
                                                                               Contact
CEng, should you wish.                                                         Duncan Thomson
Course Content                                                                 (Paisley); Chris Armstrong
Year 1                                                                         (Hamilton); 0800 027 1000
In the first year networking concepts are introduced along with a broad         (44 141 848 7044 outwith
range of computing topics including basic web authoring and introductory       UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
programming.
Year 2
In the second year, you will examine networking infrastructure, such as
routers and switches, including design and administration of such networks.
You will also learn the basics of operating systems and databases.
Year 3
You will study both Windows and Linux system administration, giving you
the knowledge and skills required to maintain servers on a network. You will
also learn more about the operation of networks.
60                                                                                                                                                                                                         61

Computing
                                                                                     Part-time option also
                                                                                     available, contact
                                                                                     University Direct tel

Information                                                                          0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                     uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


Technology
This flexible programme is designed to provide                                        UCAS                           (Optional) Sandwich Placement
the opportunity for you to tailor your programme                                     Dumfries –                     This programme offers an optional 12-month paid placement in an
of study to focus on those areas of Information                                      G502 D BSc/IT                  industrial or commercial setting, providing practical experience to
                                                                                     Hamilton –
Technology (IT) that you wish to pursue. You can                                                                    complement academic study.
                                                                                     G502 H BSc/IT
choose from modules covering aspects of a broad                                      Paisley – G502 P BSc/IT        Year 4 (Honours)
range of computing subjects including internet                                       Campus                         Students will again study from a prescribed list of IT topics and electives.
technologies, multimedia systems, computer                                           Dumfries, Hamilton, Paisley    The additional electives will provide some scope for widening of experience.
animation and business IT.                                                           Entry                          Honours students must undertake a major personal project in a chosen area
With advice from academic staff, you choose your own programme of study              Higher CCC plus                of interest relating to their studies.
                                                                                     Mathematics and English
from the IT modules offered at the campus at which you are studying.                                                Career Prospects
                                                                                     at S Grade Level 3 or above.
It is possible to study Information Technology on a full-time or part-time                                          As a graduate you can look forward to excellent career prospects. The
basis leading to the award of a BSc Information Technology (Single), or to           A-Level CD, including
                                                                                                                    practical approach featured throughout will enable you to make an effective
combine it with another University subject leading to, for example, a BSc            Mathematics and English
                                                                                     at least at GCSE.
                                                                                                                    and immediate contribution within your work environment. Jobs may
Information Technology with Management (Major) or a BSc Information                                                 include: computer programmer, database administrator or systems analyst.
Technology and International Marketing (Joint).                                      Year 2 Exceptionally, HNC
                                                                                     or equivalent qualification     NB: Dumfries Campus
Course Content                                                                       in appropriate subject area    A Joint degree in Information Technology and Management is also offered at the
Year 1                                                                               (equivalent to 120 credits)    Dumfries Campus – for details of UCAS code and application contact University Direct
You will study IT topics from prescribed plus elective/optional lists. The list of   will be considered by the      0800 027 1000 (44 141 848 7044) outwith the UK.
prescribed IT modules are taken from a wide-ranging number of computing              Admissions Officer.
degrees. In such a flexible programme, it is imperative that students                 Year 3 HND, or equivalent
pay particular attention to coherence and progression and a member of                qualification, in appropriate
academic staff will work with you on module selection to address these               subject area (equivalent to
issues. The modules are drawn from programmes such as Computer                       240 credits).
Networking, Multimedia Technology, Web Development, Computer                         Duration
Animation and Computer Games Technology.                                             BSc 3 years
                                                                                     BSc (Sandwich) 4 years
Year 2
                                                                                     BSc Hons 4 years
Students will again study from a prescribed list of IT topics and electives.         BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years
The flexible nature of the programme is such that the topics chosen will              Contact
typically be a mixture of those that build upon Level 1 study and those that         Russell Frew
widen the student’s experience.                                                      0800 027 1000
Year 3                                                                               (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                     UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
Students will again study from a prescribed list of IT topics and electives.
The IT topics selected at this level will predominantly be ones that deepen
the student’s knowledge and understanding. However, there will be scope
for widening the IT experience.
62                                                                                                                                                                                              63

Computing
                                                                                Part-time option also
                                                                                available, contact
                                                                                University Direct tel

Multimedia                                                                      0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


Technology
Rapid advances in technology are continually                                    UCAS                           students are taught the programming skills required to develop interactive
changing the way in which the information we access                             GP43 P BSc/MMT                 applications and introduced to the database technologies which underpin
every day is gathered, presented and delivered.                                 Campus                         most modern websites.
The use of computing technologies in the production                             Paisley
                                                                                Entry
                                                                                                               Year 3
process is fundamental to this, allowing new and                                                               You will learn content development techniques for the production of richly
                                                                                Higher BBC plus English
innovative modes of presentation to be developed.                                                              interactive multimedia materials across a range of platforms, with various
                                                                                and Mathematics at least
Equally, the ever-evolving nature of electronic communications means            @ S Grade.                     industry-standard tools covered in detail. Advanced scripting concepts are
that interactive multimedia content is accessible from almost any location      A-Level CC plus GCSE
                                                                                                               covered, enabling the development of sophisticated applications with a high
at speeds which would have been unthinkable a few years ago. This               English and Maths.             level of interactivity. Coverage of design issues allows students to produce
shift has enabled the development of a whole range of services allowing                                        interactive content for different target markets and devices. While the theory
                                                                                Year 2 Direct entry is
individuals to access and use information in exciting new ways. Content                                        is explored in-depth, there is a strong practical element to the course, with
                                                                                possible for students with
is now delivered onto a wider range of devices including the personal                                          much of the assessment being project-based.
                                                                                a relevant complete HNC in
computer, web, DVD, interactive TV and mobile phone. The Multimedia             computing, multimedia or       Year 4 (Honours)
Technology degree covers both the theoretical and practical aspects of these    web development. Please        Students have the chance to specialise at this level, being able to select
new technologies and is designed to equip you with the skills required to       contact the Admissions         option strands in either the more technical aspects of web development,
compete in the multimedia industry.                                             Officer for details.            or in the more creative areas of animation and video effects. In addition,
       You will study topics such as multimedia computing and web               Year 3 HND in a relevant       core modules covering networked multimedia technologies and the use of
development, using a wide range of industry-standard content creation tools,    multimedia or computer         multimedia in education advance your technical/media skills and enhance
such as Adobe Flash and Dreamweaver. You will learn skills in interface         related discipline including   your awareness of different aspects of multimedia. An Honours level
design, content production and distribution across a number of different        computing, multimedia,         individual project – selected from a wide choice of possible topics –
platforms. In addition, you will have many opportunities to obtain practical    web development.
                                                                                                               is undertaken over two trimesters. This enables students to develop their
experience through project work using the our multimedia facilities, and        Duration
                                                                                                               experience and practical skills in the specific application areas that match
to develop the professional skills required for success in a dynamic and        BSc 3 years
                                                                                                               their interests and future employment options.
                                                                                BSc Hons 4 years
competitive industry.
                                                                                Contact                        Career Prospects
Course Content                                                                  Dr Patrick Walder              The rapid development of computing, multimedia and communication
Year 1                                                                          0800 027 1000                  technologies has led to a demand for graduates who are multimedia literate
You will develop key skills in areas such as multimedia content creation,       (44 141 848 7044 outwith       and commercially aware, and who possess the ability to learn new skills
video production, computer animation and the Internet as a basis for            UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk       and techniques as required. Your creative, technical and communication
understanding the range of technologies used within the multimedia                                             skills may be utilised in areas such as e-commerce, corporate training and
industry. Professional development issues are also addressed at this level.                                    publishing, multimedia marketing or web development. An extensive range
Year 2                                                                                                         of employers including independent consultancies, educational bodies,
Students learn skills in assembling and developing multimedia presentations –                                  government agencies and multinational manufacturing companies will
both standalone and for the world wide web – using standard software                                           have opportunities for graduates with multimedia skills.
tools, as well as in the manipulation of individual multimedia elements                                        Professional Recognition
such as digital images and audio content. The technologies underpinning                                        This course is approved by the British Computer Society. Contact Admissions
content delivery, including broadcast systems, are also covered. In addition,                                  Officer for further details.
64                                                                                                                                                                                             65

Computing
                                                                                Part-time option also
                                                                                available, contact
                                                                                University Direct tel

Web Development                                                                 0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                uni-direct@uws.ac.uk




The Internet and the world wide web have                                        UCAS                           Year 4 (Honours)
radically altered the way in which individuals and                              G450 P BSc/WebD                In the Honours year, you will extend your studies of server side systems
organisations communicate and conduct business.                                 Campus                         and emerging technologies used for the production of complex, but
Internet based technologies allow millions of users to                          Paisley                        intuitive to use, dynamic web interfaces. In addition, all students undertake
access unprecedented resources; send and receive                                Entry                          a major individual project over the year, providing the opportunity for you
                                                                                Higher BBC plus S Grade
e-mail; provide online information to workgroups,                                                              to demonstrate your creativity, knowledge and understanding of web
                                                                                Mathematics and English.
vendors and remote clients; and ensure safe and                                                                development to produce a web service product.
secure internet transactions. Uses of the web                                   A-Level CC plus GCSE
                                                                                English and Mathematics.       Career Prospects
continue to develop.                                                                                           The Web Development degree is designed to provide you with the required
                                                                                Year 2 HNC in relevant
To support this high-technology growth sector, there is a demand for skilled                                   skills to design, develop and maintain secure, safe and reliable web services
                                                                                subjects: computing,
personnel who are able to design and develop web services software and                                         that exploit the capabilities of the Internet. This covers a range of areas
                                                                                multimedia, information
administer the infrastructure on which these services operate. Throughout       systems or internet-working.   including web authoring, techniques for the development of web software
this programme, you will gain expertise in: systems design and analysis;        Please contact the             and the administration of servers. The types of skills in demand in the
use of the latest tools, techniques and scripting languages for developing      Admissions Officer              employment market are the ability to set up and manage secure, reliable
dynamic, interactive, secure and robust web solutions; establishing and         for details.                   and robust web servers and to create and maintain appropriate web
maintaining secure web servers; and designing, developing and interacting       Year 3 HND in relevant         material for companies. Graduates from this course should be suitable for
with business models and database systems.                                      subjects: computing,           positions such as web developers, web programmers, Internet and systems
                                                                                multimedia, information        developers and web designers in a variety of organisations, both locally
Course Content
                                                                                systems or internet-working.   and nationwide.
Year 1
                                                                                Please contact the
The first year provides a broad-based introduction to computing, the web                                        Professional Recognition
                                                                                Admissions Officer
and the computing profession. Students gain skills in the use of Internet                                      This course is approved by the British Computer Society. Contact Admissions
                                                                                for details.
tools and techniques, e-business, networks, programming and design.                                            Officer for further details.
                                                                                Duration
Year 2                                                                          BSc 3 years
Year 1 topics are extended but with an increased web focus. Topics include      BSc Hons 4 years
design, authoring and interaction for the web. Through this, you will be        Contact
introduced to industry-standard software such as Adobe Dreamweaver and          Dr Mark Davison
                                                                                0800 027 1000
Flash. Additionally, you will study analysis, the use of XML and databases.
                                                                                (44 141 848 7044 outwith
Year 3                                                                          UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
You will undertake studies in the use of XHTML and JavaScript for client-
side website development and ASP.NET on the server-side. Students will
configure and administer a number of secure servers for the deployment of
web services. Students also study the theory and practice of software for the
implementation of business web solutions.
66                                  67




Creative
Industries


             I’m Finn (right)
             from Glasgow
             I’m 25
             I’m studying
             Commercial Music.
             I plan to get more
             involved in the
             music industry.
             I like listening to
             new music and
             going to gigs.
             I don’t like midges.
68                                                                                                                                                                                                                69

An exciting range of programmes
which anticipate the skills needed
to meet the demands of the creative
and cultural industries.

Our programmes                                                              Section contents            Expert advice                                                                   Island Records
•     designed to develop key skills in creativity, critical thinking and   Broadcast Production   72   Students have enjoyed input from experts from the creative industries,          In 2009, UWS was the
      enterprise to produce graduates who will be able to compete           Commercial Music       74   including:                                                                      only Scottish university to
                                                                            Digital Art            76                                                                                   participate in Island Record’s
      successfully in their chosen sectors, or set up their own                                         •      Fran Healy, singer/songwriter of the Brit award-winning band Travis
                                                                            Film-making and                                                                                             nationwide search of the
      production companies                                                                              •      Award-winning actor, director and screenwriter Peter Mullan, star        UK’s music students for their
•     promote an integrated approach to the development of core skills      Screen Writing         78          of Braveheart                                                            next signing. Island artists
      with a particular focus on creativity for the programmes delivered    Journalism             80   •      Screenwriter Stuart Hepburn, who has worked on TV programmes             include Bob Marley, Amy
      in Ayr; critical thinking and communication for those delivered at    Music Technology       82          including Monarch of the Glen, Rebus and Taggart                         Winehouse and U2.
      Paisley; and enterprise at Hamilton                                   Performance            84   •      Peter Broughan, TV and film producer whose works have included Rob
•     delivered by staff who have wide-ranging experience in the media      Sports Journalism      86          Roy, The Flying Scotsman, Your Cheatin’ Heart and The Justice Game
      and music industries                                                                              •      Colin Rogers and Janis Roddie, DF Concerts (T in the Park/King Tut’s)
Facilities                                                                                              •      John Athenasiou, Head of Human Resources at Warner Music UK
Students enjoy access to:                                                                               •      Emmy award-winning writer and director Kevin Brownlow, one of the
•     a cinema screening room                                                                                  world’s leading authorities on silent film
•     drama studio                                                                                      •      Michael Nardone, star of Rome, River City and Black Watch
•     modern 3-camera digital TV studio, with video streaming capability                                •      Kenny Glenaan, recipient of BAFTA ‘Best Director’ and ‘Best Film’
•     a TV studio configured as a flexible shooting space                                                        awards for his film Summer
•     4 comprehensively equipped radio studios                                                          Hands-on experience
•     6 music rehearsal rooms kitted out with a range of equipment                                      Through our work-based learning module, you’ll have the option to gain
      including drums, PA and amps                                                                      practical experience in an industry setting. Our students have worked with:
•     4 recording studios equipped with Digidesign’s ProTools                                           •      Channel 4
      recording equipment                                                                               •      BAFTA Scotland
•     2 music production labs with Macintosh computers running ProTools,                                •      Sky TV
      Logic and Reason software                                                                         •      community projects
•     2 art and design studios, and 2 associated computer labs running                                  •      radio companies, including Xfm
      MAYA animation software, Adobe design, publishing and web                                         •      Scottish Screen
      authoring software, and Final Cut Pro video editing software                                      •      Scottish Media Group
•     5 computer labs equipped with software for audio/radio and video                                  •      Pinewood Studios
      editing, web authoring, publishing and creative artwork software                                  •      Mirror Group Newspapers
•     a student radio station, broadcasting to FM, and on DAB to a                                      •      Sony
      potential audience of 300,000 across the West of Scotland                                         •      Virgin Music
•     a 6-station photographic darkroom                                                                 •      EMI
•     a wide range of equipment available to students to support their                                  •      DF Concerts, promoters of T in the Park
      work in classes and workshops, as well as coursework. We enjoy                                    Our partnerships with local authorities in Ayrshire and in East Renfrewshire,
      supporting partnerships with Sony and Digidesign, and student                                     and with NHS Ayrshire and Arran, have led to the founding of several RSL
      computing facilities are based on Apple computers                                                 radio stations in the local community, including 3TFM, Girvan FM, Garnock
                                                                                                        Valley FM, and Pulse FM. >
70                                                                                                           71




International opportunities                                                   Attic Lights
Links with educational establishments enable student exchanges/practical      Commercial Music and Music
project work with partners in Germany, Finland and Sweden as well as          Technology students got an
                                                                              insight into the competitive
in the UK. Music students are involved in a band exchange project with
                                                                              Scottish music scene from
universities in Sweden and Germany and are setting up a record label.         up-and-coming Scottish
Our extensive links with the Harris Institute for the Arts – one of North     band Attic Lights, recently
America’s leading arts education establishments – has seen our students       signed to Island Records
benefit from work experience, arranged through the Harris Institute, in the    and managed by Francis
Toronto offices of some of the industry’s top media companies, including       McDonald, former member
EMI, Sony, Audiohead and BMG.                                                 of Teenage Fanclub.
Research
Our vibrant research activity covers a wide range of areas, including:
•     providing advice on the cultural and educational aspects of London’s
      successful bid to host the 2012 Olympic games
•     the first major “Celebrity Culture” conference which attracted
      academics from across the world
•     research on poetry, independent film, and new media
•     documentary charting life in Stirling’s Raploch estate, broadcast on
      BBC Scotland
•     production of 3D animated comedy for the BBC
•     research on Operación Triunfo – Catalan reality TV, where Big Brother
      meets Pop Idol
•     an interactive web project on the poetry of e.e. cumming
Showcase your work
An annual end of year show, supported by BAFTA Scotland, gives students
the chance to showcase their work to peer groups and potential employers,
with Associated Newspapers and NHS Ayrshire and Arran awarding prizes at
this event.
72                                                                                                                                                                                           73

Creative Industries
Broadcast Production

The key elements of the course are directing drama                             UCAS                        technical and creative work in developing, pitching and producing a short
and documentary, script-writing, producing for radio,                          P391 A BA/BroadM            documentary. You will also have the opportunity to improve your writing
television and film, and the study of media theory                              Campus                      skills through Introduction to Scriptwriting and the option Screenwriting –
and history as well as new digital media platforms.                            Ayr                         The Short Film. Other options include Digital Photography 2 and Digital
                                                                               Entry                       Media 2. Additional modules include Broadcast Drama and Scotland: Media
Students are able to define their own pathways and by their final year will      Higher BBC, including       & Identity. You will also be able to choose from a range of other optional
be primarily producing work in their own chosen area of specialisation,        English.
                                                                                                           modules, including a modern language (French, German or Spanish).
such as film, television, radio and script-writing. You will have the chance    A-Level BC or CC. English
to work in radio and television studios and digital sound and video editing    required at GCSE.
                                                                                                           Year 3
suites. Students have the opportunity to broadcast on the campus radio                                     You will choose to specialise in one of two major strands; Television
                                                                               Year 2 Entry may be         Production, or Radio Production. Television Production (a) students can
station, and have also contributed to a web-based television service. You      possible with HNC in
also have the option of work-based learning in a media-related company                                     make a further choice in Trimester 2, between the more practical hands-on
                                                                               Communication, Media
or organisation.                                                                                           Television Production (b) and the more script and producer-based Television
                                                                               or related subject.
       Modules include Directing Drama, Drama Series Development,                                          Drama Development. The Radio Production (a) & (b) modules are practical
                                                                               Year 3 Entry may be         and production-focused, and consist of theory about practice and practical
Scriptwriting, Radio Production, and Documentary. Optional modules include
                                                                               possible with HND in
focus on Scotland’s Media Representations, Broadcast Drama, American                                       exercises. Each module deals with particular aspects of production, and
                                                                               Communication, Media
Broadcasting, Crime Drama, Digital Media, and Photojournalism. Aspects of                                  focuses on two particular genres of radio text. Students will also undertake
                                                                               or related subject.
media theory studied include television studies, the media industries, new                                 a Broadcast Project designed to link directly to your production work as well
                                                                               Please note: students       as next year’s dissertation work. Third year studies continue with a particular
digital platforms and intellectual property rights. Students can also select
                                                                               will be invited to attend   emphasis on global media. Modules include Rights and Creative Industries
from a range of modern language options including Spanish and French.          for interview.
                                                                                                           and Global Cultural Industries. A range of additional options are available.
Course Content                                                                 Duration
Year 1                                                                         BA 3 years                  Year 4 (Honours)
Television production, film-making and script-writing are presented within      BA Hons 4 years             Year 4 offers you an exciting opportunity to study the areas that interest
Television Production 1a and 1b. Your lens-based skills can be further         Contact                     you most and to produce creative work that you feel passionate about.
developed through Digital Photography 1. Radio is presented through            Jason Robertson             Your Creative Project and Research Project makes up two thirds of your
                                                                               0800 027 1000               entire year and allows you the opportunity to concentrate on the areas you
Introduction to Radio. Critical studies of media output will be presented
                                                                               (44 141 848 7044            have chosen in Year 3 i.e. television or radio. Your Broadcasting Research
within the production-oriented modules, and in the programming strand,
                                                                               outwith UK)
within the core module Factual Broadcasting, as well as optional modules                                   Project (a) & (b) runs over the entire year through two modules and will
                                                                               uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
such as Sport, Media, Culture. The design aspects of digital creativity and                                allow you to immerse yourself in an area of broadcast media that interests
online delivery are presented within the option Digital Media 1. You will                                  you. Your Creative Project will be a film/television or radio project. This final
also be able to choose, as an optional module, a modern language (French,                                  year pathway is the culmination of all your previous production experiences.
German or Spanish).                                                                                        The final third of the Honours year is made up of Broadcasting – Current
                                                                                                           Issues. Options include Crime Drama and Studio Production.
Year 2
You will continue to produce for film, television, radio and new platforms                                  Career Prospects
and will begin to specialise, choosing a specific pathway of production and                                 This degree prepares you for entering the world of 21st century media and
study that you feel will best prepare you for your chosen career. Modules                                  creative-industries. Graduates have been employed by national broadcasters
include Directing Drama and Radio Practice. Documentary students combine                                   and a range of media companies at home and abroad, such as the BBC.
74                                                                                                                                                                                                 75

Creative Industries
Commercial Music

Music is now one of the UK’s largest industries by export                            UCAS                          Year 2
alone and it is still growing, generating in excess of                               W340 A BA/CM                  Core classes range from analysis of copyright and intellectual property,
£2.5 billion for the economy annually and employing                                  Campus                        to professional practice. Performance options widen to include songwriting
an estimated 130,000 full-time equivalent personnel.                                 Ayr                           and further instrumental/group skills. Production elements include digital
                                                                                     Entry                         music production and video production, new media and website design
A vibrant but constantly changing terrain shaped by technology and                   Higher BBC including
                                                                                                                   and additional options include events production and investigation of the
imagination, the music production environment attracts many, who in the              English and Music or
                                                                                     a science.
                                                                                                                   international music markets.
past were fortunate to sustain a few years of employment.
        The primary objective of this course is to enable those with talent          A-Level CC including Music    Year 3
and ability to forge a varied, life-long career. Incorporating performance,          or a science, plus three      Introducing the concepts of applied creativity, students will also have a
business, technology and sociology elements, the course is delivered                 GCSEs including English.      chance to advance their study into new media and website design, music
predominantly at the University’s campus in Ayr. It is structured around                                           product design and complete either an industry brief or a four-week work
                                                                                     Year 3 Advanced entry
a spine of key skills modules (IT, communication and negotiation skills,             with relevant HND or          placement. Students develop a negotiated project of their own using the
structure of the music industry, applied creativity) and allows students             Advanced Diploma in           University’s rehearsal, digital production and recording studio facilities.
to select modules in performance and/or production and/or industry                   Music, Performance, Music     Record releases and events will be staged from the beginning of trimester
environment/sociology, thereby customising the final qualification to suit             Technology or Music           two onwards. Work-based learning is also offered as an option.
their chosen career path.                                                            Business. For other related
                                                                                                                   Year 4 (Honours)
        A work-based learning module offers the opportunity to gain experience       qualifications contact
                                                                                     Admissions Officer.
                                                                                                                   Research into a key element of commercial music of the student’s choice can
in a relevant organisation or company as an option for students in Year 2 or                                       lead to a dissertation in the second trimester. Music production, marketplace
Year 3. This will further develop students’ practical and personal skills and help   NB: Candidates will           opportunities and their exploitation are assessed and the specialisms extend
them determine their choice of subjects for later specialist study. Advanced         be invited to attend an
                                                                                                                   to encompass singles production, festival and tour production and advanced
project work including record releases and performance events will be                interview and/or audition.
                                                                                                                   artist development. Advanced audio production study is undertaken at
staged regularly to develop the students’ experience and understanding               Duration
                                                                                                                   commercial studio facilities in the centre of Glasgow.
of the industry environment. Open to musicians, producers, DJs, re-mixers,           BA 3 years
those wishing to run small record companies, develop artists or stage                BA Hons 4 years               Career Prospects
live events, the course will encourage each student to develop a group               Contact                       In a rapidly developing employment market, it has become clear that the
                                                                                     Allan Dumbreck                music industry employees of the future will possess industry-specific degree
of specialisms making them sufficiently versatile to sustain not one, but
                                                                                     0800 027 1000                 level qualifications. Adapting to challenges of new media and technology,
several, serial careers in the music industry.                                       (44 141 848 7044 outwith      the BA (Hons) Commercial Music addresses the needs of the workplace.
Course Content                                                                       UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
                                                                                                                   The fields of events production and performance are particularly strong in
Year 1                                                                                                             Scotland; to give one example, the University has agreed a rolling placement
Students are introduced to the three key theatres of the music industry –                                          programme with DF Concerts, promoters of the hugely successful Scottish
performance, production and sociology/industry environment. Initially                                              music festival, T in the Park. The course also addresses the needs of the
encouraged to study all three areas to develop a broad understanding,                                              wider UK industry, identifying work experience placements with many
students will be able to specialise from the second trimester onwards.                                             London based companies.
In addition, each student will complete modules in a number of transferable
skills vital to a career in the industry – IT, project development and
interpersonal and presentation skills.
76                                                                                                                                                                                                                          77

Creative Industries
                                                                                                                                                                                                       Related course(s):
                                                                                                                                                                                                       Computer Animation
                                                                                                                                                                                                       with options in Digital

Digital Art                                                                                                                                                                                            Art/Multimedia,
                                                                                                                                                                                                       see page 52.




Take your art and design skills to a new level –                                    UCAS                            Course Content
this course explores design for print, web design,                                  W290 A BA/DA                    Year 1
video production and animation, opening up                                          Campus                          Students are given opportunities to develop their fine art and design skills.
career opportunities in a range of areas within the                                 Ayr                             They will explore creative areas of video, animation and graphics design for
creative industries.                                                                Entry                           print. They will be given the opportunity to explore art practice and historical
                                                                                    Higher BCC including
                                                                                                                    contextualisation.
This exciting programme aims to widen access to art and design at higher            English and preferably Art.
education level, providing students with the practical expertise, creative          A-Level CC. English
                                                                                                                    Year 2
thinking and aesthetic sensibilities that will be attractive to employers in        Language and Literature         Students will further enhance their skills in fine art and design. They
the creative industries.                                                            required @ GCSE and Art         will become more proficient in the specialist areas of video, animation
         The programme has three main areas of study. Firstly, students             preferred.                      and graphics focusing on web design. They will engage with art-based
will develop practical experience in the more traditional skills of visual                                          theoretical models which will enhance their ability to contextualise and
                                                                                    Year 2 HNC Digital Art
communication and principles of art and design. Through a range of                  and Animation; Animation;       locate their work.
activities, which will include analytical drawing, life drawing and design,         Art and Design; Illustration;   Year 3
students will become proficient in the use of the visual elements and                or other relevant subject.      Students will now specialise in their chosen areas of digital creativity –
composition. These topics provide the background knowledge and practical            Year 3 HND Digital Art          video, animation, graphics and interactive new media. Fine art teaching
skills, essential to a digital art degree. Digital media is the main focus in the   and Animation; Animation;       will continue to develop students’ skills within this area. Academic and
second component and looks at how these art and design principles can               Art and Design; Illustration;   theoretical subject material will further prepare students for their
be applied in the digital domain. You will use state-of-the-art equipment           or other relevant subject.      Honours year.
and cover topics such as design for print, web design, video production and         Contact Admissions Officer
animation. In the third part, academic studies, you will examine the way art        for details.                    Year 4 (Honours)
and other texts engage with people and societies and will provide you with                                          In this final year, students will be expected to utilise their core skills in the
                                                                                    NB: all candidates will be
the opportunity to develop your critical thinking. Professional issues within                                       development of self-generated creative projects covering digital and fine art.
                                                                                    interviewed and assessed
the creative industries will also be addressed.                                     on their portfolio.             Production of an Honours dissertation covering an area of personal study is
         Students will experience a number of studio and workshop practices         Duration                        also a pre-requisite for this programme.
that include individual and team work. There will be opportunities to devise,       BA 3 years                      Career Prospects
at a professional level, creative projects that bring together all the art          BA Hons 4 years                 Digital Art graduates are likely to have employment opportunities in media,
learning and digital skills acquired during the course. Guest lectures and          Contact                         film, television, graphics, animation, computer games design and publishing.
workshop sessions with artists and designers of note are also planned.              Blane Savage                    Graduates of this specialised visually creative degree would be attractive to
                                                                                    0800 027 1000
In addition, students will be able to plan, mount and set up exhibitions                                            employers across the creative industries.
                                                                                    (44 141 848 7044 outwith
of their own creative projects. There may be opportunities to undertake
                                                                                    UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
practical work experience. Applicants will be expected to present a strong
portfolio with evidence of drawing skills, experimentation and research.
         At interview, applicants should be able to discuss their art and design
skills and demonstrate a strong visual awareness through their practical
work. Photographic experience, computer literacy and interest in areas such
as digital art and animation would also be useful to support application for
the course.
78                                                                                                                                                                                             79

Creative Industries
Film-making &
Screen Writing
Get your career in film off to a picture-perfect start                           UCAS                        Year 2
with this practically-oriented degree.                                          WW68 A BA/FSW               In Year 2 you will further develop your creative skills in the contrasting
                                                                                Campus                      contexts of fiction and documentary production. Second year students also
Film-making and Screen Writing is an innovative degree course that will         Ayr                         benefit from specialised teaching in scriptwriting. Skills of critical analysis,
appeal to applicants interested in digital filmmaking, screenwriting, and film    Entry                       research and writing may be developed in film studies modules that look
analysis. The programme is designed to allow you to develop the creative,       Higher BBC including
                                                                                                            closely at film genres, and which examine significant industrial, commercial
critical and professional skills that are important within cinema, television   English.
                                                                                                            and creative aspects of contemporary British cinema.
and related cultural industries. You will gain experience in key areas of       A-Level BC or CC. English
production such as research and scriptwriting, camera and sound operation,      Language and Literature     Year 3
and current post-production techniques. The University is well-equipped with    required @ GCSE.            Year 3 allows you to bring together skills that have been developed in
current digital film technology, television studios, and performance spaces.                                 previous years and engage in more ambitious film-making and scriptwriting
                                                                                Year 2 HNC in Creative
        Modules are taught by staff with recent film-making experience                                       projects. Writing for the screen is a major element of Year 3 and you will be
                                                                                Media, Communication
and students benefit from lectures and workshops by visiting industry            or related subject.         fully encouraged to develop screenwriting expertise. Year 3 also places an
professionals. Recent guest speakers include film director Peter Mullan,                                     emphasis on the professional and creative skills that are important within
                                                                                Year 3 HND in Creative
and film and television writers Sergio Casci and Stuart Hepburn.                                             independent production. Students may continue to develop their critical
                                                                                Media, Communication
        You may also develop your interests in the historical, technological                                skills by studying contemporary Hollywood film-making and by engaging
                                                                                or related subject.
and aesthetic development of film-making. For example, students may have                                     with key theoretical perspectives and research techniques. There will be
                                                                                NB: candidates will be      further opportunities to develop professional and communication skills by
the opportunity to examine contemporary mainstream and independent
                                                                                invited for interview.      undertaking work experience with an appropriate organisation.
American cinema, European cinema, and British cinema.
                                                                                Duration
        A work-based learning module offers the chance to gain experience                                   Year 4 (Honours)
                                                                                BA 3 years
in a relevant organisation or company as an option for students in Year 3.      BA Hons 4 years             Central to studies in the Honours year are two double modules: the Creative
This further develops your practical and personal skills and helps determine    Contact                     Project in which students develop a folio of creative work that provides
your choice of subjects for later specialist study.                             Andrew Jarvis               evidence of a high-standard of achievement in areas such as scriptwriting
Course Content                                                                  0800 027 1000               and directing; and the Honours Dissertation, a research project in which
Year 1                                                                          (44 141 848 7044 outwith    students carry out an independent study of an aspect of film-making which
                                                                                UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk    is of particular interest to them. A core module in film producing is taken by
The first year of the programme introduces you to fundamental aspects of
digital film-making and writing for the screen. Creative and technical skills                                all students. In the Honours year, you may also choose from a range of film
are developed in modules covering video production and creative writing.                                    studies and creative practice options.
Students may also take modules that complement practical film-making                                         Career Prospects
by encouraging the close, detailed analysis of how films are constructed                                     Moving image production (independent film, cinema and television) is
and how a wide variety of films tell stories through techniques of narrative                                 growing considerably in Scotland and is creating a wide range of career
organisation, cinematography, editing and sound.                                                            opportunities not only in production, but also in exhibition, administration
                                                                                                            and education. The broad nature of this course and opportunities to
                                                                                                            specialise in a creative skills stream, mean that graduates will offer excellent
                                                                                                            professional, communication and analytical skills and be able to apply these
                                                                                                            to a number of areas of the media including film and television production,
                                                                                                            journalism, marketing, and management.
80                                                                                                                                                                                                                  81

Creative Industries
                                                                                                                                                                                               Related course(s):
                                                                                                                                                                                               Sports Journalism,
                                                                                                                                                                                               see page 86.

Journalism

The fast-moving world of journalism has changed                                  UCAS                         Year 2
in recent years – no longer confined to print, new                                P500 H BA/Jour               As your knowledge and skills deepen, you will be expected to undertake
media has opened up even more opportunities for                                  Campus                       more advanced news writing and news gathering projects. Students will
graduates. If you want to break the next big story,                              Hamilton                     also have the opportunity to study magazine journalism and broadcast
this course will give you the strong practical skills                            Entry                        journalism. Academic subjects will include the study of politics and law
                                                                                 Higher BCC or above,
needed to excel in this competitive profession.                                                               and media regulation.
                                                                                 including English.
The BA (Hons) Journalism programme will provide you with the professional        A–Level CC including
                                                                                                              Year 3
abilities and practical skills that journalists require to work in a newsroom.   English, plus English        All students will undertake work placement in news organisations during
        You will be taught general reporting, interviewing and writing skills    Language and Literature      this year. Additionally, you will participate in a weekly news production
that will prepare you for the demands of a convergent news environment           @ GCSE.                      class where you will produce news content for print, broadcast and online
where journalists produce news in a variety of formats for print, broadcast                                   news. Students will undertake the study and role of ethics from a journalistic
                                                                                 Year 2 CertHE/HNC
and online audiences.                                                            Journalism (Year 2 entry     perspective and discuss the wider social and cultural responsibilities
        The course also has a strong academic element that underpins the         is dependent on course       of journalism.
practical aspects of journalism. It provides students with a knowledge           content).                    Year 4 (Honours)
of national and local government, the Scottish Parliament, the European          Year 3 DipHE/HND             In this year, you will undertake projects that lead to the completion of an
Union, and international relations as well as civil and criminal law and the     Journalism (Year 3 entry     Honours dissertation, a major research project where you carry out an
role each of these plays in the news media. Aspects of the role of the news      is dependent on course       independent study of some aspect of journalism and its role in society.
media in society, ethical dilemmas facing journalists and technological          content).                    Students will receive individual support and guidance from academic
innovations in the industry, are also studied.                                   Mature students (over 21)    supervisors. Practical portfolio-based work will continue and you will be
        With its strong emphasis on practical skills, all students undertake     will be considered on the    encouraged to continue to undertake appropriate workplace experience.
work placement in newspapers, magazines, broadcast and online news               basis of qualifications and
environments. Students regularly gain work experience in local and national      relevant experience.
newsrooms across Scotland, with tabloid and broadsheet publications.             Duration
Throughout the course, you are encouraged to develop your own portfolio          BA 3 years
of work and build and maintain your own professional contacts.                   BA Hons 4 years
        All students are also given the opportunity to sit the preliminary       Contact
examinations of the National Council for the Training of Journalists.            Margaret Hughes
                                                                                 0800 027 1000
Course Content                                                                   (44 141 848 7044 outwith
Year 1                                                                           UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
Students are provided with a comprehensive introduction to a range of
news writing and reporting skills for print, broadcast and online news
providers. Academic subjects enable you to study a range of issues that
are relevant to journalism and news production in the 21st century.
82                                                                                                                                                                                                                               83

Creative Industries
Music Technology

The broadcasting and recording industries are                                     UCAS                            Year 2                                                                          *Delivery of the Music
anticipated to continue expanding well into the                                   W350 P BSc/MT                   The theory of digital audio is addressed and complemented by practical           Technology degree is
21st century. Although the UK record industry is                                  Campus                          exercises in audio editing and sampling. You will become fluent in the            primarily at the University’s
                                                                                  Paisley*                                                                                                         Paisley Campus; however
contracting, the demand for audio production                                                                      use of industry-standard digital audio workstation software and develop
                                                                                  Entry                                                                                                            students may be required
specialists is as high as ever. The diversification of                                                             an appreciation of industry standards for music file storage, transfer and        to attend the Ayr Campus
                                                                                  Year 1 Higher BBC
media production to smaller companies has created                                                                 networking. Video production skills will build upon the foundation laid in       to access specialist
                                                                                  preferably including either
opportunities for the entrepreneurial individual and                              Mathematics, Physics,
                                                                                                                  Year 1 using professional editing software. Web authoring will be presented facilities such as live sound
audio technologists throughout the developed and                                  Computing, Information          from a designers’ point of view using integrated software for the workflow        equipment. Students may
developing nations.                                                               Systems or Technological        from design to publishing. Students will continue to follow their elected        also choose from a selection
                                                                                  Studies, plus S Grade           additional themes.                                                               of optional modules which
Advances in the development of computer hardware and software have                                                                                                                                 include some presented
                                                                                  Mathematics and English.        Year 3
also meant that computer technology is becoming the engine for recording,                                                                                                                          on the Ayr Campus. In
processing, editing and controlling both video and audio information.             A-Level CC, preferably          Year 3 is intended to develop your knowledge and experience in areas             addition to the facilities in
The BSc Music Technology is intended to allow you to develop skills in the        including either Physics,       of audio, video and media technology. During this year, there is extensive       Paisley, all students will
area of both audio and video production. You will study the use of computer       Computing or Mathematics,       access to digital studio facilities for recording and pre-mastering. The theory also have access to facilities
                                                                                  plus GCSE English,              and practice of digital studio recording is complemented by the study of         at the Ayr Campus which
technology in audio, video and multimedia production and subsequent
                                                                                  Mathematics and                                                                                                  include several studios and
publishing via the world wide web.                                                                                audio signal processing. Students will be equipped to produce multimedia
                                                                                  preferably Physics.                                                                                              live sound facilities. Some
      The programme provides an opportunity for work-based learning,                                              presentations adapted for CD or internet presentation. Students will
                                                                                  BTEC National Diploma           undertake a group project which will integrate the themes of audio, video        elements of the programme
allowing you to gain experience in a relevant organisation or company at
                                                                                  Music Technology.               and multimedia in the production of a promotional multimedia CD for a            may be delivered off campus
home or abroad. This will further develop your practical and personal skills
                                                                                                                                                                                                   to access specialist facilities,
and help you determine your choice of subjects for later specialist study.        Year 3 HND in Music             band or artist. Work-based learning may be undertaken in this year and
                                                                                                                                                                                                   such as a local theatre, to
                                                                                  Technology or closely related   placements include overseas opportunities managed in conjunction with
Course Content                                                                    title (ideally with several
                                                                                                                                                                                                   give students experience of
                                                                                                                  partner institutions.                                                            music production in a real
Year 1                                                                            merits), or Diploma in
The first year of the programme acts as a foundation for later development.                                        Year 4 (Honours)                                                                 auditorium setting.
                                                                                  Audio Recording.
Audio, video and multimedia themes are introduced covering both theory and        Duration                        Audio studio production and digital signal processing will be developed to           The Honours year will be
practice which includes the application of computing technology to the creation   BSc 3 years                     an advanced level and feature surround sound. The distribution of media              presented using facilities of
and production of music, video and multimedia. A discussion of business           BSc Hons 4 years                across the internet via a streaming server and other current topics relating         both campuses.
aspects of the music industry places these themes into context. Modern            Contact                         to networked multimedia will be investigated. The major project enables
music production techniques are analysed and critical listening is developed.     Derek Turner                    students to deepen understanding of music technology in an area of
The practical aspects of live sound reinforcement will be explored together       0800 027 1000                   personal interest and demonstrate a degree of autonomy in working.
with technical underpinning in topics such as acoustics. Video techniques are     (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                  UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk        Career Prospects
introduced and you will make a short video as part of a small production team.                                    Career paths would typically be as studio or recording engineers, sound
Further to the core modules, you will be encouraged to choose additional                                          technicians, studio designers, broadcast engineers, special-effects engineers
complementary modules which provide coherent themes over the course of                                            or audio visual installation engineers. The Music Technology degree also
the degree such as: creative music, European languages, music business, or                                        provides transferable graduate skills which could be applied to careers in
additional video or multimedia. Transferable skills such as project management                                    other areas.
and personal development are embedded within core modules.
84                                                                                                                                                                                                85

Creative Industries
Performance

Build a fulfilling career doing what you love.                                    UCAS                         Course Content
The UWS degree in Performance will give you                                      W400 A BA/Perf               (Degree and Honours Year)
practical experience in a range of areas – from                                  Campus                       The course will cover the following areas: acting for stage; acting for
acting and directing to TV presenting and set design.                            Ayr                          television; directing for stage; directing for television; scriptwriting; theatre
                                                                                 Entry                        design; television design; devising material; television studies; theatre
Those interested in acting will find this degree both challenging and             Year 3 HND Acting &
exciting. The programme has, at its core, three main elements:                                                studies; radio acting; radio presenting; television presenting; research;
                                                                                 Performance or equivalent.
•      the development of creative skills in the practices of performance                                     performance analysis. Work-based learning will also be offered.
                                                                                 NB: Students will also
•      the study of performance from a theoretical and analytical perspective    be expected to attend an     Career Prospects
•      individual and team work, designed to develop and extend personal         audition and interview.      Graduates will find employment opportunities in teaching, television,
       and professional skills and knowledge, in order to build a career in      Duration                     theatre, production, research, community arts and theatre in education.
       the creative and cultural industries                                      BA 1 year
The programme will allow you to experience performance for both stage            BA Hons 2 years
and screen and will cover a broad subject base from improvisation to             Contact
theatre and television theory. Areas of practical experience will include        Jane Robertson
acting, directing, devising material, scriptwriting, TV drama, TV presenting,    0800 027 1000
radio acting, and set design. Theoretical areas covered will include research,   (44 141 848 7044 outwith
performance analysis and theatre and television studies.                         UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
       UWS has excellent facilities including 2 TV studios, a student radio
station, 4 radio studios, editing suites, drama studio, art studios, a cinema
and recording studios.
       Students will also gain practical experience in video production and
radio production. You should have a strong interest in theatre, television,
drama and cinema and have the ability to discuss your views on stage
and screen performances you have seen. Likely interests of applicants
should also include literature, writing, dance, performance, television and
art and design.
       Modules have been designed to respond to a range of employment
opportunities across the cultural and creative industries. You will be
encouraged to further develop skills already gained during your previous
studies in voice, acting, scriptwriting and movement while learning new
and exciting skills in presenting for television and acting for the camera.
       At the end of each year you will participate in a performance-based
project and at the end of the Honours year showcase their work. Where
possible, there will be opportunities for students to undertake practical work
experience. Involvement with community projects and local and national
festivals will be encouraged where appropriate.
86                                                                                                                                                                                                                            87

Creative Industries
                                                                                                                                                                                                 Related course(s):
                                                                                                                                                                                                 Journalism,
                                                                                                                                                                                                 see page 80.

Sports Journalism*

Love sport? If you want to live, breathe and write                               UCAS                         Course Content                                                                    *At time of print, delivery
about a subject you’re passionate about, then our                                P501 H BA/SpJ                Year 1                                                                             of the Sports Journalism
new degree in Sports Journalism could be your next                               Campus                       Students are provided with a comprehensive introduction to a range of              programme is subject to
big goal.                                                                        Hamilton                     news writing and reporting skills for print, broadcast and online news             final University approval.
                                                                                 Entry                        providers. Academic subjects enable students to study a range of issues
The BA (Hons) Sports Journalism programme will provide you with the              Higher BCC or above,
                                                                                                              that are relevant to sport and journalism in the 21st century.
professional abilities and practical skills that will prepare you to work in     including English.
the exciting and growing field of sports journalism.                              A–Level CC including
                                                                                                              Year 2
       At the core of the programme will be the development of core              English, plus English        As students’ knowledge and skills deepen, they will be expected to
journalism skills. Students will be taught general reporting, interviewing and   Language and Literature      undertake more advanced news writing and news gathering projects.
writing skills that will prepare them for the demands of a convergent news       @ GCSE.                      Students will also begin to develop their specialist skills in sports reporting
environment where sports journalists produce news in a variety of formats                                     through a range of practical and theoretical modules.
                                                                                 Year 2 CertHE/HNC
for print, broadcast and online audiences.                                       Journalism (Year 2 entry     Year 3
       The course will bring together a range of practical, professional         is dependent on course       All students will undertake work placement in news organisations during
journalism skills with a well-developed knowledge and understanding of           content).                    this year. Additionally, students will participate in a weekly news production
the role of sport in society and communities. The course also has a strong       Year 3 DipHE/HND             class where they will produce news content for print, broadcast and online
academic element that underpins the practical aspects of journalism and          Journalism (Year 3 entry     news. Students will undertake the study and role of ethics from a journalistic
sport. Students will have the opportunity to study aspects of the law            is dependent on course       perspective and discuss the wider social and cultural responsibilities
and how it relates to both journalism and sport, the cultural aspects of         content).                    of journalism.
both journalism and sport, the importance of sport to local and national         Mature students (over 21)
economies and the role of the ethical reporter in the 21st century.                                           Year 4 (Honours)
                                                                                 will be considered on the
       With its strong emphasis on practical skills, all students undertake                                   In this year, students will undertake projects that lead to the completion of
                                                                                 basis of qualifications and
work placement in newspapers, magazines, broadcast and online news                                            an Honours dissertation, a major research project where students will carry
                                                                                 relevant experience.
environments. Students regularly gain work experience in local and national                                   out an independent study of some aspect of sports journalism. Students will
                                                                                 Duration
newsrooms across Scotland and the UK, with tabloid and broadsheet                BA 3 years                   receive individual support and guidance from academic supervisors. Practical
publications, local and national broadcasters and online sports news             BA Hons 4 years              portfolio-based work will continue and students will be encouraged to
organisations.                                                                   Contact                      continue to undertake appropriate workplace experience.
       Throughout the course, students are encouraged to develop their           Margaret Hughes
own portfolio of work and build and maintain their own professional              0800 027 1000
                                                                                 (44 141 848 7044 outwith
contacts. All students are also given the opportunity to sit the preliminary
                                                                                 UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
examinations of the National Council for the Training of Journalists.
88       89




Design
90                                                                                                        91

Design touches all our lives.




Our career-focused programmes will get you off to a great start in          Section contents
your design career so you can play your part in shaping our lives and       Computer-Aided Design   92
surroundings. Access to some of the latest design engineering facilities,   Design                  94
means you’ll get the best possible start in your future career. Starting    Design with
salaries of up to £25,000 are common among our graduates.                   Manufacturing Systems   96
                                                                            Design with Product
Industry-standard facilities include:                                       Development             97
•     material testing equipment                                            Product Design
•     product design centre with prototyping, design, analysis and          & Development            98
      manufacturing systems                                                 Quality                 100
•     specialist CAD/CAM suites incorporating latest specification
      workstations, with Pro-Engineer Wildfire, design and
      simulation software
•     product manufacturing and measurement suites
•     polymer engineering labs
Industry experience
Many programmes offer an optional sandwich placement to give you the
chance to gain industry insight during your studies.
92                                                                                                                                                                                       93

Design
                                                                             Part-time option also
                                                                             available, contact
                                                                             University Direct tel

Computer-Aided                                                               0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                             uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


Design
There is increasing pressure on manufacturing                                UCAS                          Honours Year
organisations to be more productive and efficient                             H130 P BSc/CAD                The Honours year will focus on the application of advanced CAD techniques
and pro-active to market needs. This has meant                               Campus                        within the design and manufacturing environments. Many examples
that manufacturers have had to adopt new, faster                             Paisley                       of current industrial CAD applications will supplement ‘hands-on’ and
and functionally advanced design, manufacturing                              Entry                         theoretical approaches to student learning. An understanding of the broader
                                                                             Year 3 HND in any
and communication tools in order to maintain a                                                             industrial context will firmly direct students towards future employment or
                                                                             Engineering or Design
competitive advantage. Current computer modelling                            discipline. Other relevant
                                                                                                           postgraduate study.
techniques enable sophisticated design software to                           HND qualifications will also   Career Prospects
be used at an early stage in the design, prototype                           be considered.                The Computer-Aided Design course has been created to meet the needs of
development and manufacture of a product.                                    Duration                      industry and enable you to enhance your career prospects. As a graduate,
                                                                             BSc 1 year                    your wide-ranging skills and experience will be sought by employers within
The course is a tertiary level, two-year programme of study which will
                                                                             BSc Hons 2 years              the design, engineering and manufacturing sectors, offering you a variety
provide students with the opportunity to enhance existing qualifications in
                                                                             Contact                       of exciting career opportunities. Successful completion of the course will
design, or a related area, to degree and Honours level. The course focuses
                                                                             Dr James Findlay
on the selection, use and development of modern design and development                                     also allow entry to the University’s PgD/MSc Computer-Aided Engineering
                                                                             0800 027 1000
software tools.                                                              (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                                           programme, should you wish to further your studies at postgraduate level.
       During your studies you will gain experience of using sophisticated   UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
CAD/CAM packages, analysis software, prototyping systems and ancillary
equipment. You will also be introduced to modern communications
technologies, which enable quick responses to supplier organisations,
customers and the global marketplace.
       The degree programme provides students with hands-on experience
of the basic principles and on the application of CAD/CAM, associated
systems and techniques. The Honours year will provide students with a more
in-depth knowledge of the broader spectrum of design and manufacturing
systems and the importance of systems integration. Students will also
undertake both individual and group-based projects in an appropriate
subject area.
Course Content
Degree Year
The degree year aims to provide students with a broad understanding of,
and an ability to apply, current Computer-Aided Design (CAD) technology.
Specifically, CAD modelling and analysis techniques will be taught using
theoretical and ‘hands-on’ approaches. A general overview of the design
process and project management methods will further enhance students’
understanding of the management of the design process in an
industrial context.
94                                                                                                                                                                                                                   95

Design
                                                                                    Part-time option also                                                                                         Related course(s):
                                                                                    available, contact                                                                                            Design with
                                                                                    University Direct tel                                                                                         Manufacturing

Design                                                                              0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                    uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
                                                                                                                                                                                                  Systems, see page 96;
                                                                                                                                                                                                  Design with Product
                                                                                                                                                                                                  Development,
                                                                                                                                                                                                  see page 97.




Engineering designers affect and influence every                                     UCAS                           Year 2
aspect of modern day living.                                                        H150 P BEng/Des                Strength of materials and fluid mechanics coupled with materials and
                                                                                    Campus                         manufacturing technology enhance students’ understanding of the
They are responsible for products which influence and alter lifestyles,              Paisley                        engineering subject. Further key skills are developed by introducing
individual quality of life, the environment, the profitability and competitiveness   Entry                          the engineering design process and the application of computer-aided
of companies and the economy as a whole. Therefore, engineering designers           Higher BBC including
                                                                                                                   technology is studied in detail. Students again have the opportunity to
must combine a thorough understanding and knowledge of relevant aspects             Mathematics, plus S Grade
                                                                                    English.
                                                                                                                   participate in a period of sandwich training (optional).
of science and engineering, with the ability to utilise modern materials, tools
and techniques in a flexible and innovative way.                                     A-Level CD, plus GCSE          Year 3
       The course has been developed in response to growing recognition,            English and Mathematics.       Core skills in mechanics of materials, vibration and the application of
within industry and professional bodies, of the lack of such engineering-                                          design principles are enhanced. New areas of study are introduced to
                                                                                    Year 1/2 HNC in a relevant
orientated designers and has been developed around a pragmatic, hands-on                                           broaden students’ knowledge in thermodynamics, rapid prototyping and
                                                                                    subject – contact Admissions
approach to technology and design. The programme offers unparalleled                Officer for details.            testing techniques. Other key themes developed during this year include
access to state-of-the-art computer facilities for design, analysis and                                            computer-based analysis and simulation techniques such as finite element
                                                                                    Year 2 Direct entry with
simulation; extensive use of advanced prototyping and practical laboratories.                                      methods, fundamental to today’s practising design engineers. Option
                                                                                    appropriate A levels –
       The flexibility of the course enables students to select options to                                          streams, or optional modules, allow specialisation in either manufacturing
                                                                                    contact Admissions Officer
meet career and subject interests. In Years 3 and 4, students have the              for details.                   systems or product development, or both, the latter including advanced
option to specialise in individual streams of their preference leading to                                          design techniques such as animation and simulation. Students’ professional
                                                                                    Year 2/3 HND in a relevant     abilities are also developed through the introduction of project management
a degree award such as BEng (Hons) Design with Product Development
                                                                                    subject – contact Admissions
or BEng (Hons) Design with Manufacturing Systems (see pages 97 and                                                 techniques and skills. Students again have the opportunity to participate in
                                                                                    Officer for details.
96). Students can also decide to complete the BEng Design programme                                                a period of sandwich training (optional). At this stage in their programme
                                                                                    Duration
by selecting their own combination of optional modules at Years 3 and               BEng 3 years
                                                                                                                   some students opt for a one-year, or thick sandwich, placement.
4. Your academic studies may be supplemented through paid industrial                BEng Hons 4 years              Year 4 (Honours)
work experience periods within industry. Successful completion of thirty-six        BEng Hons (Sandwich)           New topics introduced include the application of intelligent systems and
weeks of industrial placement allows you to graduate in Year 4 or 5 with an         4/5 years                      control technologies, renewable energy systems and pollution, which are
Honours Sandwich degree which may provide exemption from some of the                Contact                        critical areas of study for engineers. Computer-aided engineering knowledge
membership requirements of relevant professional bodies.                            Dr Robert Bailey
                                                                                                                   is enhanced through computer-aided manufacture. The final year also gives
                                                                                    0800 027 1000
Course Content                                                                                                     students the opportunity to undertake two major projects both individually
                                                                                    (44 141 848 7044 outwith
Year 1                                                                              UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk       and as part of an engineering design group working on an industrial
Engineering design is a key element of the entire programme and students                                           problem. Students will study 4 core modules and a specialist module which
are introduced to applied mechanics, materials and mathematics during this                                         may be from their chosen option stream.
year. A comprehensive introduction to the engineering profession is provided                                       Career Prospects
through professional and industrial studies. Students are also prepared                                            It is anticipated that, upon graduation, you will find employment in a
for future study with skills development in communications, IT technology,                                         number of areas relating to engineering and service industries, including
computer-aided design and professional development. Students have the                                              design and development, manufacture, research and consultancy.
opportunity to participate in a period of sandwich training (optional).
                                                                                                                   Professional Exemptions
                                                                                                                   The programme is accredited by the Institution of Mechanical Engineers.
96                                                                                                                                                                                                                   97

Design                                                                                                         Design
                                                                                Related course(s):                                                                                           Related course(s):
                                                                                Design, see page 94;                                                                                         Design, see page 94;
                                                                                Design with Product                                                                                          Design with

Design with                                                                                                    Design with
                                                                                Development,                                                                                                 Manufacturing
                                                                                see page 97.                                                                                                 Systems, see page 96.


Manufacturing Systems                                                                                          Product Development
This programme allows you to major in Design                                    UCAS                           This programme allows you to major in Design while                            UCAS
while also obtaining the minor award of ‘with                                   W2H7 P BEng/DWMS               also obtaining the minor award of ‘with Product                               W2HR P BEng/DWPD
Manufacturing Systems.’ The Manufacturing Systems                               Campus                         Development.’ The Product Development specialist                              Campus
specialist modules have been specifically developed                              Paisley                        modules have been specifically developed to                                    Paisley
to complement the core Design programme and are                                 Entry                          complement the core Design programme and are                                  Entry
                                                                                Higher BBC including                                                                                         Higher BBC including
studied during the third and Honours years, with two                                                           studied during the third and Honours years, with two
                                                                                Mathematics, plus S Grade                                                                                    Mathematics, plus S Grade
specialist modules taken at each level.                                         English.
                                                                                                               specialist modules taken at each level.                                       English.
The programme provides you with an in-depth understanding of the                A-Level CD, plus GCSE          The programme will provide you with an in-depth understanding of the          A-Level CD, plus GCSE
technologies, methods and principles associated with manufacturing              English and Mathematics.       technologies, methods and principles associated with technical product        English and Mathematics.
systems design and control with a key focus on the application of computer      Year 1/2 HNC in a relevant
                                                                                                               design and manufacture with the major focus being the application of          Year 1/2 HNC in a relevant
aided technologies.                                                             subject – contact Admissions   computer-aided technologies. Topics studied include product animation         subject – contact Admissions
        Topics studied include an in-depth review of the different approaches   Officer for details.            and rendering techniques, the application of computer simulation to           Officer for details.
to manufacture while developing students’ ability to apply different                                           evaluate and optimise manufacturing processes for plastics and machined
                                                                                Year 2 Direct entry with                                                                                     Year 2 Direct entry with
techniques to the design of manufacturing layouts, which incorporate                                           components and the application of micro-controllers in industrial and
                                                                                appropriate A levels –                                                                                       appropriate A levels –
appropriate materials handling systems.                                         contact Admissions Officer      commercial products.                                                          contact Admissions Officer
        Discrete event simulation is introduced as a tool for the design and    for details.                          Students successfully completing the Design major and the minor        for details.
optimisation of manufacturing systems with other simulation techniques                                         in Product Development will be eligible for the award of BEng (Hons) Design
                                                                                Year 2/3 HND in a relevant                                                                                   Year 2/3 HND in a relevant
applied to optimise manufacturing processes. Modern planning and control                                       with Product Development. An optional sandwich placement is offered
                                                                                subject – contact Admissions                                                                                 subject – contact Admissions
techniques, which support efficient and on-time manufacture, are reviewed        Officer for details.            to students interested in gaining relevant industrial experience during       Officer for details.
and applied to industry-based examples. Many of the techniques included         Duration                       their studies.                                                                Duration
in this minor option result in changes to how an organisation manages           BEng 3 years                                                                                                 BEng 3 years
their business. To support this change implementation process, students are     BEng Hons 4 years                                                                                            BEng Hons 4 years
introduced to project organisation, management and execution.                   BEng Hons (Sandwich)                                                                                         BEng Hons (Sandwich)
        Students successfully completing the Design major and the minor in      4/5 years                                                                                                    4/5 years
Manufacturing Systems will be eligible for the award of BEng (Hons) Design      Contact                                                                                                      Contact
with Manufacturing Systems. An optional sandwich placement is offered           Dr Robert Bailey                                                                                             Dr Robert Bailey
to students interested in gaining relevant industrial experience during         0800 027 1000                                                                                                0800 027 1000
their studies.                                                                  (44 141 848 7044 outwith                                                                                     (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk                                                                                     UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
98                                                                                                                                                                                                 99

Design
Product Design
& Development
Product Design & Development comprises the set                                     UCAS                             Year 3
of complementary activities and disciplines which                                  Hamilton –                       Analysis and simulation techniques are applied during Year 3.
start with the identification of a market opportunity                               H700 H BEng/PD                   These techniques enable the capabilities of a product to be assessed
                                                                                   Paisley – H700 P BEng/PD
followed by the development of initial concepts and                                                                 before it is made. The relationship between design and manufacture is
                                                                                   Campus
culminate in the manufacture, sale and delivery of                                                                  investigated and issues such as marketing principles and product testing
                                                                                   Hamilton, Paisley
an end product to the customer.                                                                                     are presented. Students also broaden their knowledge in new areas such
                                                                                   Entry
                                                                                   Higher BCC including
                                                                                                                    as manufacturing systems and design animation. Students again have the
The aim of this programme is to provide students with a select group of
                                                                                   Mathematics and a science        opportunity to participate in a period of sandwich training (optional) where
modules, which address the product design, development and supply
                                                                                   subject, plus S Grade English.   they can take up a period of paid placement at the end of the academic
life-cycle by bringing together the core disciplines of marketing, design
                                                                                                                    year. At this stage in their programme some students opt for a one-year,
(industrial and engineering) and manufacture. In addition, strong emphasis is      A-Level CD including
                                                                                                                    or thick sandwich placement.
placed on product quality and cost, as well as on the key aspects of the design    Mathematics, plus three
and development phase, namely project management, cost and time to market.         GCSEs including English          Year 4 (Honours)
Since the product design and development activity within a company is              and a science subject.           A significant part of fourth year is taken up with individual and group
inter-disciplinary by nature, group and team-working skills are also emphasised.   Year 2 HNC in a                  projects in the area of Product Design. Automation and intelligent systems
        During Years 1, 2 and 3, academic study may be supplemented by             relevant subject. Direct entry   are explored and the application of computer-aided manufacture.
periods of paid work experience gained within industry. There is flexibility        with appropriate A levels –      Product Design is developed along with other important issues such
in the duration of the placement undertaken, but in order to achieve the           contact Admissions Officer        as product quality.
BEng Honours Sandwich degree students must gain a minimum of thirty-six            for details.
                                                                                                                    Career Prospects
weeks work experience. Such experience may provide exemption from some             Year 3 HND in a relevant         Product Design & Development specialisation is increasingly in demand
of the membership requirements of the relevant professional bodies.                subject.
                                                                                                                    by industrial employers, with graduates from the course expected to
                                                                                   Duration
Course Content                                                                                                      find employment in a variety of disciplines relating to the function.
                                                                                   BEng 3 years
Year 1                                                                                                              The range of skills taught on the course should greatly enhance employment
                                                                                   BEng Hons 4 years
Students are introduced to computer-aided design through design software           BEng Hons (Sandwich)             opportunities, particularly when coupled with placement experience.
commonly used in industry. Parallel studies develop an understanding of            4/5 years                        Professional Exemption
engineering mechanics, materials and other related areas important to              Contact                          Accreditation is currently being sought from relevant professional bodies.
Product Design. Students have the opportunity to participate in a period           David Kennedy (Hamilton)
of sandwich training (optional) where they can take up a period of paid            or Dr Robert Bailey
placement at the end of the academic year.                                         (Paisley) 0800 027 1000
                                                                                   (44 141 848 7044 outwith
Year 2                                                                             UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
The theme of computer-aided design continues moving into more advanced
areas of 3-D modelling. The processes of product design are developed and
a range of information technology skills are enhanced to complement this.
Management issues important to product design are explored. Students
have the opportunity to participate in a period of sandwich training
(optional) where they can take up a period of paid placement at the end
of the academic year.
100                                                                                                                                                                                            101

Design
Quality

Established in 1991, the University’s Quality                                   UCAS                        Course Content
Centre is an internationally renowned Centre of                                 N290 P BSc/Qual             Students will engage in the theory and application of the principles
Excellence. The BSc Quality has been designed                                   Campus                      of quality management. They will learn to apply quality management
to provide students with a critical awareness and                               Paisley                     techniques in manufacturing and service contexts. They will develop
understanding of quality management within a                                    Entry                       critical transferable and employability skills such as problem-solving,
                                                                                Year 3 entry only – HND
range of industry sectors. Quality professionals are                                                        communication and interpersonal skills and use of information technology.
                                                                                in an appropriate subject
employed in all sectors of the economy including                                (please contact the
                                                                                                            The programme will enable students to become quality professionals
private and public sectors such as manufacturing,                               Admissions Officer           capable of designing and implementing effective quality systems.
finance, transport, tourism, healthcare, local                                   for details).               Topics include:
government and education.                                                       Duration                    •       Quality Management
                                                                                BSc 1 year full-time or     •       Quality Auditing
The programme is designed to cater for students from a wide range of
                                                                                2 years part-time           •       Quality Excellence
backgrounds and experiences. The programme incorporates a wide variety
                                                                                Contact                     •       Project Management
of case studies and examples from national and international experience.
                                                                                Michele Cano                •       Environmental Responsibility
All enrolled students are eligible to become student members of the             0800 027 1000               •       Independent Study Project
Chartered Quality Institute.                                                    (44 141 848 7044 outwith
       The programme includes important topics such as selection and            UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk    Career Prospects
implementation of quality management systems, the integration and audit                                     A wide range of career options is open to graduates in Quality.
of management systems including environmental management systems,                                           In many organisations graduates are involved in teambuilding, training,
project management, business excellence and ‘Six Sigma’. Internationally                                    implementing quality systems, solving problems and developing and
and in the UK, there is a growing demand for professionals with these skills,                               maintaining an effective quality culture. Typical career paths lead to roles
in both the public and private sectors.                                                                     such as quality manager or process engineer with a micro-electronics
The programme aims to:                                                                                      company; customer services director for a hotel chain; software quality
•      produce quality practitioners and professionals able to design                                       specialist in a development or support environment; quality manager for
       and implement modern quality systems in any field                                                     a hospital or health trust; quality director for a financial institution; quality
•      demonstrate the theory and application of the principles of                                          manager in a retail or transport organisation; and senior manager in
       quality management                                                                                   local government.
•      apply quality management techniques in the context of                                                Professional Recognition
       manufacturing or services                                                                            Exemption from the academic requirements of the Chartered Quality
•      develop critical, analytical problem-based learning skills and the                                   Institute is being sought.
       transferable skills to prepare students for graduate employment in
       the field of quality
102         103




Education
104                                                                                                                                                                                            105

If you want a rewarding and
stimulating career, education
could be the right choice for you.


Getting involved in this sector offers an exciting opportunity to make           Section contents               The resources to succeed
a real difference – whether it’s working with children in a pre-school setting   Childhood Practice       110   Education students have access to a wide range of progressive teaching and
or teaching in a school. UWS students graduate with extensive theoretical        Childhood Studies        106   learning facilities including:
knowledge and practical skills gained through work-related learning,             Primary Education        108   •      dedicated i-Mac laboratory
ensuring that they are more than able to meet the expectations                   Mathematical &                 •      interactive whiteboard technologies and interactive classroom
of employers.                                                                    Professional Education   110          communication systems
       Our undergraduate and postgraduate courses are principally taught                                        •      curricular resource centres in music and religious education
at Ayr Campus. The University is a centre of expertise and experience in
                                                                                                                A Scottish BEd qualification
teaching and learning and reinforces our commitment to offering the best
                                                                                                                Since 2002, a year-long, salaried teaching position has been guaranteed
possible learning environment for students. Childhood Studies is also offered
                                                                                                                to eligible, appropriately-qualified BEd graduates of Scottish universities.
at Dumfries Campus, and may be offered at Hamilton Campus, subject
                                                                                                                During this induction period, fresh graduates receive full support towards
to demand.
                                                                                                                achieving the Standard for Full Registration with the General Teaching
Practical experience                                                                                            Council for Scotland. After completing their induction employment,
Primary Education students enjoy hands-on work experience in relevant                                           graduates are very successful in obtaining teaching posts.
school settings throughout their studies. Childhood Studies students                                                   A Scottish BEd is a highly-regarded qualification for teaching in the
undertake practical experience each trimester and complete a research                                           rest of the UK, other English speaking countries, or schools elsewhere using
project in an area linked to their career goals and aspirations. Work-related                                   English as the language of instruction. Recent BEd graduates have gained
learning allows students to put theory into practice in a real-life setting.                                    employment overseas in Cyprus, Germany, Italy, Spain, United Arab Emirates,
Research and expertise                                                                                          Taiwan, Japan and New Zealand.
Our staff have a reputation for research and curriculum development in                                          Continuing Professional Development
the education sector. Recent areas of significant research output include:                                       Continuing Professional Development (CPD) is increasingly important for
policy studies in education; initial teacher education, policy and practice;                                    Scottish school teachers and we pioneered CPD for teachers with a range
affective education; art education; holocaust studies in education;                                             of career-focused CPD programmes. This includes our innovative Chartered
inclusive education; and physical education. Our recent in-service and                                          Teacher programme, delivered by e-learning in partnership with the
consultancy work with schools and local authorities includes: ICT in                                            Educational Institute of Scotland, Learning and Teaching Scotland, Argyll
schools; mathematics; primary modern languages; and primary science and                                         and Bute Council and South Ayrshire Council. Since 2005, 66 fully-qualified
technology. Our staff also enjoy representation with several public sector                                      Chartered Teachers have graduated from the University.
organisations including the General Teaching Council for Scotland.
                                                                                                                Overseas study
                                                                                                                Education students may have the opportunity to study in mainland Europe
                                                                                                                through links with partner institutions in Denmark and France.
106                                                                                                                                                                                                107

Education
Childhood Studies*

Early childhood is crucial to a child’s future                                   UCAS                           Career Prospects
development – this rewarding degree course gives                                 Ayr – L560 A BA/ChS            Students who successfully complete this degree will be able to seek
you the opportunity to play an important role in                                 Dumfries –                     employment in a range of childcare environments. These may include work
                                                                                 L560 D BA/ChS
supporting children and their families in a variety                                                             in the integrated childcare services working with children under five, in
                                                                                 Hamilton –
of environments.                                                                 L560 H BA/ChS
                                                                                                                “wrap-around care” or out-of-school care. Employment opportunities also
                                                                                 Campus
                                                                                                                exist in project work offering support for children and their families e.g. Sure
The University’s Childhood Studies programme is offered on a full-time
                                                                                 Ayr, Dumfries†, Hamilton**     Start programmes. Graduates have also found employment opportunities
basis at Ayr Campus (see opposite for details of provision in Dumfries and
                                                                                 Entry                          as trainers and lecturers with early education and care training agencies
Hamilton). The existing structure has been designed to allow students
                                                                                 Year 2 HNC Early Education     and in colleges. For graduates with appropriate experience there may be
entering at Year 2 to build on their previous qualifications, upgrading to
                                                                                 and Care or HNC Childcare      opportunities to progress to social work qualifications. Graduates may also
degree level through two years of university-level study. The degree has
                                                                                 and Education.                 be eligible to make application to university postgraduate initial teacher
been designed to deepen understanding of a variety of issues related to
                                                                                 • In addition a Higher at C    education programmes (Primary Education) if they have the required passes
childhood and services for children and their families.
                                                                                   or above (or equivalent)     in English and Mathematics. (Please note that BA Childhood Studies is not
        Students will develop their existing skills and knowledge, consider
                                                                                   in English is preferred.     a nursery or primary teaching qualification).
the values that underpin work in children’s services and appreciate the
importance of professionals from differing disciplines working in partnership.   • All applicants will be       †Provision in Dumfries
The programme aims to enable students to promote children’s learning               required to make             BA Childhood Studies is offered on a full-time basis at Dumfries Campus.
effectively and to develop the ability to work as a reflective practitioner.        successful application       It is designed for students holding relevant Higher National qualifications
The degree develops students’ knowledge and skills and addresses                   to Disclosure Scotland.      (see entry requirements as previously detailed) to gain access to Year 2 and
management issues in childcare settings. The programme is informed by            • Applicants with similar      to obtain a BA qualification through two years of University study – see
developments in the childcare sector.                                              childcare qualifications      opposite for details of course content. Provision in Dumfries is offered
                                                                                   and qualifications            subject to student demand.
Course Content                                                                     pre-dating HNC should
Year 2                                                                             contact the University for   **Provision in Hamilton
Early childhood curriculum theory and practice is examined along with              advice on Recognition of     BA Childhood Studies will be offered at Hamilton Campus subject to
supporting children’s learning in the workplace. Well-being, disposition           Prior Learning.              demand – contact University Direct for more information on this.
to learn and multiple intelligences are studied. Understanding of equality,      Duration
social justice and inclusion is developed. In Trimester 2, health and health     BA 2 years
promotion are studied and management, leadership and teamwork skills             Contact
in a variety of childcare settings are developed.                                0800 027 1000
                                                                                 (44 141 848 7044 outwith
Year 3                                                                           UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
Students undertake the study of communication, language and early literacy,
complemented by work in placement. Skills in leadership for learning are
further developed and students examine, reflect upon and critically evaluate
current social policy. The policies and practices of childcare in a selection
of other countries is studied. Creativity in the curriculum is also studied
using the arts to promote creativity. Students are introduced to qualitative
research methods and undertake a research project.
108                                                                                                                                                                                            109

Education
Primary Education

Build a stimulating career in primary teaching                                 UCAS                          Year 3
with this challenging four-year degree course,                                 X120 A BEd/Pr                 Year 3 will focus on the theme of ‘Students as Developing Professionals’
which prepares you for a rewarding career in                                   Campus                        and will cover topics such as additional curricular studies, humanities, school
the classroom.                                                                 Ayr                           and professional studies, and school experience (this involves an 8-week
                                                                               Entry                         placement in schools). A specialist academic option will also be offered.
The Primary Education course is designed to equip you with the skills to       Higher BBBB including
become an effective primary school teacher within a modern educational         English, plus Mathematics     Year 4 (Honours)
environment. In addition to gaining the award, successful completion of the    @ S Grade (Credit) or         Year 4 focuses on ‘Students as Research Informed Professionals’ with topics
course will provide you with the formal teaching qualification necessary for    equivalent.                   covering educational theory, educational policy and practice, and school
provisional registration with the General Teaching Council for Scotland,       A-Level CCD or DDDD,          experience (this involves a 9-week placement in schools). Students will also
a pre-requisite for taking up a teaching post in Scotland.                     plus four GCSEs including     complete a research dissertation.
       The course is based at Ayr Campus. Throughout the four-year course,     Mathematics @ A or B          Career Prospects
students will gain practical placement experience across all stages of         and English Language and
                                                                                                             Employment opportunities for primary teaching graduates are good,
the primary school, including pre-school and the teaching of pupils with       English Literature.
                                                                                                             with new graduates entering a guaranteed one-year induction post.
additional support needs. Placements take place mainly within Ayrshire and     All applicants will be        This enables graduates to complete their one-year probation and achieve
Dumfries & Galloway, but potentially also in East Renfrewshire, Glasgow,       required to make successful   the standard required for Full Registration with the General Teaching
Inverclyde, North and South Lanarkshire, and Renfrewshire.                     application to Disclosure
                                                                                                             Council for Scotland. Recent graduates have found posts throughout
       The programme covers core professional elements in primary              Scotland.
                                                                                                             Scotland and in England, Northern Ireland, Canada, New Zealand and other
education which include School and Professional Studies and Curricular         Contact School of Education   Commonwealth and EU countries. The versatility of the BEd degree is also
Studies. Curricular Studies comprises aesthetics, humanities and               Admissions to discuss other   highly-regarded in fields other than education by employers who value the
mathematical and scientific studies, all of which link to the primary           qualifications for entry.
                                                                                                             strong personal transferable skills that graduates have developed.
school curriculum.                                                             Duration
                                                                               BEd Hons 4 years
Course Content                                                                 Contact
Year 1                                                                         0800 027 1000
Year 1 will focus on the theme of ‘Students as Learners’ and will cover        (44 141 848 7044 outwith
topics such as foundation skills, how we learn, humanities, mathematical       UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
and scientific studies; aesthetics and school and professional studies (which
includes primary education, child development, and child psychology).
Year 2
Year 2 will focus on the theme ‘Students as Teachers – Pupils as Learners’
and will cover further study in topics such as mathematical and scientific
studies, humanities, aesthetics, school and professional studies and school
experience (this involves a 7-week placement in schools).
110                                                                                                                          111

Education
New for 2010/2011

Mathematical & Professional Education                                     UCAS
From 2010, we plan to offer a new programme,        GX1H A BA/MPEd
BA (Honours) Mathematical & Professional Education, Campus
at our campus in Ayr (subject to University and     Ayr
General Teaching Council for Scotland approval).                                                    I’m Erin
The programme will give you the opportunity to study Mathematics                                    from Kilmarnock
                                                                                                    I’m 22
to Honours level, whilst also completing your training as a secondary                               I’m planning to
Mathematics teacher. For further information on this programme please                               become a primary
contact 0800 027 1000 (44 141 848 7044 outwith UK) or e-mail                                        school teacher.
uni-direct@uws.ac.uk                                                                                I like shopping, horse
                                                                                                    riding and singing
                                                                                                    and I don’t like
                                                                                                    negative people.
Childhood Practice                                                        UCAS
From 2010, we plan to offer a new programme,                              Ayr – X320 A BA/CP
BA Childhood Practice, at our campuses in Ayr and                         Hamilton – X320 H BA/CP
Hamilton (subject to University and Scottish Social                       Campus
Services Council approval).                                               Ayr, Hamilton

The programme will be available on a full-time and part-time basis with
entry at Year 3 (SCQF Level 9). The programme will enable students to
meet the Scottish Social Services Council Lead Practitioner Childhood
Practice standard. For further information on this programme please
contact 0800 027 1000 (44 141 848 7044 outwith UK) or e-mail
uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
112                                 113




Engineering
        I’m Hinna
        from Glasgow
        I’m 23
        I’m studying
        Civil Engineering.
        I plan to work hard
        and become a
        chartered engineer.
        I like socialising, being
        with friends and family
        and I don’t like bad
        manners or rain.
114                                                                                                                                                                                                                  115

Engineering has changed                                                                                      Engineering
                                                                                                                                                                                             Part-time option also
                                                                                                                                                                                             available, contact

our world.
                                                                                                                                                                                             University Direct tel

                                                                                                             Chemical                                                                        0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                                                                                                                             uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


                                                                                                             Engineering
If you want to influence the future of the modern world our engineering          Section contents             Chemical Engineering focuses on the production                                  UCAS
programmes are a great step to building a strong career. Many programmes        Chemical Engineering   115   processes involved in areas such as the food,                                   H810 P BEng/ChE
offer the chance of paid placement at home or abroad to give you a              Civil Engineering      117   pharmaceutical, petrochemical, plastics, dyes,                                  Campus
practical insight into industry, while enhancing your career prospects.         Engineering                  health, cosmetics, household goods, environmental,                              Paisley
Employers have included:                                                        Management             119   microelectronic and refining sectors.                                            Entry
•      Dossan Babcock Energy Ltd                                                Mechanical                                                                                                   Higher BCC including two
•      Scottish Water                                                           Engineering            121   Chemical engineers are involved in the design, operation and management         science-based subjects
                                                                                Mechanical                   of plants and equipment that process materials. This could include              plus English, Mathematics
•      BAe Systems                                                                                                                                                                           and Chemistry at least @
•      British Energy                                                           Engineering (HNC)      123   designing and commissioning new manufacturing plants, managing staff or
                                                                                Motorsport Design            developing environmentally friendly processes. Chemical Engineering is at       S Grade. (Note: Candidates
•      Babcock Rail                                                                                                                                                                          lacking Higher Chemistry
                                                                                Engineering            124   the forefront of the quest to produce clean energy and satisfy human needs
Industry-standard facilities include:                                                                                                                                                        may be admitted if it is
                                                                                                             in several areas such as health, food, etc in an environmentally friendly
•     Paisley Campus – fully-equipped manufacturing workshop; materials “Working at Scottish                                                                                                 judged that any deficiency
                                                                                                             and sustainable manner. Chemical Engineering graduates are consistently         can be easily rectified).
      testing and analysis facilities; metrology laboratory; rapid prototyping Water’s Loch Katrine          among the most sought after by employers in a variety of sectors because
      centre; assembly and welding laboratories                                Project Pilot Plant                                                                                           A-Level CD, including
                                                                                                             of their broad scientific knowledge, problem-solving and practical skills.
•     Hamilton Campus – new £2.5 million engineering centre opened 2008, provided me with                           This course is designed to meet the continuing demand for suitably
                                                                                                                                                                                             Mathematics and one
                                                                               practical experience –                                                                                        science-based subject, plus
      with particular focus on the design and motorsport engineering                                         trained graduates and offers you a unique opportunity to pursue a diverse
                                                                               I’m grateful to have                                                                                          GCSE Chemistry, English
      disciplines. Programmes at both campuses utilise a range of industrial been given the chance           range of career paths. The comprehensive study programme includes               and Mathematics required.
      applications software such as PRO/Engineer 3D Modelling, Ansys,          to work on such a large       foundation courses in chemistry, mathematical sciences and engineering
      Fluent, AutoCAD, MS Project and WITNESS                                  project that will benefit                                                                                      Year 2 HNC Chemical
                                                                                                             principles which will provide a sound base for later engineering studies.
                                                                                the whole community.”                                                                                        Engineering or related
Formula Student                                                                                                     The broad-based nature of the course offers you the possibility to       subject (including Process
                                                                                Douglas Mills                select another chosen degree route if you opt to do so up to your 2nd year,
We are one of only two universities in Scotland with a ‘Formula Student’                                                                                                                     Technologies).
                                                                                Chemical Engineering         maximising your career options. The course combines academic studies,
team. Students have the chance to participate in the Institution of             graduate                                                                                                     Year 3 HND Chemical
Mechanical Engineers’ Formula Student competition, in which they have to                                     hands-on experience and group projects to ensure you develop the essential
                                                                                                                                                                                             Engineering or related
design, build, develop and race a single-seater car. The competition attracts                                practical and communication abilities required by employers in the modern
                                                                                                                                                                                             subject (including Process
entries from universities all over the world and helps students develop the                                  workplace. You will undergo a period of pilot plant-based training as part of   Technologies).
management, marketing and communication skills that are vital in                                             the course. In addition, you will have the opportunity to undertake a year’s    Duration
the workplace.                                                                                               paid industrial placement as part of your degree.                               BSc 3 years
                                                                                                                    There are two routes through the programme, enabling students to         BSc Hons 4 years
A track record of working with industry                                                                      achieve a BEng or a BSc qualification upon successful completion of studies.     BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years
•     a new, and ground-breaking, joint venture with industry, was
                                                                                                             The BEng qualification is accredited by the Institution of Chemical Engineers    BEng Hons 4 years
      initiated by the University which established an independent Centre                                                                                                                    BEng Hons (Sandwich)
                                                                                                             (IChemE), the professional body for the industry, and the degree content
      for Engineering Education & Development (CeeD), to champion                                                                                                                            5 years
                                                                                                             recommended for this route is in line with the IChemE academic requirements.
      excellence in engineering for the benefit of individuals, companies                                                                                                                     Contact
                                                                                                                    The BSc offers a wider range of subject combinations for students
      and the Scottish economy                                                                                                                                                               Dr Richard Thacker
                                                                                                             who wish to tailor their programme to meet their own interests and gain
                                                                                                                                                                                             0800 027 1000
                                                                                                             added flexibility in module choice. Students select their degree route at the
                                                                                                                                                                                             (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                                             end of Year 2. Sandwich placement options are available as part of both
                                                                                                                                                                                             UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
                                                                                                             degree pathways between years 3 and 4. >
116                                                                                                                                                                                       117

                                                                                  Engineering
                                                                                                                                                                   Part-time option also
                                                                                                                                                                   available, contact
                                                                                                                                                                   University Direct tel

                                                                                  Civil Engineering                                                                0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                                                                                                   uni-direct@uws.ac.uk




Course Content                                                                    Civil engineers specialise in the planning, design,                              UCAS
Year 1                                                                            construction and maintenance of buildings,                                       BEng Civil Engineering –
Basic studies in mathematics, chemistry and engineering fundamentals lay          bridges, roads, airports, water and sewage systems,                              H200 P BEng/CE
                                                                                                                                                                   BSc Civil Engineering –
the foundation on which later chemical engineering subjects are based.            power stations, railways and many other projects
                                                                                                                                                                   H201 P BSc/CE
Year 2                                                                            which serve the community. The four-year BEng
                                                                                                                                                                   Campus
Study time in Year 2 is spent on chemistry, mathematics and chemical              Honours (Sandwich) course will enable you to                                     Paisley
engineering modules that build on the foundations laid in the first year.          develop the technical, managerial and financial                                   Entry
                                                                                  skills necessary to solve the practical problems                                 Higher BBC (BEng)
Year 3                                                                            of designing, constructing and organising civil                                  including Mathematics,
This year is entirely devoted to mainstream studies of various subjects           engineering projects.                                                            or BCC (BSc) preferably
relevant to chemical engineering, including heat and mass transfer,                                                                                                including Mathematics.
thermodynamics, separation processes, environmental protection, safety,           The course covers broad-based civil engineering subjects, providing you
                                                                                                                                                                   English and a science subject
process control and chemical plant design.                                        with the basis for later career development in specific areas. In Year 4, you     required @ S Grade for both
                                                                                  continue to study the main themes in Civil Engineering. You will be able to      the BEng and BSc.
(Optional) Industrial Placement                                                   qualify as a civil engineer with the specific background and awareness to
One year can be spent on paid placement as a supervised, junior chemical                                                                                           A-Level CC (BEng) or CD
                                                                                  plan, design and implement appropriate projects. Throughout the degree,
engineer in industry. Placements are obtained competitively and can be in                                                                                          (BSc) including Mathematics
                                                                                  the practical application of each subject is stressed. There are two twenty-     and preferably another
any branch of the chemical industry in the UK or abroad.                          week periods of paid industrial training included within the course to enable    science subject, plus three
Year 4 (Honours)                                                                  you to become familiar with the practical side of the profession.                GCSEs including English
You will undertake one final year of intensive chemical engineering studies               The course also features field trips which cover surveying and site        and a science subject.
including advanced topics in separation processes, catalysis and reactor          inspection. Students who start on the BSc course may be eligible to transfer     Year 2 HNC Civil
design, thermal systems design and integration, process safety and control        to the BEng Hons depending on performance.                                       Engineering. Contact
and some economic aspects of the discipline. You will undertake a Chemical        Course Content                                                                   Admissions Officer
Engineering Design Study as a substantial part of your final year programme.       Year 1                                                                           for details.
Career Prospects                                                                  Mathematics and science modules provide an understanding of essential            Year 2 Direct entry with
Chemical engineers are consistently among the most highly paid graduates          scientific methods. Structural mechanics provides a firm basis for structural      appropriate A levels –
of any subject, due mainly to their major responsibility for capital investment   analysis in later years, with some design and project work being included.       contact Admissions Officer
projects. Recent graduates have gained employment with a variety of major         An introduction to the engineering industry is given with lectures and           for details.
companies. Some recent examples of job roles include Plant Engineer at            practical work. Communication, drawing and computing skills are developed        Year 3 HND Civil
GlaxoSmithKline; Process Engineer at Motorola; Design Engineer with               as a foundation for work in later years, with assignments based on               Engineering. Contact
Foster Wheeler; Process Engineer with Texaco; Safety Engineer with BNFL;          examples from industry.                                                          Admissions Officer
Pilot Plant Engineer with Seal Chemicals; Process Engineer at Mitsui-                                                                                              for details.
                                                                                  Year 2                                                                           Duration
Babcock Energy Ltd; Plant Engineer with Nestlé; Research Engineer for             Sustainable construction is introduced and the properties and uses of Civil
Joint European Torus Project; and Researcher with Procter and Gamble.                                                                                              BSc 3 years
                                                                                  Engineering materials are studied. Design of structural elements covers the      BEng Hons (Sandwich)
Professional Recognition                                                          design and analysis of structures while hydraulics examines the engineering      4 years
The BEng programme is accredited by the Institution of Chemical Engineers         applications of the laws of fluids. Applied geology introduces the properties
(IChemE).                                                                         and behaviour of soils and rocks. Students also develop skills in surveying. >
118                                                                                                                                                                                                               119

                                                                                                           Engineering
                                                                                                                                                                                         Part-time option also
                                                                                                                                                                                         available, contact
                                                                                                                                                                                         University Direct tel

                                                                                                           Engineering                                                                   0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                                                                                                                         uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


                                                                                                           Management
Industrial studies familiarises students with the commercial environment in     Contact                    This course is suitable for those who wish to pursue                          UCAS
which the industry operates.                                                    Callum Tooth               a career in a planning, supervisory or project                                H703 H BEng/EM
                                                                                0800 027 1000              management role in industry. It is an engineering                             Campus
Industrial Training                                                             (44 141 848 7044 outwith                                                                                 Hamilton
Students spend a twenty-week period of paid employment in industry.                                        programme with a proven record of success for
                                                                                UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk                                                                                 Entry
                                                                                                           employment.
Year 3                                                                                                                                                                                   Year 1 Highers BCC
Students continue to study the main subjects of structural engineering,                                    Successful graduates have been employed in many sectors of industry,          including Mathematics or
water engineering, ground engineering and construction technology.                                         and education, often obtaining positions at senior level. Such industry       Science or Engineering based
                                                                                                           sectors include the manufacture of steel, electronics, food, car parts,       subject. If not held at H
Project management introduces the problems inherent in the management
                                                                                                           earthmoving vehicles, aircraft engines, computer manufacture, and the         grade then English at level
of construction and the techniques used in their solution. A two-week group
                                                                                                                                                                                         3 grade.
design project is undertaken to give students experience of working in                                     water and gas industries. There are a number of graduates who are teaching
a design team.                                                                                             in colleges or in secondary schools.                                          A-level DC including
                                                                                                                   The programme utilises the new Centre of Engineering Excellence       Mathematics or another
Industrial Training                                                                                        (CEE) with fully-equipped manufacturing and vehicle workshops, polymer        science subject, plus 3
Honours students spend a twenty-week period of paid employment                                                                                                                           GCSEs including English
                                                                                                           engineering facilities, fully-equipped model making and prototyping studio
in industry.                                                                                                                                                                             and a science subject.
                                                                                                           and assembly and welding laboratories. There are also state-of-the-art
Year 4 (Honours)                                                                                           teaching facilities, social and recreational space.                           Year 2 HNC/CertHE in
The final year project provides a significant opportunity for students to                                            The programme emphasises the application of engineering principles    a relevant discipline.
undertake an investigation into a subject area of their choice. Students also                              within industry with the focus on quality and continuous improvement.         Year 2 Direct entry with
undertake study in structural engineering and design, water engineering and                                The course has a large element of practically-orientated content to ensure    appropriate A levels –
ground engineering.                                                                                        you develop the skills required by prospective employers. It also develops    contact Admissions Officer
                                                                                                           students to work effectively as a member of a professional engineering        for details.
Career Prospects
Careers as a civil engineer are varied, ranging from design and construction                               team. The programme will utilise a large variety of software for industrial   Year 3 HND/DipHE in
in private industry to employment with national industries or with local,                                  applications such as PRO/Engineer 3D Modelling, AutoCAD, MS Project,          Engineering or a relevant
                                                                                                           WITNESS and other specialist applications. The emphasis of the course         discipline.
regional or central government. Many major construction firms actively
seek university graduates because they are capable of making a useful                                      is on planning and selection of applications and not programming.             Please note:
contribution to a professional team from the moment they begin work.                                       The course provides our graduates with a solid grounding in engineering,      • essential subject
As a graduate, you are likely to gain employment with a major contracting                                  manufacturing planning, management and quality tools and techniques.            requirements include at
                                                                                                                                                                                           least Intermediate 2 pass
or consulting engineering company. At the time of writing, career                                          Course Content                                                                  in Mathematics
opportunities for civil engineering graduates are readily available with                                   Year 1                                                                        • applicants will normally
excellent starting salaries.                                                                               The first year comprises basic engineering principles, materials, processes,     be invited for interview
Professional Exemptions                                                                                    mathematics, CAD, measurement, hands-on workshop skills and an                Duration
The BEng Honours course is accredited by the Institution of Civil Engineers                                introduction to planning of an engineering process or project.                BEng 3 years
and the Institution of Structural Engineers and fulfils the academic                                        Year 2                                                                        BEng Hons 4 years
requirement for Incorporated Engineer. A graduate with our BEng (Hons)                                     The second year includes design, processing methods, automation, facilities
degree may progress to Chartered Engineer status after appropriate further                                 layout, process and equipment selection, quality improvement tools and the
study such as an accredited technical Masters degree.                                                      extension of a number of the key topics from Year 1. >
120                                                                                                                                                                                                              121

                                                                                                         Engineering
                                                                                                                                                                                          Part-time option also
                                                                                                                                                                                          available, contact
                                                                                                                                                                                          University Direct tel

                                                                                                         Mechanical                                                                       0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                                                                                                                          uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


                                                                                                         Engineering
Year 3/4                                                                      Contact                    Mechanical engineers specialise in the design,                                   UCAS
The third and fourth years include project, engineering and quality           Mr Peter Griffin            development and manufacture of a wide variety                                    H300 P BEng/ME
management, quality improvement methodologies and tools,                      0800 027 1000              of machines, products and structures ranging from                                Campus
                                                                              (44 141 848 7044 outwith                                                                                    Paisley
3D modelling, prototyping and product testing, industrial troubleshooting,                               consumer related designs through to automotive
                                                                              UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk                                                                                    Entry
renewable energy, health and safety and a number of comprehensive                                        and aerospace designs.
                                                                                                                                                                                          Higher BBC including
industrial projects.
                                                                                                         They are responsible for providing engineering solutions in some of the most     Mathematics and Physics or
Career Prospects                                                                                         demanding and rewarding industries today. In order to meet the challenge,        Technological Studies, plus
The University has an established reputation for producing competent and                                 mechanical engineers must combine a thorough knowledge of scientific              English @ S Grade.
responsible engineering graduates who are sought by industry. Career                                     and engineering principles with a flexible approach towards new ideas and         A-Level CD including
areas are varied and include design, research and development, analysis,                                 developments within the profession.                                              Mathematics and a science
manufacture and project management. Previous graduates have been                                                 The BEng Honours course in Mechanical Engineering emphasises             subject, plus three GCSEs
employed by many leading companies such as Rolls-Royce, Baker Oil                                        the application of engineering principles within industry. The course has a      including English.
Tools, Terex Equipment, Philips Lighting, CTS Automotive and Electronics,                                large element of practically-orientated content to ensure you develop the        Year 1/2 HNC in a related
McGavigans Plastics, Rosti Plastics, NACCO Material Handling, Corus                                      skills required by prospective employers and the ability to work effectively     subject – contact Admissions
Steel, Selex Electronics, Thales Defence Products, GE Shipbuilding and Aero                              as a member of a professional engineering design team. Much emphasis             Officer for details.
Products. A number of our qualified engineers have taken positions in                                     has been placed on updating this course to reflect the needs of employers.        Year 2/3 HND in a related
education as lecturers and teachers.                                                                     A strong bias towards design engineering and computer-aided technology           subject – contact Admissions
                                                                                                         coupled with a sound grounding in engineering principles should provide          Officer for details.
                                                                                                         you with the knowledge necessary to deliver engineering solutions in             Year 2 Direct entry with
                                                                                                         today’s highly competitive marketplace. During Years 1, 2 and 3, academic        appropriate A levels –
                                                                                                         studies may be supported by gaining paid work experience within a relevant       contact Admissions Officer
                                                                                                         engineering organisation. There is flexibility in the duration of the placement   for details.
                                                                                                         undertaken, however in order to achieve the BEng Honours Sandwich                Duration
                                                                                                         degree qualification you must gain a minimum of thirty-six weeks work             BEng 3 years
                                                                                                         experience. Such experience may provide exemption from some of the               BEng Hons 4 years
                                                                                                         membership requirements of the relevant professional bodies and is thus          BEng Hons (Sandwich)
                                                                                                         a very attractive option for students at this level. The course is designed to   4/5 years
                                                                                                         enable you to achieve a BEng Honours degree at the end of Year 4, or a           Contact
                                                                                                                                                                                          Dr Robert Bailey
                                                                                                         BEng Honours Sandwich degree at the end of Year 4 or 5.
                                                                                                                                                                                          0800 027 1000
                                                                                                         Course Content                                                                   (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                                         Year 1                                                                           UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
                                                                                                         Engineering design is a key element of the entire programme and students
                                                                                                         are introduced to applied mechanics, materials and mathematics to
                                                                                                         provide a foundation in this area. A comprehensive introduction to the
                                                                                                         engineering profession is given through professional and industrial studies.
                                                                                                         Students are also prepared for the years ahead with skills development >
122                                                                                                                                                                                       123

                                                                               Engineering
                                                                               HNC Mechanical
                                                                               Engineering*
in communications, IT technology such as computer-aided design and             With an increasing worldwide need for engineers of                               UCAS
professional development. Students can take up a period of paid placement      every discipline, this course aims to produce higher                             103H H HNC/MechE
at the end of the academic year.                                               technician grade engineers serving the needs of                                  Campus
                                                                               modern industries.                                                               Hamilton
Year 2                                                                                                                                                          Entry
Strength of materials and fluid mechanics coupled with materials and            This one-year programme concentrates on the many aspects of Mechanical           Higher 1 Higher at Grade C
manufacturing technology enhance the students’ understanding of the            Engineering and is suitable for those who would like to pursue a career          or above.
engineering subject. Further key skills are then developed by introducing      in mechanical and/or maintenance roles. The course is more analytical in         NC/NQ NC/NQ in an
the formal engineering design process and how it relates to engineering        nature and involves the application of mathematics mainly with computer          appropriate discipline.
practice. Computer-aided technology is studied in detail as are suitable and   assistance. The course aims to produce technicians with the underpinning
appropriate IT-related techniques. Students again can take up a period of                                                                                      Please note:
                                                                               knowledge and adaptability to perform a wide range of functions                 • applications are also
paid placement at the end of the academic year.                                throughout the full breadth of mechanical type industries.                        welcome from mature
Year 3                                                                                The University has recently opened a new Centre of Engineering             students (over 21) with
Core skills in design applied mechanics are enhanced. New areas of study       Excellence (CEE) with fully-equipped manufacturing and vehicle workshops,         relevant experience.
are then introduced such as thermodynamics, rapid prototyping and testing      polymer engineering facilities, a fully-equipped model making and prototyping
                                                                                                                                                               • all applicants will be
techniques as well as intelligent systems and control technologies. Students   studio and assembly and welding laboratories. There is also state-of-the-art      interviewed.
are also introduced to advanced computer-based analysis and simulation         teaching facilities and social and recreational space for students.             Duration
techniques such as finite element methods. Professional studies are continued   Course Content                                                                  HNC 1 year
through the introduction of project management skills. Students again can      Subjects include:                                                               Contact
take up a period of paid placement at the end of the academic year.            •    Engineering principles                                                     Peter Griffin
                                                                               •    Statics and strength of materials                                          0800 027 1000
Year 4 (Honours)                                                                                                                                               (44 141 848 7044 outwith
Further study of applied mechanics, including areas such as plasticity,        •    Information technology
                                                                                                                                                               UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
fracture and vibrations, build on the knowledge gained in the early years      •    Communications
                                                                               •    Engineering quality                                                        *The Higher National
of the programme. New material is also introduced such as composite
                                                                               •    Mathematics                                                                 Certificate is a nationally-
structures, acoustics, renewable energy systems and sustainability, a
                                                                                                                                                                recognised award, and part
currently critical area of study for engineers. Computer-aided engineering     •    Materials
                                                                                                                                                                of a national framework
design is enhanced with further, more advanced finite element topics and        •    Engineering workshop skills
                                                                                                                                                                awarded by the Scottish
the introduction of computational fluid dynamics. This final year also gives     •    Thermofluids                                                                 Qualifications Authority
students the opportunity to undertake a major project both individually and    •    Dynamics                                                                    (SQA).
as part of an engineering design group working on an industrial problem.       •    Pneumatics and hydraulics
                                                                               •    Graded unit for mechanical engineering
Career Prospects
Career areas are varied and include design, research and development,          Progression
analysis, manufacture and project management. Previous graduates have          Students who successfully complete this programme may progress to Year 2
been employed by many leading companies such as Rolls-Royce, Doosan-           of the BEng Engineering Management (page 119); BEng Motorsport Design
Babcock Energy Ltd, ABB Alsthom Power, Intel, Hoover, Candy and Biosil.        Engineering (page 124); or BEng Product Design and Development (page 98)
                                                                               programmes.
Professional Exemptions
The BEng (Hons) is accredited by the Institution of Mechanical Engineers.
124                                                                                                                                                                                            125

Engineering
Motorsport Design
Engineering
Courses in automotive and motorsport engineering                                UCAS                            equipment used by many race and rally teams and you will have an
have been delivered at the Hamilton Campus since                                H330 H BEng/MDE                 opportunity to gain useful experience setting up and racing engineering
1984 with the BEng Honours Motorsport Engineering                               Campus                          competition vehicles.
degree the only course of its kind in Scotland. Our                             Hamilton
                                                                                Entry
                                                                                                                Course Content
graduates work in many vehicle manufacturers,                                                                   The principal theme of the course is firmly based on developing an
                                                                                Year 1 Highers BCC
component manufacturers and racing teams.                                                                       understanding of the fundamental engineering and design principles in
                                                                                including Mathematics and
This programme aims first and foremost to prepare students for a career          S Grade English and a           conjunction with developing the inter-personal and transferable skills
as a design engineer, then as a motorsport engineer. Some students will         science subject required.       necessary to effectively contribute as a Chartered or Incorporated Engineer.
have a keen desire to work in motorsport, and we aim to provide them            A-Level CC including                    The second theme is the application of the primary analytical theory
with the key skills that will give them a good start in this industry.          Mathematics and preferably      to motorsport problems to design a more effective vehicle and to improve
Equally some students will undertake this course because they have a            another science subject, plus   its performance. The first part is called motorsport design; the second part
passion for vehicles and motorsports and want to learn more about them          3 GCSEs including English       is race engineering.
while gaining a qualification that prepares them for a career as a design        and a science subject.                  The third theme is the development of transferable skills such as
engineer in any branch of engineering.                                          Year 2 HNC/CertHE in            project management, team working and presentation skills. These are
        We aim to prepare students for employment as designers and              a relevant discipline.          vital skills for the graduate professional engineer, both when seeking
engineers. The generic analytical and design skills sets developed will serve                                   employment and when working as an engineer in any area of industry.
                                                                                Year 2 Direct entry with
equally well in any area of engineering while many of the ‘motorsport’ skills   appropriate A levels –
developed in areas such as data acquisition and weight efficient design are      contact Admissions Officer
highly transferable to other industries.                                        for details.
        Practical experiences, as well as theoretical study, will be offered.   Year 3 HND/DipHE in
Students will have opportunities to work on motorsport vehicles and             a relevant discipline.
to attend and take part in test sessions at a racing circuit. Subject to        Duration
insurance and licensing conditions, students will have opportunities to drive   BEng 3 years
motorsport vehicles. Many of our previous students have taken part in the       BEng Hons 4 years
International Formula Student competition, now held at Silverstone Racing       BEng Hons (Sandwich)
circuit. This requires the team to conceive, design, manufacture and develop    4/5 years
a small single seater racing car, and then compete against some of the top      Contact
European and worldwide universities. This involves both driving events,         David Kennedy
                                                                                0800 027 1000
design evaluation and business presentations.
                                                                                (44 141 848 7044 outwith
        We have recently upgraded our product design computer laboratories
                                                                                UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
to the latest workstation specification, and you will be taught using the
industry leading Pro-Engineer Wildfire Design and Simulation software.
A new Engineering Centre with fully-equipped manufacturing, and
motorsport workshops, polymer engineering facilities, fully-equipped model
making and prototyping studio and assembly and welding laboratories,
recently opened on the campus. There are also state-of-the-art teaching
facilities and social and recreational space. We have invested in similar
126      127




Health
128                                                                                                                                                                                              129

If you want to work in an environment
that’s interesting, rewarding and
challenging, a career in nursing and
midwifery will give you plenty of scope
to do exactly that.
As Scotland’s largest provider of Health, Nursing & Midwifery programmes        Section contents                Continuing Professional Development
we have around 4,500 full and part-time students studying across our            Adult Nursing             134   Our extensive range of specialist programmes keep nursing and midwifery
campuses in Ayr, Dumfries, Hamilton and Paisley.                                Continuing Professional         professionals up-to-speed with the latest advances. Part-time programmes,
       We’re committed to equality and diversity. You can expect a              Development               132   short courses and study at post registration and postgraduate levels, include:
welcoming, inclusive learning and social environment where you are treated      Mental Health Nursing     136   •       Forensic Psychiatry
with respect. Difference in all its forms, including age, disability, gender,   Midwifery                 138   •       Palliative Care
race and ethnicity, sexual orientation and socio-economic status is valued.                                     •       Gerontology
Investment in facilities                                                                                        •       Midwifery
Enhanced teaching environments and the mix of practical and theoretical                                         •       Community Health specialisms
elements of our courses ensures students are prepared for the demands of                                        •       Disaster Management
the profession.                                                                                                 •       Child Protection
•     Paisley Campus – major investment in new nursing and midwifery                                            •       Sexual Health
      classrooms, lecture theatres and skills labs with simulated clinical                                      Full-time, part-time and online learning modes are offered with integrated
      settings. Midwifery students’ equipment includes a dedicated                                              clinical placements.
      birthing room                                                                                             UNICEF recognition
•     Ayr Campus – students benefit from hands-on experience in the                                              The BSc Midwifery Programme was the first in the UK to receive a UNICEF
      campus’ nursing skills labs, which allow them to put learning into                                        (United Nations Children’s Fund) certificate of commitment and, in 2008,
      practice in a simulated clinical setting and review their performance                                     was joint first to achieve full accreditation for ensuring our midwifery
      through the labs’ CCTV system                                                                             students are equipped with the knowledge and skills to advise and support
•     Hamilton Campus – resources include a suite of artificial simulated                                        breastfeeding mothers.
      environments with contemporary healthcare technology,
                                                                                                                Applications to Nursing & Midwifery
      where students learn nursing practice in a realistic context.
      The unpredictability of patient symptoms are mimicked using                                               Course                 Campus              Intake          Application
      sophisticated software in a clinical ward ranging from a                                                  Adult Nursing          A,D,H,P            Feb 2010          CATCH*
                                                                                                                                       A,D,H,P            Sep 2010           UCAS
      low-dependency bed; and medium-dependency bed; to a high-
                                                                                                                Mental Health             H               Feb 2010          CATCH*
      dependency bed with life-support facilities. Midwifery students’                                                                 A,D,H,P            Sep 2010           UCAS
      equipment includes a birthing room with child birth simulator and                                         Midwifery†                P               Feb 2010          CATCH*
      a birthing pool for simulated water births                                                                                         H,P              Sep 2010           UCAS
•     Dumfries Campus – major refurbishment in early 2006 of campus                                             Campus key
      facilities saw creation of new resources in artificial healthcare                                          A Ayr / D Dumfries / H Hamilton / P Paisley
      environments, healthcare technology and software for students
                                                                                                                *For Feb 2010 entry it is recommended that application should be made through
                                                                                                                CATCH before 31 August 2009. All September 2010 applications should be made
                                                                                                                through UCAS, see pages 229–230.
                                                                                                                †The Feb 2010 intake for the Midwifery programme is currently under review.
                                                                                                                For more information contact Maria Cummings, tel 0141 848 4271. >
130                                                                                                                                                                       131




Age restrictions                                                                        Entry with college qualifications
Applicants should be 17 or over when commencing their nursing or                        Appropriate SQA/BTEC modules; HNC/HND/degree qualifications;
midwifery course at the University.                                                     ACCESS to Nursing and other appropriate qualifications will be considered
Programme content – theory and practice                                                 (as long as they are above 48 points at SCQF level 6). Long-established
The three-year Nursing and Midwifery programmes are split into blocks                   links exist with several local colleges and enable eligible SWAP students
of theoretical and practical learning (trimesters). The theory blocks offer a           to enter programmes at the University. Students from selected colleges
variety of teaching/learning methods including: lectures, tutorials, practical          will be able to apply for advanced entry with an HNC Health Care with
skills sessions and directed and e-learning. Students undertake a significant            Extended Practice. Contact Health, Nursing & Midwifery Admissions
amount of their studies in clinical placement. This allows students to build            tel 01698 894412 or e-mail uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
their practical skills in a real health setting and complement the theoretical          Selection criteria
knowledge learned in class. Students on placement are supervised by a                   All applicants selected for interview must satisfactorily pass the selection
clinical mentor, who is a trained and registered Nurse/Midwife who has                  criteria which includes a numeracy test, literacy test, interview and group
had further mentorship training from the University.                                    discussion. (The numeracy and literacy tests demonstrate basic skills in
Admission criteria                                                                      arithmetic, writing and word processing).
Entry to Adult Nursing, Mental Health Nursing or Midwifery is dependent                 Enabling support
on your entry qualifications and career aspirations and a variety of entry               If you have, or think you may have, a disability or condition where
pathways is offered:                                                                    specific adjustments and enabling support could promote access to your
•      BSc Midwifery – 3 Highers (CCC) or HNC/Higher equivalent.                        programme, please contact the School Enabling support Co-ordinator,
       Preference may be given to applicants with a science subject                     Claire Owens, tel 0141 849 4319, e-mail claire.owens1@uws.ac.uk
•      BSc Adult & Mental Health Nursing – 3 Highers (CCC) or
                                                                                        Financial support
       HNC/Higher equivalent
                                                                                        Nursing and Midwifery students are exempt from course tuition fees and
•      Dip HE (entry route) – gaining BSc access in Year 3. For Adult and
                                                                                        eligible for a non means-tested bursary (personal allowance) and, where
       Mental Health only – 2 Highers (CC); or 1 Higher (C) + First Steps
                                                                                        applicable, a means-tested dependant’s allowance administered through
       to Nursing module; or 5 credit Standard Grades + First Steps to
                                                                                        the Student Awards Agency for Scotland (SAAS). At present, current levels of
       Nursing module + Personal Qualities for Nursing module
                                                                                        personal allowance for all students are £6100 per annum*. The dependants’
•      SWAP Access candidates with at least 48 points at SCQF level 6
                                                                                        allowance is income assessed and is intended to support students’ dependants.
       are eligible to apply
                                                                                        *Please note: this rate is reviewed on an ongoing basis.
NB: All applicants must have English at Standard Grade credit level or equivalent
and normally maths/arithmetic at the same level. All offers are conditional on health   First Steps to Nursing
checks and Disclosure Scotland checks.                                                  This is a new initiative for any students wishing to apply for pre-registration
NB: Students who successfully complete the BSc Adult Nursing or BSc Mental Health       nursing. This module can help you to familiarise yourself with skills essential
Nursing will be eligible for registration with the Nursing and Midwifery Council as     for nursing in preparation for application to a programme. (It cannot
Registered Nurses. For students entering at Diploma level, successful completion of     however, guarantee a place on any nursing programme). It is a short
the DipHE will enable progression to BSc study.                                         programme of study at low cost. Further details available from
                                                                                        Mary Milligan – contact 0141 849 4202, e-mail mary.milligan@uws.ac.uk
132                                                                                                                      133

Health Continuing
                                                                             For more
                                                                             information, contact
                                                                             University Direct tel

Professional                                                                 0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                             uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


Development                                                                                            I’m John
                                                                                                       from Glasgow
                                                                                                       I’m 29
                                                                                                       I’m studying Mental
                                                                                                       Health Nursing.
                                                                                                       I’d like to be a great
Continuing professional development is a key theme                                                     nurse one day and
in the health, nursing and midwifery sectors to                                                        help reduce stigma
                                                                                                       and labelling amongst
ensure health professionals keep up-to-speed with                                                      mental health patients.
the latest advances.                                                                                   I like socialising and
                                                                                                       being with friends and
As you would expect from the country’s largest provider of health, nursing                             I don’t like people who
and midwifery programmes, we are a centre of experience and knowledge                                  aren’t open for change.
at both pre-and post-registration levels.
      As well as offering high-quality undergraduate provision, we offer
a range of postgraduate and post-experience programmes for nurses,
midwives and related healthcare professionals.
      These programmes are designed to meet the demands of the
appropriate professional bodies and offer relevant practice to ensure
attainment of up-to-date clinical competencies that are relevant to the
range of professions in this sector.
We offer:
•     short courses
•     research opportunities
•     programmes at a range of levels, including CertHE, DipHE, BSc,
      Postgraduate Certificate/Diploma and MSc
Part-time study
Our BSc Midwifery Studies is an undergraduate programme aimed at
post-registration midwives. For more information tel 0141 848 3656.
Part-time programmes in Health Studies and in Nursing Studies, which
reflect current developments in health, medical science and social care,
are offered. Call 0141 848 3193 for more information.
134                                                                                                                                                                                                                      135

Health
Adult Nursing

Training to be an adult nurse provides you with real                           UCAS                            Career Prospects                                                                     Contact
career potential. You’ll learn practical skills and                            For application details         On successful completion of your award you will be eligible for registration         University Direct,
procedures and will use your excellent interpersonal                           see page 129.                   with the Nursing and Midwifery Council as a Registered Nurse in                      0800 027 1000
                                                                                                                                                                                                    (44 141 848 7044 outwith
and communication skills to make a real difference                             DipHE*                          Adult Nursing.
                                                                                                                                                                                                    UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
to people’s lives. A commitment to caring for others                           Ayr – 3060 A DipN/Adult                Your studies will prepare you to meet the challenges of the ever-
is a must.                                                                     Dumfries –                      changing health sector. Depending on your chosen specialism, you will have
                                                                               3060 D DipN/Adult               the option of working as a Registered Nurse within a hospital or community
Year 1                                                                         Hamilton –
                                                                                                               setting in the UK or in other EU countries. Job opportunities are excellent
The Common Foundation is Year 1 of the programme (12 months). This year        3060 H DipN/Adult
                                                                                                               with salaries starting at around £17,610 per annum.
is generic to all nursing students and provides you with a strong foundation   Paisley –
in essential nursing knowledge and skills. This first year introduces you to    3060 P DipN/Adult               *Students who successfully complete the BSc Adult Nursing will be eligible for
elements of all existing branches (Adult, Mental Health, Learning Disability                                   registration with the Nursing and Midwifery Council as Registered Nurses. For
                                                                               BSc
                                                                                                               students entering at Diploma level, successful completion of the DipHE will enable
and Child Health) in preparation for the specialist approaches of your         Ayr – B740 A BSc/AdultN
                                                                                                               progression to BSc study.
chosen branch of study. The CFP prepares students to meet NMC (Nursing,        Dumfries –
Midwifery Council) outcomes essential for entry to branch programmes.          B740 D BSc/AdultN
                                                                               Hamilton –
Years 2 and 3                                                                  B740 H BSc/AdultN
Adult Nursing focuses on the health needs of adult patients. It is based on    Paisley –
a commitment to caring for individuals in health, disability and ill health.   B740 P BSc/AdultN
Students on the course develop practical skills and procedural knowledge       Campus
that enable them to assess situations and provide appropriate care. Modern     Ayr, Dumfries, Hamilton,
approaches to Adult Nursing place greater emphasis on the uniqueness of        Paisley
the individual and on working in partnership with each patient to promote      Entry
optimum health and the best quality of life.                                   See page 130.
       Adult Nursing students develop their skills by working as members       Duration
of multi-disciplinary teams, which include doctors, physiotherapists,          DipHE 2 years
occupational therapists, pharmacists and others. Practical skills are gained   BSc 3 years
on clinical placements in the public and private sectors. This will include    Clinical placement
                                                                               Please note: clinical
acute inpatient hospitals, care homes and community nursing teams.
                                                                               placements can be in the
A mentor supports students in clinical practice. The mentor is normally        following areas: Lanarkshire,
a registered nurse who supports and guides learning for each student.          Dumfries and Galloway,
       We are committed to equality and diversity within this programme.       Ayrshire and Arran,
If you have or think you may have a disability or condition where specific      Renfrewshire, Argyll and some
adjustments and enabling support could promote access, please contact the      parts of West Dunbartonshire.
School Enabling Support Co-ordinator Claire Owens, tel 0141 849 4319,          Placements are dictated by
e-mail claire.owens1@uws.ac.uk                                                 the campus the student is
                                                                               based at for theory.
136                                                                                                                                                                                            137

Health
Mental Health Nursing

As many as one in three people are thought to suffer                           UCAS                              We are committed to equality and diversity within this programme.
from mental health problems. Mental Health Nursing                             For application details    If you have or think you may have a disability or condition where specific
is one of most demanding areas of nursing, offering                            see page 129.              adjustments and enabling support could promote access, please contact the
a challenging and rewarding career. If you’ve got                              DipHE*                     School Enabling Support Co-ordinator Claire Owens, tel 0141 849 4319,
great communication skills and a capacity to care,                             Ayr – 3160 A DipN/MHN      e-mail claire.owens1@uws.ac.uk
this could be the career for you.                                              Dumfries –
                                                                               3160 D DipN/MHN
                                                                                                          Career Prospects
The BSc in Mental Health Nursing at UWS emphasises the importance              Hamilton –                 On successful completion of your award you will be eligible for registration
of relationships between nurses, service users, families and carers, and       3160 H DipN/MHN            with the Nursing and Midwifery Council as a Registered Nurse in Mental
others who work in the field of mental health. The programme reflects the        Paisley –                  Health. Your studies will prepare you to meet the challenges of the ever-
realities of mental health nursing in the 21st century and equips students     3160 P DipN/MHN            changing health sector. Depending on your chosen specialism you will have
to recognise and meet the mental health care needs of people across            BSc                        the option of working as a Registered Nurse within a hospital or community
their lifespan.                                                                Ayr – B760 A BSc/MHN3      setting in the UK or in other EU countries. Job opportunities are excellent
        The programme promotes values and principles-based practice            Dumfries –                 with salaries starting at around £17,610 per annum. Continuing education
designed to produce a nurse who will be able to work collaboratively and       B760 D BSc/MHN3            is a necessary part of maintaining your professional and legal standing
optimistically to promote recovery and help in times of crisis. Ultimately,    Hamilton –                 once qualified.
caring is at the heart of mental health nursing.                               B760 H BSc/MHN3
                                                                                                          *Students who successfully complete the BSc Mental Health Nursing will be eligible
                                                                               Paisley –
        We welcome applicants who have an interest in and capacity to care                                for registration with the Nursing and Midwifery Council as Registered Nurses. For
                                                                               B760 P BSc/MHN3
for others and who are motivated to apply themselves to the appropriate                                   students entering at Diploma level, successful completion of the DipHE will enable
                                                                               Campus                     progression to BSc study.
level and type of academic and clinical study. Opportunities for further       Ayr, Dumfries, Hamilton,
academic and professional development are provided for those who               Paisley
successfully complete the programme(s).                                        Entry
        The University campuses in Ayr, Dumfries, Hamilton and Paisley         See page 130.
provide the focus for teaching activity and the BSc/DipHE in Mental Health     Duration
Nursing is taught at all four campuses. Year 1 of the programme (the           DipHE 2 years
Common Foundation Year) is shared with students on the BSc/DipHE               BSc 3 years
Adult Nursing programme. Students must specify their choice of campus.         Contact
        Practice experience is available throughout Ayrshire and Arran,        University Direct,
Greater Glasgow and Clyde, Lanarkshire and Dumfries and Galloway.              0800 027 1000
Where possible, placement experience is gained in placements relatively        (44 141 848 7044 outwith
close to the teaching base although more distant placements may be             UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
required or available. Students have the opportunity to care for patients
across hospital, community and voluntary care settings. The rapidly changing
face of mental health care requires students to demonstrate learning and
competence with individuals and groups within a health and social care
framework and to work in partnership with all who care for people’s
mental health.
138                                                                                                                                                                                                 139

Health
Midwifery

Midwives have a unique and demanding role – if                                    UCAS                           Year 2
you enjoy responsibility and want to prepare women                                Hamilton –                     The focus in Year 2 is high-risk midwifery practice and on medical, obstetric
for the delivery of new life then this immensely                                  B720 H BSc/Mid                 and social factors that render childbirth high-risk. Society, drug misuse,
                                                                                  Paisley – B720 P BSc/Mid
satisfying career option could be for you.                                                                       domestic violence and teenage status are discussed. Critical care is included
                                                                                  Campus
                                                                                                                 with emphasis on managing clinical emergencies appropriately.
Midwifery focuses on the impact of pregnancy and childbirth on women,             Hamilton, Paisley
                                                                                                                 Clinical placements include labour ward (theatre), gynaecology and high-risk
and society. The role of the midwife is developed to provide care and             Entry
                                                                                  See page 130.
                                                                                                                 midwifery. The key aim is to build on the previous knowledge of the normal
support to prospective parents during pregnancy, childbirth and the
                                                                                  Duration
                                                                                                                 and to integrate high-risk midwifery knowledge with high-risk midwifery
transition to parenthood. In partnership with women, midwives aim to
                                                                                  BSc 3 years                    practice. Towards the end of second year, students are encouraged to
promote and maintain health and prevent ill health in the mother and baby
                                                                                  Clinical Placement             select a case load of women and follow their progress through the
by means of empowerment, informed choice and health education.
                                                                                  Please note: Clinical          childbearing process.
        The midwifery programme deals with care of the mother before
                                                                                  placement can also be          Year 3
conception, during pregnancy and care of mother and baby up to twenty-
                                                                                  taken in Ayrshire and Arran;   In Year 3, the focus returns to normal midwifery care, however, the
eight days following childbirth. Midwifery students will be taught theory
                                                                                  Dumfries and Galloway; and
at Paisley or Hamilton Campus. Clinical placements are located in Greater                                        underpinning themes are education and management. Care of the sick
                                                                                  Highland Health Board areas.
Glasgow and Clyde; Highland; Lanarkshire; Dumfries and Galloway; and                                             neonate is also included and students will undertake a 6-week neonatal
                                                                                  Contact
Ayrshire and Arran Health Board areas. Students will develop their skills         University Direct,
                                                                                                                 unit clinical placement. By the end of Year 3, students are expected to be
in clinical practice by working as members of multi-disciplinary teams            0800 027 1000                  working in the clinical areas with minimal supervision. To prepare students
within large and small hospitals in urban and rural locations. Students are       (44 141 848 7044 outwith       for this, knowledge in relation to lifelong learning skills such as problem-
supervised in practice areas by midwives and personal tutors.                     UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk       solving, decision-making, leadership and professional accountability and
        We are committed to equality and diversity within this programme.                                        autonomy inform every subject. Module subjects include evidence-based
If you have or think you may have a disability or condition where specific                                        practice, breastfeeding, promoting normality and management and
adjustments and enabling support could promote access, please contact the                                        education. Students will undertake an individual project on a subject of
School Enabling Support Co-ordinator Claire Owens, tel 0141 849 4319,                                            their choice related to midwifery practice to enhance self-directed learning.
e-mail claire.owens1@uws.ac.uk                                                                                   Clinical placements include labour ward, ward, and the community including
                                                                                                                 rural places. The key aim is to build on general midwifery knowledge
Course Content
                                                                                                                 and skills to a self-management level to facilitate ‘fitness to practice’ on
Year 1
                                                                                                                 completion of the programme.
The focus in Year 1 is normality in midwifery. Initially, students are
introduced to midwifery through health and public health concepts,                                               Career Prospects
parenthood issues and the professional role of the midwife. Students are                                         On successful completion of your BSc, you will be eligible for registration with
then introduced to the art and science of midwifery knowledge and clinical                                       the Nursing and Midwifery Council as a Registered Midwife. Your studies will
practice through life sciences, caring skills, professional skills and personal                                  prepare you to meet the challenges of the ever-changing health sector. You
development. Clinical practice is assessed to ensure competency and safety.                                      will have the option of working as a Registered Midwife within a hospital or
Clinical placements in the first year include labour ward, community and                                          community setting in the UK or in other EU countries. Job opportunities are
ward settings. The key aim is the integration of normal midwifery knowledge                                      excellent with salaries starting at around £18,818 per annum.
with normal midwifery practice at a foundation level.
140         141




Languages
142                                                                                                               143

A UWS languages degree
opens up a world of opportunities –
your passport to a global career.


On our Paisley Campus, the BA/BA Hons Languages programme offers the             Section contents
opportunity for students to study two languages and to undertake work or         Languages (French,
study abroad. Language options are also offered within some Business and         Spanish, German)           144
Science degrees.
                                                                                *Please note: German is
       Modules in English for speakers of other languages are offered for
                                                                                 currently only available
learners of English in the UK. Contact University Direct on 0800 027 1000        as a minor option.
for more information. To find out more about language study,
visit www.uws.ac.uk
Part-time language study
Through our Centre for Lifelong Learning, we also offer part-time day,
evening and summer courses in a variety of languages including Greek,
Italian, Polish and Mandarin. For more information, contact University Direct
tel 0800 027 1000, e-mail uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
Language study for non-specialists
There are opportunities to combine language study with some other
disciplines. It is possible to begin a language from scratch and progress
throughout the three or four years of study. A high priority is placed on
practical language competence. Language modules are also offered in the
University’s part-time day, evening and summer programmes.
144                                                                                                                                                                                                                         145

Languages
                                                                               Part-time option also
                                                                               available, contact
                                                                               University Direct tel

French, Spanish,                                                               0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                               uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


German*
The ability to communicate in another language is                              UCAS                           Year 3 (Degree)                                                                      *Please note: German is
a skill highly prized by employers. The UWS degree                             R901 P BA/Lang                 A study year abroad, if not already undertaken, is essential at this stage.           currently only available as
in languages places great emphasis on developing                               Campus                         Students may be placed with one of our partner institutions in a French,              a minor option.
your practical language skills with opportunities for                          Paisley                        German or Spanish-speaking country for an approved programme of
paid work placement in Europe as well as a study                               Entry                          study. Students who have prior experience of extended residence in a
                                                                               Higher BBCC including
year abroad.                                                                                                  relevant country (for instance by spending a year as an English language
                                                                               English, and appropriate
                                                                               foreign language at B.
                                                                                                              assistant after Year 2) or pressing personal reasons for not taking up this
Language classes at UWS emphasise the acquisition of practical skills in the
                                                                                                              opportunity may continue their Year 3 studies at the University. At this
language. At all stages students acquire language skills that they will be     A-Level CC including           stage most students will have completed an academic year abroad and
able to use in social, academic and business contexts. Parallel programmes     appropriate foreign language
                                                                                                              will build on their newly acquired fluency. They may specialise in French or
are offered in French and Spanish. At the earlier stages students are          plus three GCSEs including
                                                                                                              Spanish only, or continue to study two languages in modules which develop
expected to make use of the language in practical contexts; at the more        English.
                                                                                                              understanding of the contexts in which these languages are spoken.
advanced stages they are expected to speak and write at length on topics       Year 2 Advanced entry
related to the countries in which their chosen languages are spoken.           with HNC and appropriate       Year 4 (Honours)
All students take two languages in Years 1 and 2. Depending on the             language skills. Applicants    In the fourth year students consolidate their language knowledge principally
combination of modules chosen, students may graduate with the title            who have achieved the          in the Language and Area Studies modules. These classes are taught entirely
BA Languages, BA French or BA Spanish. It is also possible to take French      Scottish Languages             through the medium of the foreign language. Students can expect to study
or Spanish with German as a Minor, but the title BA German is not              Baccalaureate will also be     a series of topics relating to social, political, economic, cultural or historical
available at the moment.                                                       accepted for Year 2 entry.     issues. They will also develop their own specialist interests and write a
                                                                               Contact the number below       dissertation in their principal foreign language. A high standard of language
Course Content                                                                 for details.
                                                                                                              competence should be achieved at this stage. Some students may choose to
Year 1                                                                         Year 3 Advanced entry          take linguistics modules to broaden their knowledge of language matters.
French, German and Spanish are offered and all students must take two          with HND and appropriate
languages, although the second language need not have been studied before.     language skills and            Career Prospects
Foreign language study will be the main part of the curriculum throughout,     experience. Contact the        Language graduates take up posts in a variety of areas in both the public
but students also have the opportunity to develop a broad understanding of     number below for details.      and private sectors. They have usually developed good communication skills
language structures which will underpin their language learning.               Duration                       in English as well as in their chosen foreign languages. The globalisation
                                                                               BA 3/4 years                   of business means that many companies have contact with customers or
Year 2
                                                                               BA Hons 4/5 years              providers whose first language is not English. In the European employment
Students progress further in their general language skills and cultural
                                                                               Contact                        market there is a demand for native speakers of English who have good
knowledge. Those who have an interest in teaching as a career may take         Susan Stuart                   foreign language skills. There is also a demand for well-qualified teachers of
an optional module in Teaching English to Speakers of Other Languages.         0800 027 1000                  foreign languages throughout the UK in secondary schools and in colleges.
Language study in this year will help prepare students for a year abroad.      (44 141 848 7044               In Scotland, in particular, postgraduate courses in primary education
There is an opportunity between Years 2 and 3 to apply for a paid post as      outwith UK) susan.
                                                                                                              look favourably on applicants with foreign language skills. Language
an English language assistant in a school in a French, German or Spanish-      stuart@uws.ac.uk or
                                                                                                              graduates now often find opportunities to work in the UK or abroad as
speaking country through a scheme operated by the British Council. There       uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
                                                                                                              teachers of English to speakers of other languages (ESOL). As with other
may, additionally, be the opportunity to undertake a work placement in a
                                                                                                              degrees, language graduates may take up postgraduate study in related
company in Europe.
                                                                                                              or new areas, for example in translation and interpreting, librarianship or
NB: All students on the BA Languages programme spend a year abroad between                                    international marketing.
Years 2 and 3, or during their third year of study.
146       147




Science
148                                                                                                                                                                                                               149

Scientific discoveries change our
world. Get the knowledge and skills
to help you make your mark.


Science at UWS                                                               Section contents              First-class facilities                                                           Section contents cont.
•     courses developed in collaboration with industrial and educational     Applied Bioscience      152   Recent investment has enabled:                                                   Pharmaceutical Science 186
      partners                                                               Applied Bioscience            •     creation of new facilities for teaching and research in physics,           Physics                190
•     input from industry and extensive research and consultancy expertise   (CertHE)                163         forensic science, analytical chemistry, biology and biotechnology          Physics with Medical
      help shape teaching and learning                                       Applied Bioscience            •     investment in polarised light and fluorescent microscopes with              Technology/Multimedia 193
•     small class sizes and approachable staff ensure you get the support    with Biochemistry       154         advanced image analysis systems and in a high-resolution laser             Psychology (BSc)       196
                                                                             Applied Bioscience with                                                                                        Science (CertHE)       175
      you need to be successful in your studies                                                                  Doppler imager. These will enhance research in health and the
                                                                             Environmental Science 154
Boost your employment prospects                                                                                  environment, particularly for the study of cataracts, arthritis and
                                                                             Applied Bioscience with                                                                                        “Having the relevant
The majority of our programmes offer you the opportunity to undertake                                            geo-materials                                                               qualification is essential
                                                                             Forensic Investigation 155
a period of paid industrial placement with companies at home and abroad.     Applied Bioscience with
                                                                                                           •     opening of the Spatial Pattern Analysis Research Laboratory for             for getting ahead in this
Placement employers have included BNFL, GlaxoSmithKline and                  Forensic Investigation              environmental data and modelling processes                                  sector. The professionally-
British Energy.                                                              (DipHE)                 162   Research with real-world impact                                                   accredited status
                                                                             Applied Bioscience                                                                                              of the University’s
Fieldwork                                                                                                  Research groups and initiatives include:
                                                                             with Immunology         157                                                                                     Applied Biomedical
Our courses offer a balance of theory and practice. Many modules in areas                                  •     Newspaper Industry Environmental Technology
                                                                             Applied Bioscience                                                                                              Science degree enables
such as geology, environmental studies, hydrology, marine biology and                                      •     Neurovascular Inflammation Group                                             graduates to fast-track
                                                                             with Microbiology       158   •     Environmental Technologies Group
surveying, include off-campus fieldwork components. Our students have                                                                                                                         towards becoming a
                                                                             Applied Bioscience            •     Thin Film Centre
gained practical experience in Norway, Australia and in the US.                                                                                                                              professional Biomedical
                                                                             with Multimedia         159   •     Experimental Nuclear Physics Group                                          Scientist. Also, the work
Flexible subject combinations                                                Applied Bioscience
                                                                                                           •     Molecular and Health Sciences Research Group                                experience they gain
Science programmes can be studied on a Single subject, Joint subject or      and Psychology          160                                                                                     as part of the course
                                                                                                           •     Microscale Sensors Group
Major/Minor subject basis.                                                   Applied Bioscience                                                                                              will give them an
                                                                                                           •     Heart Research UK-funded study into the effects of high glucose on
                                                                             and/with Zoology        161                                                                                     added advantage when
Single subject degree                                                        Biomedical Science/Applied
                                                                                                                 the functioning of human blood vessels of different size and origin
                                                                                                                                                                                             entering the workplace.”
•     specialise in one area e.g. BSc/BSc Hons Chemistry                     Biomedical Science      164   Professional accreditation                                                        Cheryl Johnston
Joint subject degree                                                         Earth Science                 Many of our courses are accredited or recognised by professional bodies           Biomedical Scientist,
•     divide your studies equally over two subject areas e.g. BSc/BSc Hons   (minor option)          167   such as the Institute of Biology, the Institute of Physics and the Royal Society Inverclyde Royal Hospital
      Mathematical Sciences and Physics                                      Chemistry               168   of Chemistry. Membership of professional organisations boosts graduate
Major/Minor subject degree                                                   Environmental Biology 171     prospects and can lead to chartered or professional status.
•     choose two subject areas where the majority of modules are drawn       Forensic Science        172          Graduate Cheryl Johnston, is a Biomedical Scientist with the
      from one subject and a smaller number are drawn from another           General Science         175   Microbiology Department of Inverclyde Royal Hospital in Greenock, West of
      e.g. BSc/BSc Hons Physics with Biology                                 Health Science          178   Scotland. The strong practical grounding and professional recognition of her
You’ll also have the opportunity to select from a range of individual        Health and Lifestyle    176   degree helped her gain this post. Kenny Hepburn, Chief Biomedical Scientist
modules – allowing you to broaden your knowledge in the direction            Health and Lifestyle          at Inverclyde Royal Hospital, said: “The fact that Honours graduates of the
you want.                                                                    (DipHE)                 177   Applied Biomedical Science degree will already be registered is of great
                                                                             Mathematical Sciences 180     benefit to all concerned as they can commence in-depth training in their
                                                                             Medicinal Chemistry     182   chosen subject immediately on appointment.”
                                                                             Occupational Safety
                                                                             & Health                184
150                                                                                                                                                                                               151

Science
Introduction to
the Life Sciences
The life sciences are concerned with the study of                                 Degree combinations                                                                   *The Biomedical Science
‘life’ with many exciting, new discoveries being                                                                                                                         degree title is professionally
                                                                                  Degree                         Single        Major           Joint          Minor
made every day relating to health, disease and the                                                                                                                       accredited by the Institute
                                                                                  Applied Bioscience               ✓            ✓                ✓             ✓
                                                                                                                                                                         of Biomedical Science. The
diversity of life. For example, genetic engineering                               Biochemistry                      -            -               -             ✓
                                                                                                                                                                         Applied Biomedical Science
is having a major impact on biology as a discipline                               Earth Science                     -            -               -             ✓
                                                                                                                                                                         title is approved by the
and it will change the way that we view all aspects                               Environmental Science             -            -               -             ✓
                                                                                                                                                                         Health Professions Council,
of life. Techniques used in deciphering an organism’s                             Forensic Investigation            -            -               -             ✓
                                                                                                                                                                         so this title provides a really
genome can be applied to a variety of research                                    Immunology                        -            -               -             ✓
                                                                                                                                                                         effective entry to work in the
areas in the life sciences (e.g. forensics, medicine,                             Microbiology                      -            -               -             ✓
                                                                                                                                                                         NHS laboratories – together
                                                                                  Multimedia                        -            -               -             ✓
ecology and pharmaceutical science) to help us                                                                                                                           with a £2000 bursary for
                                                                                  Psychology                       ✓             -               ✓              -
manage our environment. We recognise the                                          Zoology                           -            -               ✓             ✓
                                                                                                                                                                         eligible students in the last
importance of the practical aspects in the study of                                                                                                                      two years of their study.
                                                                                  Applied Biomedical Science*      ✓             -               -              -
life processes, so you will have many opportunities                               Biomedical Science*              ✓             -               -              -
to gain hands-on experience in the laboratory or in                               Environmental Biology            ✓             -               -              -
the field, as well as in the lecture theatre. Our virtual                          NB: Certain combinations of Joint or Major/Minor titles may not always be available
learning environment (Blackboard) also provides lots                              due to timetable or campus constraints.
of resources to support your learning experience.
                                                                                  Placement/work-based learning
Within the broad framework of ‘Applied Bioscience’, it is possible to study       To enable you to gain hands-on practical experience during your degree
a flexible package of modules that enable graduates to gain a wide range           studies three options are available:
of skills and knowledge to equip you for careers in the health care and           1.     A sandwich placement.
biotechnology industries, teaching, biological research and environmental         2.    A single or double work experience module in your third year of study.
science. All the courses offered in Life Sciences are based on a broad            3.    A fifteen week placement in a hospital laboratory in your third year of
foundation that is delivered in Years 1 and 2 which means you could change               study for students taking the Applied Biomedical Science degree.
the title of your degree up until the end of Year 2. Modules become more
                                                                                  A sandwich placement takes the form of a 9–12 month period of paid
focused in Year 3, with specific named Honours titles being generated at
                                                                                  industrial experience between years 3–4 of your degree. The placement
the beginning of Year 4.
                                                                                  selected will depend on your chosen specialism. Selection for placement is
        Under the flexibility of the University’s modular structure you
                                                                                  made on a competitive basis during Year 3.
can study programmes in Applied Bioscience on a Single subject basis
                                                                                          Work-based learning modules are unpaid but receive academic
(specialising in one main subject area), on a Joint subject basis (dividing
                                                                                  credit. Students work between 1–4 days per week for a company during
studies over two subject areas in equal proportion) or as Major/Minor
                                                                                  the second trimester of their third year of study. Selection for work-based
subject combinations (studying two subject areas, with the majority of
                                                                                  learning modules is made on a competitive basis during Year 3.
modules drawn from one subject and a smaller number drawn from
                                                                                          Students taking the Applied Biomedical Science degree can opt to be
another). This means that you can spend more time studying what interests
                                                                                  considered for the 15-week integrated work placement in an accredited
you most in life science.
                                                                                  hospital training laboratory at the start of their third year of study. Placements
        The range of likely titles available (subject to demand and timetabling
                                                                                  are allocated on a competitive basis. The integrated work placement receives
constraints) is shown opposite, although combination with a modern
                                                                                  academic credit and is equivalent to a trimester of academic study.
language and/or study in a foreign partner university may be possible.
152                                                                                                                                                                                                                        153

Science
                                                                                  Part-time option also
                                                                                  available, contact
                                                                                  University Direct tel

Applied Bioscience                                                                0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                  uni-direct@uws.ac.uk




This course has been designed to provide you with                                 UCAS                        such as an extended treatment of biochemistry, microbiology, molecular                 Duration
a comprehensive knowledge base in the modern                                      Hamilton –                  biology and human physiology, and the introduction of more specialist                  BSc 3 years
Bioscience disciplines as well as developing the                                  C710 H BSc/ABio             disciplines such as animal behaviour, immunology and entomology. Choice                BSc Hons 4 years
                                                                                  Paisley –                                                                                                          BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years
specific practical and transferable skills that                                                                is maximised for students taking the Applied Bioscience title, but there are
                                                                                  C710 P BSc/ABio                                                                                                    Contact
will enhance graduate employability.                                                                          some restrictions according to the programme title and the campus. There is
                                                                                  Campus                                                                                                             Dr Catriona Tedford
                                                                                                              provision for a case study or a work-based learning relating to the chosen
The Bioindustry, incorporating existing chemical and pharmaceutical               Hamilton, Paisley                                                                                                  (Hamilton Campus);
                                                                                                              interests of the student. A 10-week work placement is an optional, but                 Dr Richard Thacker
companies, in Scotland is expanding very rapidly as measured by the number        Entry
                                                                                  Year 1 Highers BCC
                                                                                                              exceedingly valuable part of the degree; shorter work based placements                 (Paisley Campus)
of new company start-ups and the total number of persons employed.                                            may also be available. The work placement is established for students
                                                                                  or above; for mature                                                                                               0800 027 1000
Course Content                                                                    applicants (over 21),       taking into account their interests and circumstances and is normally in a             (44 141 848 7044 outwith
Year 1                                                                            relevant experience.        bioscience laboratory. The placement enhances students’ employability and              UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
Year 1 of the course has been designed to provide students with a broad-                                      preparation for the project in Year 4.
                                                                                  A-Level CD, preferably
based introduction to a range of biological disciplines covering the scope        including Chemistry or      (Optional) Sandwich Placement
of the subject from cell and molecular aspects through to ecological and          Biology plus GCSE English   An extended twelve-month sandwich placement may be available for
environmental topics. Additionally, students will also be introduced to           and Mathematics.            students interested in gaining practical experience.
other underpinning disciplines and transferable skills, for example, ICT and
                                                                                  Year 2 CertHE/HNC in        Year 4 (Honours)
scientific computation. Also available will be a number of electives which         a relevant discipline.
students would select, with advice from their tutor, based on interests and                                   This year will develop and further refine the subjects studied previously. A critical
future career plans. Depending on your choice of campus, these can include        A-level BCC, to include     part of the Year 4 curriculum is a supervised project which allows students an
                                                                                  Biology and Chemistry.      opportunity to participate in research in a subject area of their own choosing.
chemistry, mathematics, geology, physics, psychology and computing. All first
year students are provided with an introduction to the use of the Blackboard      Year 3 DipHE/HND in         Career Prospects
Virtual Learning Environment and to personal development planning.                Applied Bioscience or
                                                                                                              As the sector matures, the nature of the companies is also changing from
                                                                                  equivalent qualification.
Year 2                                                                                                        research and development to bio manufacturing. Consequently, the career
                                                                                  Please note: ideally        options have also expanded to include research, analysis, production, and
In Year 2, the basic aspects of life science are developed. The range of topics
                                                                                  candidates should also be   quality assurance and regulatory affairs. Other career options available
offered covers: aspects of cell biology, cell culture, analytical techniques,
                                                                                  able to demonstrate that
pharmacology, biochemistry, the biosphere, microbiology, human biology,                                       include sales and marketing, teaching, publicly-funded research and
                                                                                  they have achieved passes
vertebrate physiology and evolution, and genetics (some not available on                                      monitoring agencies and in the traditional bio-industries such as brewing
                                                                                  (at Grade 1–3 in Standard
both campuses). There is scope in Year 2 for students to study all modules        Grade or Intermediate 2)    and food processing. Graduates from this course, with its strong emphasis
in biosciences, or to select bioscience modules in combination with other         in Maths, English and       on practical skills, will be well-placed to seek employment in any of these
subjects. Many students choose to study two subjects; popular combinations        Chemistry.                  areas. Successful students may also progress to postgraduate studies at MSc
include biology with chemistry, or psychology.                                                                or PhD level. This qualification is acceptable to all Schools of Education for
                                                                                  Applicants will normally
                                                                                  be invited for interview.
                                                                                                              embarking on teacher training (Biology and Science) courses.
Year 3
In Year 3 of the course, students may elect to concentrate their studies                                      Professional Recognition
on the molecular aspects of bioscience (protein structure and function,                                       Successful completion of this course will normally enable graduates to
DNA technology, immunotechniques and pharmacology). Otherwise, and                                            obtain the status of Membership of the Institute of Biology, after an
according to campus attended, the range of topics offered cover aspects                                       appropriate period of industrial experience.
154                                                                                                                                                                                                                     155

Science Applied Bioscience                                                                                    Science Applied
                                                                                                                                                                                               Part-time option also
                                                                                                                                                                                               available, contact
                                                                                                                                                                                               University Direct tel

with Biochemistry/                                                                                            Bioscience with                                                                  0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                                                                                                                               uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


Environmental Science                                                                                         Forensic Investigation
Biochemistry is a discipline with a long history,                               UCAS                          Forensic Investigation is the application of scientific                           UCAS
bridging the gap between chemistry and biology.                                 Applied Bioscience            knowledge and techniques to solving crime. In this                               C7F4 H BSc/ABWFI1
                                                                                with Biochemistry –           course you will gain the underpinning knowledge                                  Campus
Many of the fundamental principles of biological science were discovered        C9C7 P BSc/ABWB                                                                                                Hamilton
                                                                                                              and skills in biological sciences and chemistry that
as a result of biochemical techniques and experiments. Modern biochemistry      Applied Bioscience with                                                                                        Entry
                                                                                Environmental Science –
                                                                                                              are essential to forensic investigations.
embraces many new developments in molecular biology and genetics.                                                                                                                              Year 1 Highers BCC
Environmental issues are at the forefront of public concern and decision-       C9F7 P BSc/ApBWES             Practical skills are key in this field. There will be opportunities to acquire    or above; for mature
making at local, national and international levels.                             Campus                        expertise in scientific techniques, analysis and presentation of results.         applicants (over 21),
                                                                                Paisley                       Skills will be applied to crime scene scenarios involving gathering              relevant experience.
With Biochemistry                                                               Entry
We place a strong emphasis on the practical aspects of bio-chemistry                                          evidence, scientific analysis of evidence and presentation of that evidence.      A-Level CD, preferably
                                                                                See Applied Bioscience
and you will gain experience in a range of important, modern techniques                                       The knowledge and skills acquired will allow graduates to seek employment        including Chemistry or
                                                                                page 152.
                                                                                                              in the Forensic Science and Life Science fields. The course has been designed     Biology plus GCSE English
including DNA and RNA analysis, protein characterisation and immunoassay        Duration
                                                                                                              to provide students with an in-depth knowledge of a range of biological          and Mathematics.
techniques. This provision is complemented by studying cell biology, genetics   BSc 3 years
and physiology. This extensive training in biochemical techniques will          BSc Hons 4 years              disciplines and their applications, as well as to develop understanding of the   Year 2 CertHE/HNC in
prepare you for employment opportunities across a range of companies            BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years   principles and applications of forensic investigation. Additionally, students    a relevant discipline.
in areas such as the biotechnology industry. Biochemistry may be combined       Contact                       will be introduced to underpinning disciplines and transferable skills, for      A-level BCC, to include
with several other subjects enabling you to focus your interests and            Dr Richard Thacker            example chemistry, communication skills and ICT.                                 Biology and Chemistry.
degree title.                                                                   0800 027 1000                 Course Content                                                                   Year 3 DipHE/HND in
                                                                                (44 141 848 7044 outwith
With Environmental Science                                                                                    Year 1                                                                           Applied Bioscience or
                                                                                UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
The relationship of organisms to their physical environment can be                                            Year 1 will provide a broad-based introduction to a range of biological          equivalent qualification.
studied at levels of organisation from molecules and cells to populations,                                    subjects underpinned by key and transferable skills. You will be introduced      Please note: ideally
communities and the biosphere. Topics studied will include the roles/                                         to the principles of crime scene investigation which will include crime          candidates should also be
functions of biomolecules, cells, tissues, organs, whole organisms and their                                  scene methodology, gathering evidence and a range of techniques such             able to demonstrate that
environments. Themes of biodiversity, functional processes in ecosystems                                      as fingerprinting and blood pattern analysis. All first year students are          they have achieved passes
                                                                                                              provided with an introduction to the use of the Blackboard Virtual Learning      (at Grade 1–3 in Standard
and human impacts on the biosphere are also covered. Additional topics
                                                                                                              Environment and to personal development planning.                                Grade or Intermediate 2) in
may also include conservation, microbiology, animal behaviour, pest                                                                                                                            Maths, English and Chemistry.
management and/or continued studies in terrestrial and aquatic ecology.                                       Year 2
                                                                                                                                                                                               Applicants will normally
Fieldwork is incorporated in several modules. Development of detailed skills                                  In Year 2 you will learn how to identify, collect and analyse biological
                                                                                                                                                                                               be invited for interview.
will depend on the choice of modules, but graduates can be expected to                                        trace evidence from a crime scene and acquire expertise in the use and
                                                                                                                                                                                               Duration
have expertise in various fields of biology, with an emphasis on applied                                       application of microscopy in a forensic investigation. The study of biological
                                                                                                                                                                                               BSc 3 years
aspects, biodiversity and its conservation and ecosystem and                                                  disciplines will be advanced by introducing subjects such as molecular           BSc Hons 4 years
environmental processes.                                                                                      genetics, biochemistry, pharmacology and microbiology. >                         BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years
NB: Optional sandwich placement available for students interested in gaining                                                                                                                   Contact
practical experience.                                                                                                                                                                          Dr Gail McGarvie
                                                                                                                                                                                               0800 027 1000
                                                                                                                                                                                               (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                                                                                                                               UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
156                                                                                                                                                                                      157

                                                                                Science
                                                                                Applied Bioscience
                                                                                with Immunology
Year 3                                                                                                                                                             UCAS
In Year 3 you will advance your knowledge of some key techniques used in                                                                                           C9C5 P BSc/ABWI
                                                                                Immunology has dramatically increased our
forensic investigation to study DNA and controlled substances. In the second                                                                                       Campus
                                                                                understanding of the mechanisms of many diseases,                                  Paisley
trimester, using the knowledge of crime scene management and analytical         including cancer, arthritis and asthma and how the
techniques, you will apply this to investigate a crime scene scenario.                                                                                             Entry
                                                                                immune system responds to infection by viruses,                                    See Applied Bioscience
You may have an element of choice in the aspect of Bioscience you               bacteria and parasites.                                                            page 152.
would like to focus on e.g. Microbiology, Immunology, DNA technology,
                                                                                The study of this specialised subject has provided the technology of vaccine       Duration
Biochemistry etc. Students will have the opportunity to undertake a                                                                                                BSc 3 years
10-week work placement in this year which will be extremely valuable for        design and delivery and the application of antibody-based immunoassays
                                                                                                                                                                   BSc Hons 4 years
future employment. The placement will normally be in a research, hospital       is present in many different fields, including forensic science, medical,           BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years
or company laboratory.                                                          pharmacological and biotechnological fields.                                        Contact
                                                                                        In this degree programme you will initially acquire a solid basis in the   Dr Richard Thacker
Year 4 (Honours)                                                                fundamental aspects of immunology, including cells, molecules and tissues
This year will include the study of forensic specialist subjects taking you                                                                                        0800 027 1000
                                                                                of the immune system. In addition, you will also gain laboratory experience        (44 141 848 7044 outwith
from the crime scene to the courtroom while gaining in-depth knowledge
                                                                                in the mechanisms, principles and applications of modern antibody-based            UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
of your chosen biological subjects and their applications. A critical part of
                                                                                immunoassays and biochemical and molecular biology techniques. You
the Year 4 curriculum is a supervised project which allows the student an
                                                                                will also gain advanced knowledge in clinical and medical immunology in
opportunity to participate in research in a subject area of his or her
                                                                                human health and disease, including host-pathogen interaction, tumour
own choosing.
                                                                                immunology and hypersensitivity diseases.
Career Prospects                                                                Career Prospects
As an Applied Bioscience graduate, you will be multiskilled and can look
                                                                                Graduates are likely to seek careers in academic, governmental research
forward to a comprehensive choice of career opportunities in areas such as
                                                                                institutes or industry that focus on biomedical research and development or
the healthcare, pharmaceutical, forensic science, food, drinks, biotechnology
                                                                                application of immunodiagnostic tools and clinical immunology.
and environmental management industries. Typical jobs can include hospital,
industrial or analytical research and the development, sales or marketing       NB: Optional sandwich placement available for students interested in gaining
of biological equipment and consumables. Alternatively, you may decide to       practical experience.
continue your studies by pursuing postgraduate opportunities in research,
teaching or other full-time courses. Please refer to our website for examples
of our graduate employment.
158                                                                                                                                                                                                                   159

Science                                                                                                      Science
Applied Bioscience                                                                                           Applied Bioscience
with Microbiology                                                                                            with Multimedia
Applied Bioscience with Microbiology is a popular                              UCAS                          Applied Bioscience with Multimedia provides                                        UCAS
option for those wishing to enter laboratory-based                             C9CM P BSc/ABWM               a unique opportunity to combine a degree                                           C9G4 P BSc/APWMM
employment, especially in the health sector, due                               Campus                        qualification in biology with skills relating to                                    Campus
to the provision of extensive practical training                               Paisley                       information technology and multimedia.                                             Paisley
opportunities at the University.                                               Entry                                                                                                            Entry
                                                                               See Applied Bioscience        The programme involves a mix of biology and communication modules                  See Applied Bioscience
Microbiologists carry out key roles in a wide variety of industrial and        page 152.                     that will provide key concepts and skills in biological science, together          page 152.
commercial contexts, as well as being central to the healthcare and medical    Duration                      with training in information technology. Media modules teach you how to            Duration
sectors, and to the food industry. Many of the critical issues we face today   BSc 3 years                   collect information (e.g. audio, video, textual) and process it for transmission   BSc 3 years
are concerned with the prevention and control of infection and, as such,       BSc Hons 4 years              through a range of media, including the worldwide web. An applied project          BSc Hons 4 years
microbiologists can find employment in diverse areas such as hospital           BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years   in the final year integrates the scientific and technical skills that you            BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years
laboratory work, food preparation, and waste management and in the             Contact                       have acquired.                                                                     Contact
                                                                               Dr Richard Thacker                                                                                               Dr Richard Thacker
biotechnology industry.                                                                                      Career Prospects
                                                                               0800 027 1000                                                                                                    0800 027 1000
Career Prospects                                                               (44 141 848 7044 outwith      Biology graduates often seek out IT training opportunities to enhance their        (44 141 848 7044 outwith
Past students from this area have gone into a variety of interesting and       UK) uni.direct@uws.ac.uk      employment prospects, but this programme incorporates that advantage.              UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
challenging careers. These include laboratory work at home and abroad on                                     Wide-ranging job opportunities include press officers, web developers,
the development of vaccines and a variety of other health and safety areas                                   communications specialists/managers; positions that may be found in
in the science laboratory, through to managerial positions.                                                  many large organisations as well as in smaller, media-based companies.
Former graduates have found employment with:                                                                 The degree is also an ideal preparation for undertaking a postgraduate
•      generalised and specialised laboratories such as the MRSA Unit                                        teaching qualification. Salaries and career opportunities can be extremely
       at Stobhill Hospital, the Health Protection Agency and Porton Down                                    favourable with this innovative combination of Applied Bioscience
•      food and drinks companies such as Rank Hovis MacDougall                                               and Multimedia.
       and Highland Spring
•      water companies such as Yorkshire Water
•      medical sales companies
•      primary and secondary schools
NB: Optional sandwich placement available for students interested in gaining
practical experience.
160                                                                                                                                                                                                                   161

Science                                                                                                        Science
                                                                                 Part-time option also                                                                                          Part-time option also
                                                                                 available, contact                                                                                             available, contact
                                                                                 University Direct tel                                                                                          University Direct tel

Applied Bioscience                                                               0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                 uni-direct@uws.ac.uk          Applied Bioscience                                                               0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                                                                                                                                uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


and Psychology                                                                                                 and/with Zoology
The degree in Applied Bioscience and Psychology                                  UCAS                          The Joint degree title offers students the opportunity                           UCAS
provides an opportunity to gain behavioural expertise                            CC98 P BSc/ABP                to study biology with a specialisation in the study                              Applied Bioscience
from both biological and psychological perspectives.                             Campus                        of animals. Specialist modules include the study                                 and Zoology –
                                                                                 Paisley                                                                                                        CC93 P BSc/ABZ
                                                                                                               of vertebrate physiology and evolution, animal
Particular emphasis is placed on perception, cognition and the means by          Entry                                                                                                          Applied Bioscience
                                                                                                               diversity, applied entomology, animal behaviour                                  with Zoology –
which we study behaviour. While the main focus is on human behaviour,            Higher BBC/BCCC
                                                                                                               and insect pest management.                                                      C9C3 P BSc/ABWZ
there are opportunities to work with animals. The programme includes in-         including a science subject
depth methods training, laboratory based workshops and practical classes,        and preferably English,       The programme has a strong practical component and students are                  Campus
experimental experience and studies in the social sciences. It offers broadly    plus S Grade English and      expected to further develop a variety of practical skills on marine and          Paisley
based study focusing on the increasing importance of human behaviour,            Mathematics. S Grade          terrestrial field trips and in an Honours year project.                           Entry
                                                                                 Chemistry preferred.                                                                                           As for Applied Bioscience,
the development of speech and thought, and the influence of sciences and                                        Career Prospects                                                                 page 152.
society on these processes. By combining studies in psychology and biology,      A-Level CD, preferably
                                                                                                               Students graduating with the Joint title would be well-versed in practical       Duration
students acquire an additional biological or biomedical perspective and an       including English and a
                                                                                 science subject, plus GCSE    problem-solving skills and possess a thorough knowledge of animal biology        BSc 3 years
insight into animal behaviour.                                                                                 which would provide opportunities in a wide range of careers from animal         BSc Hons 4 years
                                                                                 English, Mathematics and
Course Content                                                                   preferably Chemistry.         research through science teaching, and work with educational leisure             BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years
Years 1 & 2                                                                                                    centres, pest control organisations and zoos. Former graduates with a            Contact
                                                                                 Year 2 Contact Admissions                                                                                      Dr Richard Thacker
See entries for BSc Psychology (page 196) and BSc Applied Bioscience             Officer for details.
                                                                                                               similar qualification have taken up posts as an ornithological researcher
(page 152).                                                                                                    in Canada; coral reef reserve warden; and pet therapist. Biology graduates       0800 027 1000
                                                                                 A-level BCC, to include                                                                                        (44 141 848 7044 outwith
Year 3                                                                                                         from the University work for many of the major conservation organisations
                                                                                 Biology and English.                                                                                           UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
Students take modules in psychology research methods that support a research                                   in Scotland, at scientific and managerial levels, including Scottish Natural
                                                                                 Duration
project in this area. In addition, students take further specialist modules in                                 Heritage, British Trust for Ornithology, Scottish Wildlife Trust, and Scottish
                                                                                 BSc 3 years
Psychology and Applied Bioscience and free electives from a list of options.     BSc Hons 4 years
                                                                                                               Environment Protection Agency. Zoology may be taken as a Minor subject
                                                                                 BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years   to achieve an Applied Bioscience with Zoology qualification; contact
(Optional) Sandwich Placement                                                                                  Admissions Officer for more details.
                                                                                 Contact
For students interested in gaining practical experience an optional sandwich
                                                                                 Dr Richard Thacker
placement is available.                                                          0800 027 1000
Year 4 (Honours)                                                                 (44 141 848 7044 outwith
In Year 4 students undertake an in-depth dissertation on a specialised topic.    UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
They also study modules in Psychology and Applied Bioscience, and select
free elective options.
Career Prospects
Psychology is relevant to many aspects of everyday life and in particular, to
any activity in which people are important. Psychologists find employment
in a broad range of areas such as marketing, management, the media,
teaching, academic research and industry. As a graduate of Applied
Bioscience and Psychology you will also be well qualified to pursue a career
in research-based activities within the health and public services or to
continue your studies with a postgraduate course.
162                                                                                                                                                                                                                        163

Science DipHE                                                                                                     Science
                                                                                 Part-time option also                                                                                              Part-time option also
                                                                                 available, contact                                                                                                 available, contact
                                                                                 University Direct tel                                                                                              University Direct tel

Applied Bioscience with                                                          0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                 uni-direct@uws.ac.uk             CertHE Applied                                                                    0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                                                                                                                                    uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


Forensic Investigation                                                                                            Bioscience
Forensic Investigation is the application of scientific                           UCAS                             The aim of this course is to provide a sound platform                             UCAS
knowledge and techniques to solving crime.                                       C7FL H DipHE/ABFI                of biological knowledge and skills that will support                              C700 H CertHE/AB
                                                                                 Campus                           further studies in all areas of Applied Bioscience.                               Campus
In this course you will gain the underpinning knowledge and skills               Hamilton                                                                                                           Hamilton
                                                                                                                  Additionally, students will receive tuition in a number
in biological sciences and chemistry that are essential to forensic              Entry                                                                                                              Entry
                                                                                                                  of subjects to support their bio-knowledge base.
investigations. There will be opportunities to practise skills in scientific      Year 1 2 Highers at Grade C                                                                                        Higher 1 Higher at Grade C
techniques, analysis and presentation of results. Skills will be applied to      or above.                        The course has been designed to provide students with a broad-based               or above.
crime scene scenarios involving gathering evidence, scientific analysis of        Year 2 CertHE/HNC in a           introduction to a range of biological disciplines, such as biochemistry/          Other NC/NQ in a relevant
evidence and presentation of that evidence. Additionally, students will be       relevant discipline.             microbiology/physiology. Additionally, students will be introduced to other       discipline; for mature
introduced to underpinning disciplines and transferable skills, for example                                       underpinning disciplines and transferable skills e.g. chemistry, presentation     students (over 21),
                                                                                 A-level BCC, to include
chemistry, communication skills and ICT.                                         Biology and Chemistry.
                                                                                                                  skills, ICT, and scientific computation.                                           relevant experience.
Course Content                                                                   Please note: ideally             Course Content                                                                    Please note: ideally,
Year 1                                                                                                            The subjects on offer include chemistry, biochemistry, physiology, cell biology   candidates should also be
                                                                                 candidates should be able to
Year 1 will provide a broad-based introduction to a range of biological                                           and data handling. Also available will be a number of electives that students     able to demonstrate that
                                                                                 demonstrate that they have
subjects underpinned by key and transferable skills. You will be introduced                                       would select, with advice from their tutor, based on interests and future         they have achieved passes
                                                                                 achieved passes (at Grades
                                                                                                                                                                                                    (at Grades 1–3 in Standard
to the principles of crime scene investigation which will include crime scene    1–3 in Standard Grade or         career plans.
                                                                                                                                                                                                    Grade or Intermediate 2) in
methodology, gathering evidence and a range of techniques such as                Intermediate 2) in Chemistry.
                                                                                 Mathematics and English.
                                                                                                                  Progression                                                                       Chemistry, Mathematics and
fingerprinting and blood pattern analysis.                                                                         Successful completion allows application for entry to either the DipHE            English. Candidates lacking
                                                                                 Candidates lacking a pass
Year 2                                                                                                            or BSc programmes in Applied Bioscience (see page 152), Applied                   a pass in Chemistry can
                                                                                 in Chemistry can attend a
In Year 2 you will learn how to identify, collect and analyse biological                                          Bioscience with Forensic Investigation (see page 155) or Health and               attend a one-week summer
                                                                                 one week Summer School
                                                                                                                                                                                                    school in September and
trace evidence from a crime scene and acquire expertise in the use and           in September and additional      Lifestyle (see page 176).
                                                                                                                                                                                                    attend additional tutorials
application of microscopy in a forensic investigation. The study of biological   tutorials throughout the year.
                                                                                                                                                                                                    throughout the year.
disciplines will be advanced by introducing subjects such as molecular           Applicants will normally be
genetics, biochemistry, pharmacology and microbiology. Knowledge,                                                                                                                                   Applicants will normally be
                                                                                 invited for interview.
investigative and practical skills will be acquired in the areas of                                                                                                                                 invited for interview.
                                                                                 Duration
forensic science.                                                                                                                                                                                   Duration
                                                                                 DipHE 2 years
                                                                                                                                                                                                    CertHE 1 year
Career Prospects                                                                 Contact
                                                                                                                                                                                                    Contact
                                                                                 Dr Gail McGarvie
Graduates will be multi-skilled personnel and should be able to seek                                                                                                                                Jane Tobias
                                                                                 0800 027 1000
employment in a variety of areas within the forensic science service             (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                                                                                                                                    0800 027 1000
as well as in the pharmaceutical and biotechnology industries and in                                                                                                                                (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                 UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
public organisations such as the police, customs and excise, consumer/                                                                                                                              UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
environmental protection.
Progression
Students who successfully complete the DipHE will be able to apply to the
third year of the BSc/BSc (Hons) programmes in Applied Bioscience (see
page 152) or Applied Bioscience with Forensic Investigation (see page 155).
164                                                                                                                                                                                                                  165

Science Biomedical
                                                                                 Part-time option also
                                                                                 available, contact
                                                                                 University Direct tel

Science/Applied                                                                  0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                 uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


Biomedical Science
Two of our most popular titles in recent years,                                  UCAS                          Course Content                                                                 Contact
the Biomedical Science and Applied Biomedical                                    Biomedical Science –          Year 1                                                                         Dr Richard Thacker
Science pathways enable students to study aspects                                B940 P BSc/BiomS              The topics covered in Year 1 will include biology and also chemistry, which    0800 027 1000
                                                                                 Applied Biomedical                                                                                           (44 141 848 7044
of core biological topics as they relate to human                                                              provides the background necessary for the study of the range of options in
                                                                                 Science –                                                                                                    outwith the UK)
health and disease. The programmes integrate the                                 C910 P BSc/ABS
                                                                                                               later years, plus 2 electives.                                                 uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
study of biochemistry, cell biology, immunology,                                 Campus                        Year 2
microbiology and physiology. This approach enables                               Paisley                       The range of topics offered in Biomedical Science in Year 2 covers aspects
students to gain insight into the normal functioning                             Entry                         of cell biology, biochemistry, immunology, microbiology, human biology,
of the human body, and also forms the basis for the                              Higher BCC including two      vertebrate physiology and evolution, and genetics. This year aims to provide
study of abnormal function in disease.                                           science based subjects,       a broad general coverage of these key disciplines, so that more detailed
                                                                                 preferably Biology and        study in Year 3 can be based on a sound grasp of the fundamental principles
The aim of the two courses is to focus on the scientific and biological
                                                                                 Chemistry, plus English,
aspects of the key topics, whilst ensuring that the medical context is a                                       of each subject. At the end of Year 2, students intending to pursue the
                                                                                 Mathematics and Chemistry
central theme. Both degrees are ideal pathways for those who wish to work        at least @ S Grade. Higher
                                                                                                               Applied Biomedical Science degree undergo selection, including review of
in the hospital and healthcare sectors as biomedical scientists. However,        Chemistry and S Grade         academic progress, health and SCRO checks to ascertain their suitability.
our graduates are also well suited to other careers in research, medical         Biology would be preferred.   Year 3
technology, pharmaceuticals and biotechnology, and many of our graduates         A-Level CD, plus GCSE         The study of the central biomedical topics includes extended treatment of
find employment in areas other than laboratory diagnostic work.                   English and Mathematics.      biochemistry, immunology, microbiology, molecular biology and human
       There are two-degree programmes open to the student wishing to            GCSE Biology and Chemistry    physiology, and the introduction of more specialist disciplines such as
study this discipline at the University. The ‘Biomedical Science’ programme      also required, although       pathophysiology and haematology. In the Applied Biomedical Science
is a conventional four-year (five years with sandwich placement) programme;       one preferred @ A-Level.      programme, this year includes the integrated work placement element of
the ‘Applied Biomedical Science’ programme includes an integrated (one           Applicants with three         at least 15 weeks duration in an accredited hospital training laboratory.
trimester) work placement element. At the end of the Applied Biomedical          relevant A-Level passes
Science programme, students will have completed both the education and           may be considered for         (Optional) Sandwich Placement
training elements required of a practising Biomedical Scientist by the Health    Year 2 entry.                 For Biomedical Science students there is the opportunity to gain practical
Professions Council (HPC) and will thus be eligible for registration with        Year 2 HNC in a related       experience through an optional 12-month sandwich placement in industry.
the HPC, this greatly improving their career prospects. At the end of the        subject. BCC @ A level        Year 4 (Honours)
Biomedical Science programme, students will have completed the education         to include Biology and        In the Honours Year students undertake a research project and study more
element required by the HPC, but will still need to undertake the training       Chemistry.
                                                                                                               specialist aspects of biomedical science at a higher level. Haematology,
component – this is usually achieved by undergoing a period (typically           Year 3 HND in a related       immunology and microbiology are studied. The aim of the Honours year is to
12–18 months) of laboratory training in an accredited laboratory to gain         subject for entry to the      enable students to place further emphasis on how the central disciplines in
an Institute of Biomedical Science (IBMS) Certificate of Competence.              Biomedical Science degree.    biological science contribute to our overall understanding of human health
                                                                                 Duration                      and disease, and to develop students’ personal skills in the analysis and
Student bursaries                                                                BSc Hons 4 years
Students on the Applied Biomedical Science programme who meet certain                                          evaluation of information. >
                                                                                 BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years
conditions will be eligible for a bursary (£2000) for two years (Years 3 & 4).
This does not apply to students on the Biomedical Science programme.
166                                                                                                                                                                                       167

                                                                                Science
                                                                                                                                                                     Part-time option also
                                                                                                                                                                     available, contact
                                                                                                                                                                     University Direct tel

                                                                                Earth Science                                                                        0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                                                                                                     uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


                                                                                (minor option stream)
Career Prospects                                                                Earth Science is the study of our home planet,                                       UCAS
The professionally accredited status of the University’s degrees in the         including the oceans, atmosphere, soils, rocks,                                      Applied Bioscience
biomedical science discipline enables graduates to stand out in short-listing   rivers and landscapes. Earth scientists play a key                                   with Earth Science –
                                                                                                                                                                     C9F6 P BSc/ABWES
for positions in the sector. The Applied Biomedical Science programme           role in ensuring what we take from the earth is
                                                                                                                                                                     Chemistry with
offers a fast-track route to becoming a professional Biomedical Scientist.      properly managed.                                                                    Earth Science –
Professional accreditation means that graduate employment prospects,                                                                                                 F1F6 P BSc/ChemES
                                                                                Earth Science is available as a minor degree component in combination
short and medium term, in the hospital laboratory service are extremely                                                                                              Physics with
                                                                                with Applied Bioscience, Chemistry or Physics. The skills learned in the
good. As a graduate of Biomedical Science, you will be qualified for a                                                                                                Earth Science –
                                                                                Earth Science minor option stream will broaden your scientific base and
career in the pharmaceutical or healthcare industries, clinical research or                                                                                          F3F6 P BSc/PhyES
                                                                                add significant value to your degree programme, especially if you have an
in the haematology, biochemistry or pathology departments of a hospital                                                                                              Campus
                                                                                interest in environmental issues, or have an ambition to enter the resource
laboratory. Recent graduates have gained employment in a variety of                                                                                                  Paisley
                                                                                industries (e.g. water supply, oil, metals, building materials), the construction
associated fields throughout the UK.                                                                                                                                  Entry
                                                                                industry or materials technology.                                                    See the relevant major
       Their diverse roles include working as biomedical scientists, and as
sales and marketing personnel with leading drug companies.                      Course Content                                                                       degree subject for details
                                                                                In Year 1 you will be introduced to the Earth as a planetary body and look at        on pages 152, 168 and 190.
Professional Exemptions                                                                                                                                              A pass in Higher Geography
                                                                                the basic processes that shape the Earth’s environments – processes that
The BSc Honours Biomedical Science is accredited by the Institute of                                                                                                 is recommended, but is not
                                                                                build mountains, trigger earthquakes, drive weather systems and support life.
Biomedical Science. The BSc Honours Applied Biomedical Science is                                                                                                    essential for entry.
                                                                                There are opportunities for fieldwork in the Highlands and Islands of Scotland.
approved by the Health Professions Council.                                                                                                                          Contact
                                                                                        In Year 2 you will be introduced to surveying methods and map-
                                                                                                                                                                     Simon Cuthbert
                                                                                making, including global positioning systems (GPS). You will investigate the         0800 027 1000
                                                                                microscopic world of crystals and minerals through microscopy and modern             (44 141 848 7044
                                                                                analytical techniques, and so develop an understanding of the materials that         outwith the UK)
                                                                                make the planet.                                                                     uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
                                                                                        In Year 3 you will develop field and laboratory skills for investigation
                                                                                of the Earth below the surface through geological mapping, geophysical
                                                                                sounding, data from boreholes and computer visualisation techniques.
                                                                                Fieldwork will form a major mode of study in this year.
                                                                                        In the Honours year you will extend previous work on Earth materials
                                                                                and the sub surface and apply it to practical situations such as civil engineering
                                                                                and environmental impact assessment. You will explore issues of global
                                                                                environmental change, as a result of both natural processes and human
                                                                                activity, and approaches to environmental decision-making and management.
                                                                                Career Prospects
                                                                                Employment opportunities include environmental protection in
                                                                                government or industry; in resource extraction in the water, oil or mining
                                                                                industries; in the construction industry as a ground engineer; or in
                                                                                environmental education.
168                                                                                                                                                                                                            169

Science
                                                                                 Part-time option also                                                                                        Related course(s):
                                                                                 available, contact                                                                                           Medicinal Chemistry,
                                                                                 University Direct tel                                                                                        see page 182.

Chemistry                                                                        0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                 uni-direct@uws.ac.uk




Our Chemistry degree is designed to provide you                                  UCAS                            Year 2
with a sound, fundamental knowledge of the subject                               F100 P BSc/Chem                 The areas of organic, inorganic analytical and physical chemistry are
and the practical skills to operate successfully in                              Campus                          studied in greater depth and practical skills are development in all four
areas such as drug research, environmental analysis                              Paisley                         areas. In addition, topics in chemical and pharmaceutical processes and
and forensic science.                                                            Entry                           an introduction to pharmaceutical science may be studied.
                                                                                 Higher BCC including two
Chemistry degrees at UWS are recognised by employers as having a strong          science-based subjects,         Year 3
analytical and applications focus, which are a good preparation for work in      along with passes in English,   In Year 3 the main areas of analytical, inorganic, organic and physical
many industries. Throughout your studies, you will be encouraged to develop      Mathematics and Chemistry       chemistry are studied to a more advanced level. Additional topics
professional skills through practical and project work, problem-solving skills   at least @ S Grade. Higher      covered include enzymes and pharmaceutical production and safety and
                                                                                 Chemistry preferred.            environmental chemistry. At the end of Year 3 you have the opportunity to
with the aid of computer technology, plus the analytical and communication
skills which are expected of the modern scientist. The broad-based structure     A-Level CD, preferably          graduate with a BSc Chemistry degree.
of the course offers you a range of options to suit your desired career.         including Chemistry. English,
                                                                                                                 (Optional) Sandwich Placement
This can involve selecting optional topics such as Forensic Science or           Mathematics and Chemistry
                                                                                 @ GCSE. Applicants with
                                                                                                                 The Honours sandwich programme offers you the benefit of a year’s paid
Pharmaceutical Science or by choosing an Honours year research project                                           work experience between Years 3 and 4 within an environment relevant to
                                                                                 three relevant A-Level
in an area such as nano-technology or environmental science.                                                     your specialism and area of interest.
                                                                                 passes, to include Chemistry
        It is also possible to develop an interest by finding a work placement    and another science, may be
in a particular industry. Although the programme has a strong academic                                           Year 4 (Honours)
                                                                                 considered for Year 2 entry.
content, it also provides you with opportunities for direct, hands-on                                            The main branches of chemistry are studied in greater depth alongside
                                                                                 Year 2 HNC in a                 a broad range of advanced topics such as spectroscopy, photochemistry,
experience with modern chemical instruments particularly in the areas of
                                                                                 related subject.                advanced analytical techniques and advanced synthesis of organic
analytical chemistry and in health-related fields. In addition, much of the
teaching, especially in later years, is carried out in relatively small groups   Year 3 HND in a                 molecules. In addition, you will undertake an individual research project,
giving you ample opportunity to explore the subjects in greater depth.           related subject.                usually on a topic of your choice. Recent projects have investigated ionic
It is these aspects of the programme that give you an advantage when             Duration                        liquids, drug delivery systems, forensic drug analysis and photodynamic
seeking employment.                                                              BSc 3 years                     therapy plus many other topics.
                                                                                 BSc Hons 4 years
Course Content                                                                   BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years
                                                                                                                 Chemistry with options
Year 1                                                                           Contact
                                                                                                                 Within our flexible degree structure you can combine your study of
You are introduced to the fundamental concepts through studying general          Dr Richard Thacker              chemistry with a range of other options such as Mathematics, Multimedia,
aspects of chemistry along with organic, inorganic and physical chemistry.       0800 027 1000                   Management, Earth Science, Psychology and Languages. This would give a
Laboratory sessions develop practical and communication skills enabling          (44 141 848 7044                combined degree title, such as ‘Chemistry with Management’. >
you to apply fundamental concepts to the solution of chemical problems.          outwith the UK)
                                                                                 uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
You also take two other science subjects. Transferable skills such as
computing, word-processing, presentation skills and personal development
are fully integrated into the course.
170                                                                                                                                                                                     171

                                                                               Science
                                                                                                                                                               Part-time option also
                                                                                                                                                               available, contact
                                                                                                                                                               University Direct tel

                                                                               Environmental                                                                   0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                                                                                               uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


                                                                               Biology
Career Prospects                                                               Environmental Biology is an important discipline                                UCAS
As a graduate of Chemistry, you will have developed a range of flexible         that applies biological knowledge and techniques                                C150 P BSc/EnvBio
skills which will be suitable for a career in chemical research, industry,     to the study of the environment in a broad context.                             Campus
commerce, technical sales, management or teaching. Recent graduates have       Aspects include the monitoring and control of                                   Paisley
gained employment with a variety of major companies, organisations and         pollution, studying the interactions of plants and                              Entry
                                                                                                                                                               Entry is restricted to years
institutions in the UK and abroad. Some examples of job roles include a        animals, and assessing the impact of man on
                                                                                                                                                               3 and 4 of the course.
process chemist at Beecham, laboratory supervisor at BNFL Sellafield, and       the environment.
a medicinal chemist with Scottish Biomedical. Chemistry graduates are also                                                                                     Year 3 DipHE/HND in
                                                                               In Years 3 and 4, you will be able to select modules relating to organismal     a related discipline.
sought by non-scientific employers such as stockbrokers because of their
                                                                               interactions, biological conservation, applied aquatic ecology, environmental
numeracy and problem-solving skills.                                                                                                                           Year 4 BSc (ord) in
                                                                               adaptation, entomology, parasitology, environmental and behavioural             a related discipline.
Professional Exemptions                                                        ecology. These modules incorporate a substantial element of practical work.
The BSc Chemistry and BSc (Honours) Chemistry are recognised by the Royal             Fieldwork includes day trips to a variety of habitats (e.g. mountains,   Please note: Ideally
Society of Chemistry as fulfilling the academic requirements for admission to                                                                                   candidates should also be
                                                                               sand dunes, salt marshes), places of interest (research institutes, botanic
                                                                                                                                                               able to demonstrate that
Associate Membership (AMRSC).                                                  gardens) and also a marine field course. In their Honours Year, students
                                                                                                                                                               they have achieved passes
Part-time day release option                                                   undertake a research project on an environmental topic. Graduates are           (at Grade 1–3 in Standard
The University operates a successful part-time route for degree study          qualified to work in a wide variety of careers in environmental assessment       Grade or Intermediate 2)
designed for Chemists in employment. The course allows students with           and management, pollution control and monitoring, and work with national        in Maths, English and
an appropriate HND qualification in Chemistry (or equivalent) to continue       bodies such as RSPB or Scottish Natural Heritage.                               Chemistry.
part-time study to degree and Honours degree levels. The course runs on a                                                                                      Applicants will normally be
day-release basis, requiring two years to achieve a BSc and a further two                                                                                      invited for interview.
years for an Honours award. For more information on part-time day release                                                                                      Duration
options in Chemistry contact Dr Jorge Chacon on 0141 848 3237.                                                                                                 BSc 1 year
                                                                                                                                                               BSc Hons 2 years
                                                                                                                                                               BSc Hons (Sandwich) 3 years
                                                                                                                                                               Contact
                                                                                                                                                               Dr Richard Thacker
                                                                                                                                                               0800 027 1000
                                                                                                                                                               (44 141 848 7044
                                                                                                                                                               outwith UK)
                                                                                                                                                               uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
172                                                                                                                                                                                               173

Science
                                                                                  Part-time option also
                                                                                  available, contact
                                                                                  University Direct tel

Forensic Science                                                                  0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                  uni-direct@uws.ac.uk




Forensic science is the application of science in                                 UCAS                            Course Content
support of the legal process. Forensic scientists                                 F410 P BSc/FS                   Year 1
aim to gather evidence and analyse it for use in a                                Campus                          Biology and chemistry are studied as part of the first year to provide
court of law in a way that is impartial, expert and                               Paisley                         a grounding in these underpinning sciences. You will also undertake
based on solid scientific facts. The great strides                                 Entry                           complementary laboratory work to develop your practical skills in these
                                                                                  Higher BCC including two
made in analytical chemistry and genetics in recent                                                               areas. Two forensic science modules are taught which cover fingerprinting
                                                                                  science-based subjects,
years have greatly increased the power of forensic                                along with passes in English,
                                                                                                                  techniques, alcohol and drug analysis with reviews of relevant contentious
science, and made the scientist central to the                                    Mathematics and Chemistry       cases. Transferable skills such as computing, word processing, presentation
solving of many criminal cases. The scope of what                                 at least @ S Grade. Higher      skills and personal development are fully integrated into the course.
can be achieved by forensic scientists is constantly                              Chemistry preferred.            Year 2
growing with techniques such as DNA profiling being                                A-Level CD, preferably          Biological sciences and chemistry knowledge is further advanced through
introduced and developed.                                                         including Chemistry. English,   the study of classical genetics, molecular genetics, organic and analytical
This course provides you with the underpinning knowledge and skills in the        Mathematics and Chemistry       science. Forensic science content is developed through topics covering
chemical and biological sciences that are most important in forensic science.     @ GCSE. Applicants with         crime scene investigation, law of evidence, drugs, explosives and
                                                                                  three relevant A-Level passes   forensic probability.
Areas such as Scots law, crime scene investigation, statistics and probability
                                                                                  to include Chemistry and
are studied to set the context in which forensic scientists must work.            Biology may be considered       Year 3
Laboratory work plays a central role in this course allowing you to develop       for Year 2 entry.               The forensic science theme is further developed through a number of
as practical scientists capable of examining evidence, extracting information     Duration                        specialist modules. In support of these studies you are given extensive
and presenting their findings. A variety of other teaching methods is              BSc 3 years                     hands-on experience of instrumental techniques used routinely in forensic
employed during the course including site visits, guest lectures, workshops,      BSc Hons 4 years                science investigations, such as microscopy of trace evidence, gas and liquid
role-play and presentations.                                                      BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years     chromatography of drugs, explosives and illicit substances and atomic
       The University has many well-equipped laboratories for the                 Contact                         spectroscopy of toxic metals.
teaching of forensic science. For example, our students have access to Gas        Dr Frank Smith
Chromatography-Mass Spectroscopy, ICP Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy,             0800 027 1000                   (Optional) Sandwich Placement
Infra Red Spectroscopy, Gel Electrophoresis and Scanning Electron                 (44 141 848 7044 outwith        For students interested in gaining practical experience, the Sandwich degree
Microscopy with X-ray microanalysis. Currently this equipment is used             UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk        award offers the benefit of a paid placement period in industry.
for research, teaching and investigative work for industry, for example we                                        Year 4 (Honours)
are using environmental forensic techniques in the developing world to                                            In Year 4 you will undertake the study of a number of forensic specialist
protect food supplies and chiral chromatography to investigate and profile                                         modules and deepen your understanding of analytical sciences, toxicology,
clandestine drug sources. The Crime Scene Laboratory gives undergraduate                                          criminalistics and physical evidence. In addition, an individual project in
students the opportunity to investigate typical crime scene scenarios in                                          a related area is undertaken over two trimesters. Recent projects have
a realistic manner. Flexibility is built into the structure of this course with                                   involved the investigation of accelerants in arson cases and chiral profiling
students having the option of pursuing other degree titles in biology and                                         of designer drugs. The skills gained by forensic graduates will make them
chemistry, before choosing to specialise in Years 2 or 3.                                                         attractive not only to the forensic science sector but also to many employers
                                                                                                                  in the biotechnology, chemical and pharmaceutical industries. >
174                                                                                                                                                                                     175

                                                                                Science
                                                                                Science

Career Prospects                                                                The Science degree is an interdisciplinary                                       UCAS
The skills and knowledge of a forensic scientist will find application in a      programme, offering applicants an alternative                                    CFG0 P BSc/GS
very wide range of areas. Organisations such as the police and customs          to a Single subject degree. A variety of interesting                             Campus
and excise are the obvious employers, however the techniques studied            subject combinations is available enabling you to                                Paisley
in this course may also be applied to environmental protection, accident        gain a wide range of scientific skills and a breadth                              Entry
                                                                                                                                                                 Applications from mature
investigation, drug research, the chemical industry and biomedical sciences.    of experience that will be of value in your
                                                                                                                                                                 students and those with non-
Many chemical and biological science graduates currently find work in            future career.                                                                   standard entry requirements
analytical laboratories. Forensic science graduates will also be sought-after                                                                                    are welcome. For advice and
                                                                                The overall programme for each student is subject to discussion with,
in these areas.                                                                                                                                                  more information contact the
                                                                                and approval of, University staff in order to ensure that your interests are
Professional Recognition                                                                                                                                         Admissions Officer.
                                                                                coherently addressed. Progression onto this course is also possible for direct
The BSc (Hons) Forensic Science course is recognised by the Royal Society of                                                                                     Duration
                                                                                entrants from colleges and for students studying other science programmes
Chemistry as fulfilling the academic requirements for admission to Associate                                                                                      BSc 3 years
                                                                                at the University who do not wish to specialise.
                                                                                                                                                                 BSc Hons 4 years
Membership (AMRSC).
                                                                                Flexibility                                                                      Contact
                                                                                A wide range of science subjects is available for students in Year 1, allowing   Dr Richard Thacker
                                                                                you to study new subjects or to further your studies in the science subjects     0800 027 1000
                                                                                you found interesting at school or college. In Year 1 students usually           (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                select three subjects from Applied Bioscience, Chemistry, Forensic Science,      UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
                                                                                Mathematics, Physics and Psychology. The interlinked structure of the
                                                                                University’s Science degree allows you to determine your route through
                                                                                your studies, in line with your career interests and aspirations.


                                                                                CertHE Science                                                                   UCAS
                                                                                A one-year course in Science, which leads to the                                 FJ00 P CerHE/Sci
                                                                                award of Certificate of Higher Education in Science                               Campus
                                                                                (CertHE), is offered at the University.                                          Paisley
                                                                                                                                                                 Duration
                                                                                This qualification is suitable for students who have non-standard entry           CertHE 1 year full-time;
                                                                                requirements (e.g. one or two science highers and/or relevant work               variable duration part-time
                                                                                experience) or who only wish to study two of the main science subjects           Contact
                                                                                offered. A good performance can lead to admission to Year 2 of an                University Direct
                                                                                appropriate degree within Science. Full-time applications to this course         0800 027 1000
                                                                                should be made through UCAS.                                                     (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                                                                                                 UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
176                                                                                                                                                                                                                         177

Science                                                                                                          Science
                                                                                  Part-time option also
                                                                                  available, contact
                                                                                  University Direct tel

Health and Lifestyle                                                              0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                  uni-direct@uws.ac.uk           DipHE Health and Lifestyle

This course reflects the national awareness of                                     UCAS                           This course reflects the national awareness of                                     UCAS
contemporary health issues, health development                                    B901 H BSc/HL                  contemporary health issues, health development                                    B902 H DipHE/HL
and public health.                                                                Campus                         and public health.                                                                Campus
                                                                                  Hamilton                                                                                                         Hamilton
Lifestyle issues such as nutrition, stress management and physical activity       Entry                          Lifestyle issues such as nutrition, stress management and physical activity       Entry
are linked to disease prevention. Recent government initiatives including         Year 1 3 Highers at Grade      are linked to disease prevention. Government initiatives including those          Year 1 2 Highers at Grade
those outlined in ‘Delivering for Health’ (2005) have underlined a need for       C or above; for mature         outlined in “Delivering for Health” (2005) have underlined a need for the         C or above; for mature
the promotion of health through education and support in the community.           applicants (over 21),          promotion of health through education and support in the community.               students (over 21),
It is envisaged that, in future, the role of ‘project officers’ and ‘motivators’   relevant experience.           It is envisaged that, in future, the role of ‘project officers’ and ‘motivators’   relevant experience.
in local health related projects and community-based health trainers will         Ideally, candidates should     in local health-related projects and community-based health trainers will         Year 2 CertHE/HNC in
be the key to providing the support.                                              also have achieved passes      be the key to providing the support. The course affords study across a            a relevant discipline.
                                                                                  (at Grades 1-3 Standard        wide breadth of subjects to provide students with sufficient background
Course Content                                                                    Grade or Intermediate 2)
                                                                                                                                                                                                   A-level BCC, to include
Year 1                                                                                                           knowledge for employment in areas associated with health training or              Biology and Chemistry.
                                                                                  in Maths, English and          further study in the field of health sciences or health training.
Year 1 of the course will provide students with a broad based introduction        Chemistry.                                                                                                       Please note: ideally,
to a range of biological subject areas as well as providing an introduction                                      Course Content                                                                    candidates should also be
                                                                                  A-Level DD including
to health-related issues.                                                                                        Year 1                                                                            able to demonstrate that
                                                                                  a science subject.
                                                                                                                 Year 1 of the course will provide students with a broad-based introduction        they have achieved passes
Year 2                                                                            Year 2 CertHE/HNC in                                                                                             (Standard Grades 1–3 or
Year 2 provides opportunities to study more in-depth health-related topics.                                      to a range of biological, chemical and environmental subject areas as well
                                                                                  a relevant discipline.         as providing an introduction to health-related issues.                            Intermediate 2) in Chemistry,
Areas of study will include those associated with human physiology,                                                                                                                                Mathematics and English.
                                                                                  A-level BCC, to include
nutrition, exercise physiology and lifestyle issues (including behavioural                                       Year 2                                                                            Candidates lacking a pass
                                                                                  Biology and Chemistry.
factors). Specific topics will include: key trends in the UK diet; diet-related                                   Year 2 of the course provides opportunities to study more in-depth health-        in Chemistry or Biology
disease; weight management approaches; food sources, policies and other           Year 3 DipHE/HND Health        related topics. Areas of study will include those associated with human           can attend short summer
implications; physical activity and behaviour; supporting lifestyle changes;      and Lifestyle or equivalent    physiology, nutrition, exercise physiology and lifestyle issues (including        schools in September and
                                                                                  qualification.                                                                                                    attend additional tutorials
physiological stress factors; and life expectancy and quality issues.                                            behavioural factors). Specific topics will include: key trends in UK diet; diet
                                                                                  NB: Applicants will normally   related disease; weight management approaches; food sources, policies             throughout the year.
Year 3                                                                            be invited for interview.
Year 3 will focus on issues associated with health policies and practice:                                        and other implications; physical activity and behaviour; supporting lifestyle     Applicants will normally be
                                                                                  Candidates may be required     changes; physiological stress factors; and life expectancy and quality issues.    invited for interview.
human health and adaptation; anthropometric monitoring; working with              to undergo Disclosure
other people; life coaching and stress management; research methods;                                             Progression                                                                       Candidates may be required
                                                                                  Scotland procedures.
disease and disease processes; social aspects of health and medicine.                                            Students who successfully complete this programme may be able to further          to undergo Disclosure
                                                                                  Duration                                                                                                         Scotland procedures.
Career Prospects                                                                                                 their study to Year 3 of the BSc Health and Lifestyle (see page 176).
                                                                                  BSc 3 years                                                                                                      Duration
The course offers study across a wide breadth of subjects to provide              Contact                                                                                                          DipHE 2 years
students with sufficient background knowledge for employment in areas              Dr Janette Bulloch                                                                                               Contact
associated with health training or further study in the field of health            0800 027 1000                                                                                                    Dr Janette Bulloch
sciences or health training.                                                      (44 141 848 7044 outwith                                                                                         0800 027 1000
                                                                                  UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk                                                                                         (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                                                                                                                                   UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
178                                                                                                                                                                                                179

Science
                                                                                   Part-time option also
                                                                                   available, contact
                                                                                   University Direct tel

Health Science                                                                     0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                   uni-direct@uws.ac.uk




BSc Health Science is a specialised degree aimed                                   UCAS                            Year 4 (Honours)
at those who wish to pursue a career in the health                                 B900 P BSc/HS                   You will continue to study health-related chemistry and applied bioscience
sector while not being directly involved in clinical                               Campus                          as well as studies in health promotion. In addition, a research project forms
or laboratory work.                                                                Paisley                         a major part of the final year of study. One optional module may be taken
                                                                                   Entry                           but it is recommended that students choose a health and safety topic.
This innovative degree complements the range of degrees in the area of             Higher BCC including 2
health already available at the University. The practical element of the           science-based subjects,         Career Prospects
course involves topics such as biochemical and chemical analysis, analysis         along with passes in English,   Graduates of the Health Science degree would be well-suited for
of foodstuffs, and practical organic chemistry including synthesis of drugs in     Mathematics and Chemistry       employment in areas such as health promotion; education and journalism;
everyday use.                                                                      at least @ S Grade. Higher      management in a caring situation; health and safety; sales and marketing
                                                                                   Chemistry preferred.            of medical and surgical products; and welfare of employees in large
       You will cover core modules to provide skills in areas directly
related to the chemical and biological aspects of health science, as well as       A-Level CD, preferably          organisations. Health is also an increasing priority for the food industry
recommended options for study from relevant areas of applied bioscience            including Chemistry, English,   where there has been tremendous growth in organic foods and in food
and chemistry. It is anticipated that, in future, it will be possible for you to   Mathematics and Chemistry       products designed to improve health, for example by reducing cholesterol.
undertake a paid placement year as part of the degree, between Years 3 and         @ GCSE. Applicants with         In addition graduates with Higher English may be admitted to a
                                                                                   3 relevant A-Level passes       postgraduate study in Education (Primary) or Secondary for those graduates
4, in a relevant area such as the healthcare industry or a health authority to
                                                                                   to include Biology and
gain practical experience and added insight into the Health Science sector.                                        with an Honours Degree. Other postgraduate education open to students
                                                                                   Chemistry may be considered
                                                                                                                   would for example include the Masters qualification in alcohol and drug
Course Content                                                                     for Year 2 entry.
                                                                                                                   studies available at the University.
The course covers a wide range of scientific topics, all of which are directly      Year 1 Relevant NC (such as
related to the study of Health Science, such as human biology, physiology,         Biology or Chemistry) and/or
nutrition, medicinal and chemical pathology.                                       relevant experience also
                                                                                   considered for entry.
Year 1
You will receive a grounding in applied bioscence and chemistry, including         Year 2 HNC Health Care,
current issues in health, as well as numeracy for those students not having        Science or related subject.
Higher Mathematics. Students with Higher Mathematics may take one                  Contact Admissions Officer
additional module of their choice although a science-based topic would             for further details.
be recommended.                                                                    Duration
                                                                                   BSc 3 years
Year 2                                                                             BSc Hons 4 years
You will continue to study essential applied bioscience and chemistry              Contact
modules relevant to health and will take one topic of your choice although         Dr Richard Thacker
a science-based module is highly recommended.                                      0800 027 1000
Year 3                                                                             (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                   UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
You will continue your studies of applied bioscience and chemistry relevant
to health, and will take one topic of your choice although, again, a science-
based module is recommended.
180                                                                                                                                                                                                                            181

Science
                                                                                                                                                                                                          Related course(s):
                                                                                                                                                                                                          Mathematical and
                                                                                                                                                                                                          Professional Education

Mathematical Sciences                                                                                                                                                                                     see page 110.



(joint option stream)
Many problems in industry, business, engineering                                 UCAS                          Year 3                                                                                     Contact
and science are solved by using mathematical                                     Mathematical Sciences         A broad spectrum of modules is taken covering differential equations,                      Dr Richard Thacker
techniques. As a result there is a large demand                                  and Physics –                 financial mathematics, statistics and operational research. This gives                      0800 027 1000
                                                                                 GF1H BSc/MSPh                                                                                                            (44 141 848 7044 outwith
among employers for graduates who have excellent                                                               a balanced range of knowledge and experience of the applicability of
                                                                                 Mathematical Sciences                                                                                                    UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
numeracy and problem-solving skills. Mathematical                                and Psychology –
                                                                                                               Mathematics in industrial and business contexts. Emphasis is placed
approaches to problem-solving are foundational                                   GC18 BSc/MSPsy3               on practical work requiring the use of IT and communication skills.
to business and industry in today’s technologically-                             Chemistry and                 Students also continue with modules in their second subject.
based society. At the UWS you can study                                          Mathematical Sciences –       Year 4 (Honours)
Mathematical Sciences jointly with a range                                       FG11 BSc/CMS                  The Honours year includes modules in applied mathematics, statistics and
of other subjects including Physics, Chemistry,                                  Computing and
                                                                                                               operational research, together with a substantial individual supervised
Psychology and Computing.                                                        Mathematical Sciences –
                                                                                                               project. Students also continue with modules in their second subject.
                                                                                 GG41 BSc/CMS3
The Mathematical Sciences course is designed to offer a wide choice of           Mathematical Sciences –       The project is an extended piece of individual work, allowing considerable
career opportunities that reflect your interests and aspirations. It covers a     G150 BSc/MS                   scope to explore an area of interest and to develop oral and written
variety of mathematical topics, including calculus, linear algebra, statistics   (entry to Year 4 only)*       communication skills. This allows the student to direct his/her studies
and operational research. You can select a range of optional modules to          Campus                        towards a particular mathematical area, reflecting personal preferences
complement your mathematical studies, depending on your choice of second         Paisley                       and employment aspirations.
subject alongside Mathematical Sciences.                                         Entry
                                                                                                               Career Prospects
       As well as developing broad-based and specialist mathematical skills,     Higher BBC including
                                                                                                               Your career options will include computing and software services, business
you will be encouraged to gain practical skills, hands-on experience of          Mathematics plus English
                                                                                 at least @ S Grade.           and finance, accountancy, statistics, industry and teaching. Graduates have
mathematical and IT software as well as general communication skills.                                          gained employment in a variety of leading companies and organisations
                                                                                 A-Level CD including          such as BAE Systems, GCHQ, General Accident, Royal Bank of Scotland,
Course Content                                                                   Mathematics plus English
Year 1                                                                                                         Shell and Rolls Royce.
                                                                                 at least @ GCSE. Applicants
The Mathematical Sciences course introduces and develops fundamental             with three relevant A-Level   Professional Exemptions
concepts such as functions, sequences, combinatorics, logic, calculus and        passes may be considered      Graduates will be eligible for membership of the Institute of Mathematics
algebra. Tutorial and computer laboratory work enable students to develop        for Year 2 entry.             and its Applications. Depending on subject choice, membership of the
the practical skills required to apply Mathematics to real-world problems.       Year 2 HNC in a               Operational Research Society or the Royal Statistical Society may
Students also take modules in their second subject, as well as other options.    related subject.              be possible.
Year 2                                                                           Year 3 HND in a               *For details on Year 4 entry to Mathematical Sciences, please contact University Direct,
The algebra and calculus of Year 1 are continued together with a range of        related subject.              tel 0800 027 1000 (44 141 848 7044 outwith UK) or e-mail uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
modern applications of Mathematics, including the geometry of curves and         Duration
surfaces. Statistics concentrates on the skills and techniques required to       BSc 3 years
analyse data arising from observational and experimental studies. Practical      BSc Hons 4 years
sessions further develop the necessary skills to tackle real-life problems       BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years
mathematically. Students also continue with modules in their second subject.
182                                                                                                                                                                                                                  183

Science
                                                                                 Part-time option also                                                                                          Related course(s):
                                                                                 available, contact                                                                                             Chemistry,
                                                                                 University Direct tel                                                                                          see page 168.

Medicinal Chemistry                                                              0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                 uni-direct@uws.ac.uk




Medicinal Chemistry involves the study of the                                    UCAS                           Year 3
interaction of drugs with biological systems at the                              F150 P BSc/MedCh               In Year 3, you will share a series of modules with chemistry students.
molecular level, and the design and synthesis of                                 Campus                         These topics cover the important areas of organic, inorganic, physical
such drugs. The subject is one of the most exciting                              Paisley                        and analytical chemistry. In addition, two medicinal chemistry topics are
and fast-moving areas of chemistry.                                              Entry                          studied, one on drug design and one on enzymes and pharmaceutical
                                                                                 Higher BCC including two
                                                                                                                production. Areas covered will include a study of anaesthetics, penicillins
This course is particularly relevant if you are interested in chemistry and      science-based subjects, plus
                                                                                 S Grade English, Maths and
                                                                                                                and cardiovascular drugs. At the end of Year 3 you may graduate with a
the applied biosciences. It is designed to provide you with a broad-based
                                                                                 Chemistry although Higher      BSc Chemistry degree.
understanding of fundamental chemical principles. You will gain a thorough
theoretical and practical knowledge of organic, analytical, inorganic            Chemistry preferred.           (Optional) Sandwich Placement
and physical chemistry, plus your chosen area of Medicinal Chemistry.            A-Level CD, preferably         Students may undertake a year’s paid placement gaining relevant practical
The increasing use of computers in drug design will also be covered in           including Chemistry or         experience in industry.
the course.                                                                      Biology, plus GCSE English,
                                                                                                                Year 4 (Honours)
       In addition to academic studies, your course will help you to develop     Chemistry and Mathematics.
                                                                                 Applicants with three
                                                                                                                In the final year, Chemistry and Medicinal Chemistry students will share a
essential transferable skills including computing, communication and                                            series of topics covering advanced aspects of organic, physical or analytical
                                                                                 relevant A-Level passes,
presentation skills. The Honours Sandwich programme between Years 3                                             chemistry. In addition, you will study topics on drug design and drug action
                                                                                 to include Chemistry and
and 4 also offers you the benefit of a year’s paid work experience within         another science, may be        which will cover such important areas as analgesics, anti-malarial agents
an industrial environment in the UK or abroad.                                   considered for Year 2 entry.   and anti-histamines. A final year research project will also be carried out in
Course Content                                                                   Year 2 HNC in a                an area of drug design and synthesis.
Year 1                                                                           related subject.               Career Prospects
You are introduced to the fundamental concepts of organic, inorganic             Year 3 HND in a                As a graduate of Medicinal Chemistry, you will be in an excellent
and physical chemistry. Laboratory sessions develop experimental and             related subject.               position to pursue employment in the pharmaceutical industry, one of
communication skills enabling you to apply your knowledge to practical           Duration                       the UK’s most successful industries and a major employer. The range of
problems. In the first year you will also take two other science subjects         BSc Hons 4 years               employment opportunities within the industry is vast and covers research
and it is recommended that one of these should be biology. Transferable          BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years    and development, production, patenting, analysis, quality control, safety,
skills such as computing, word-processing, presentation skills and personal      Contact                        personnel, sales and marketing, management and information retrieval.
development are fully integrated into the course.                                Dr Richard Thacker             Alternatively, you may wish to seek employment within a government
                                                                                 0800 027 1000                  laboratory involved in analysis and/or forensics, manufacturing industries
Year 2
                                                                                 (44 141 848 7044 outwith
The areas of organic, inorganic analytical and physical chemistry are studied                                   such as food, brewing, paints and dyes, photographic and textiles, or in
                                                                                 UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
in greater depth and practical skills are further developed in all four areas.                                  teaching or academia. As a successful Honours graduate, you will also
You may take modules from another science subject and it is recommended                                         have the option of taking a higher degree to further enhance your
that either suitable applied bioscience topics (e.g. biochemistry,                                              career prospects.
microbiology, physiology), or modules relating to pharmaceutical science                                        Professional Exemptions
are studied.                                                                                                    The BSc (Honours) Medicinal Chemistry is recognised by the Royal Society
                                                                                                                of Chemistry (RSC) as fulfilling the academic requirements for admission to
                                                                                                                Associate Membership (AMRSC).
184                                                                                                                                                                                                185

Science
Occupational
Safety and Health
The profession of safety management has                                              UCAS                             Year 3
undergone fairly rapid and quite radical change                                      B920 P BSc/OSH                   The emphasis in Year 3 is on management. These modules have been
in the past few years and safety professionals are                                   Campus                           designed to enable the students to draw on previous years to understand
expected to contribute to all areas of activity in                                   Paisley                          the principles and application of managing health and safety in the
industry, commerce and the public sector.                                            Entry                            workplace. At this stage environmental management is introduced as a key
                                                                                     Higher BBC, plus English,
                                                                                                                      element in an overall management system. The contents of the modules
The job of the safety professional has expanded from the traditional role            Mathematics and Chemistry,
                                                                                     at least at S Grade. A-Level
                                                                                                                      include: case studies, professional skills, economics, managing health and
of accident prevention and protection of individual employees to include
                                                                                     CD at A-Level plus English,      safety within business and a safety management project.
safety management systems, risk assessment, risk reduction and risk control
techniques. The safety professional is concerned with the management of              Mathematics and Chemistry,       Professional Recognition
                                                                                     at least at GCSE.                Upon successful completion of the BSc programme, students can apply
risk, particularly the risk of injury or harm by workplace activities. In order to
perform their duties effectively, the safety professional must fully understand      Year 2 Entry to Year 2 will      to the Institution of Occupational Safety and Health (IOSH) to become
the concept of risk, be aware of specific risks, effects on workers and               be considered for applicants     a graduate member of IOSH and could therefore, on acceptance, use
control and preventative strategies. They must also be prepared to deal with         with an HNC in health            the designatory letters Grad IOSH. This category denotes those who are
detailed legislation, be aware of the financial implications of decisions and         and safety or a closely          academically qualified to become Chartered Members, but are currently
                                                                                     related subject.                 completing a mandatory IPD/CPD cycle.
obtain the best working environment at affordable costs.
                                                                                     Year 3 Entry to Year 3 will
Course Content                                                                       be considered for applicants
Year 1                                                                               with an HND in health
The modules offered in Year 1 cover a wide range of topics and aim to                and safety or a closely
provide students with a broad base from which more advanced topics can               related subject.
be developed in later years. This also allows flexibility in the progression          Other academic, vocational
routes for Year 2. Students successfully completing Year 1 can progress              or professional qualifications
to Year 2 in Safety and Health, Biology or Chemistry. The contents of the            deemed to be equivalent
modules include: organism, chemistry, engineering science, communication             (e.g. NEBOSH) may be
and personal development, biodiversity, ecology and health and safety                considered for entry.
at work.                                                                             The current level of the
                                                                                     applicant’s job responsibility
Year 2                                                                               will also be taken into
At this stage the modules are specific to safety and health and cover all the         consideration.
main topic areas. Throughout the modules, a variety of speakers will deliver         Duration
specific information relating to their own area of expertise. This will include       BSc 3 years full-time,
general health and safety management, health and safety law, construction,           5 years part-time
radiation, technology, health and hygiene and risk management.                       Contact
                                                                                     Mr Jan Miller
                                                                                     0800 027 1000
                                                                                     (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                     UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
186                                                                                                                                                                                                                187

Science
                                                                                Part-time option also                                                                                            Related course(s):
                                                                                available, contact                                                                                               Chemistry see page
                                                                                University Direct tel                                                                                            168; and Medicinal

Pharmaceutical                                                                  0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
                                                                                                                                                                                                 Chemistry, see page 182.



Science
This programme will consider the important                                      UCAS                            Year 2
area of developing clinically useful compounds                                  F151 P BSc/PhSci                The chemistry strand of the course is built upon with topics in physical,
into medicines. Many compounds are identified                                    Campus                          organic, analytical, and clinical chemistry. In applied bioscience, topics in
as potential drugs and graduates of this course                                 Paisley                         classical and molecular genetics, microbiology and biochemistry are studied.
will be well-placed to help develop them. This                                  Entry                           Practical skills are further enhanced and developed in both chemistry and
                                                                                Higher BCC including two
process generally involves study of the physical,                                                               biological sciences. An introduction to pharmaceutical science provides a
                                                                                science-based subjects,
pharmacological, toxicological and chemical                                     along with passes in English,
                                                                                                                further insight into this field, including discussion of some of the ethical
properties of potential drugs and also their                                    Mathematics and Chemistry       issues associated with the pharmaceutical industry.
production under safe and hygienic conditions.                                  at least @ S Grade. Higher      Year 3
                                                                                Chemistry preferred.            Emphasis is placed on analytical chemistry; increased use is made of the
This course is based mainly in the chemical and biological sciences and
in the early years there is a good deal in common with other related            A-Level CD, preferably          instrumental techniques employed in different fields of pharmaceutical
programmes such as Biomedical Sciences, Chemistry, Medicinal Chemistry          including Chemistry. English,   science such as gas chromatography-mass spectroscopy, high pressure
and Applied Bioscience.                                                         Mathematics and Chemistry       liquid chromatography, ICP atomic absorption spectroscopy, infra red
        The course structure allows students time to decide what particular     @ GCSE. Applicants with         and fluorescence spectroscopy, gel electrophoresis, microbial culture and
                                                                                three relevant A-Level passes   cell culture techniques, enzyme and other biochemical assays, among
course they wish to pursue. Laboratory work comprises a significant
                                                                                may be considered for
element of the course. You will develop skills across the traditional subject                                   many others. The design, chemistry and toxicology of drugs is studied
                                                                                Year 2 entry.
boundaries equipping you to meet the challenges associated with practical                                       along with important areas such as the workings of genes and genomes,
work in the pharmaceutical science sector. The University has many              Year 2 HNC in related           the production of pharmaceutical compounds, the chemistry of
                                                                                subject.                        bio-macromolecules, the forms and functions of proteins, and appropriate
well-equipped laboratories in chemical analysis, materials characterisation,
drug synthesis, microbiology, biochemistry and biomedical sciences.             Year 3 HND in related           topics in physical chemistry are also studied. Relevant practical and
        Transferable skills such as dealing with data, word processing,         subject.                        analytical skills are integral to all these areas of study.
technical communication and personal development, are fully integrated          Duration
                                                                                BSc 3 years
                                                                                                                (Optional) Sandwich Placement
within the different modules throughout the programme.                                                          For students interested in gaining practical experience, the Sandwich degree
                                                                                BSc (Sandwich) 4 years
        Paid work placement will be available as part of the course, usually                                    award offers the benefit of a paid placement period in industry.
                                                                                BSc Hons 4 years
taking place at the end of Year 3. Students on related programmes have
                                                                                BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 years     Year 4 (Honours)
previously been placed with leading companies in the pharmaceutical area
                                                                                Contact                         In the final year, the programme combines a robust academic content with
such as GlaxoSmithKline, Syngenta, DSM Nutritional Products, Organon and        Dr Richard Thacker
Quintiles. This experience greatly enhances future career prospects. Varied                                     the opportunity for direct, hands-on experience with modern chemical
                                                                                or Dr Jorge Chacon
teaching methods are employed during the course, including; industrial                                          instrumentation particularly in the areas of analytical chemistry, drug design
                                                                                (Programme Leader)
visits, guest lectures, workshops, and individual and group presentations.      0800 027 1000
                                                                                                                and development, and industrial microbiology. Health-related disciplines
                                                                                (44 141 848 7044 outwith        such as toxicology and health promotion and therapy are also discussed
Course Content                                                                                                  during this year. A final year research project will also be carried out in a
                                                                                UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
Year 1                                                                                                          Pharmaceutical Science related area. >
You will study chemistry and biology as part of the first year and these
subjects give an introduction to the basic science. Laboratory sessions are
included to help develop practical skills. An overview of pharmaceutical
science is provided in a module specially developed for this programme.
188                                                                                                       189



                                                                              I’m Karolina
                                                                              from Poland
                                                                              I’m 23
                                                                              I’m studying Chemistry.
                                                                              I plan to have my
                                                                              own company and
                                                                              work in the field of
                                                                              Biotechnology.
                                                                              I like dancing and
                                                                              singing and I don’t like
Career Prospects                                                              it when it rains all day.
Recent research indicates that graduates from this programme will
find suitable employment in a variety of vital areas in this field such as:
research and development in pharmaceutical or biotechnologies industries;
chemical, pharmaceutical or biomedical research in universities or research
institutions; scientific publishing; and quality assurance and control,
including regulatory affairs. Recently many of our science graduates
have found work in the pharmaceutical field with companies such as
GlaxoSmithKline, Roche, Quintiles, Scottish Biotech, DSM Nutritional
Products, and Organon among others.
Professional Recognition
The BSc Pharmaceutical Science award is recognised by the Royal Society
of Chemistry (RSC) as fulfilling the academic requirements for admission to
Associate Membership (AMRSC).
190                                                                                                                                                                                                                     191

Science
                                                                                    Part-time option also                                                                                          Related course(s):
                                                                                    available, contact                                                                                             Physics with Medical
                                                                                    University Direct tel                                                                                          Technology/Multimedia,

Physics                                                                             0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                    uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
                                                                                                                                                                                                   see page 193.




Physics is an exciting subject which aims to explain                                UCAS                           Course Content                                                                  Contact
how things work from the smallest to the largest of                                 F300 P BSc/Phy                 Year 1                                                                          Dr Klaus Spohr
scales, from nanotechnology to the universe itself.                                 Campus                         All students take core modules in physics and mathematics along with            0800 027 1000
                                                                                    Paisley                                                                                                        (44 141 848 7044 outwith
It takes in practice and theory, specialist pure                                                                   a choice of other subjects from a wide portfolio of science, engineering
                                                                                    Entry                                                                                                          UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
research and applications in the surroundings of                                                                   or computer-related topics. The physics modules cover the SQA
                                                                                    Higher BCC including
everyday life. It’s little surprise that those with a                                                              Advanced Higher syllabus and, in addition, aspects of atomic physics and
                                                                                    Mathematics and Physics,
physics degree are in demand by many employers.                                     plus English @ S Grade.
                                                                                                                   thermodynamics are taught. In conjunction with this is an interesting
                                                                                    Applicants with Advanced       laboratory programme using a wide range of modern equipment, carrying
As a discipline, physics is used in many areas of professional activity
                                                                                    Highers in Physics and         out experiments related to the module content. Students learn experimental
including engineering, health and biomedicine, the public services and
                                                                                    Mathematics may be             method to prepare them for project work in later years.
utilities, environmental monitoring, education, and computing. Accredited
                                                                                    considered for direct entry    Year 2
by the professional body for practising physicists, the Institute of Physics,
                                                                                    into Year 2.
the course has been designed to help you develop the professional skills                                           Students take Physics modules only, developing skills and knowledge in
and expertise for a career in any area of physics, from industrial applications     A Level DD, including          the core subjects but also branching out to other areas such as electronics,
to academic research.                                                               Mathematics or Physics.        vibrations and waves, mathematical modelling and medical technology.
                                                                                    Applicants with BCC at A       Practical and professional skills are also developed during this year.
        Working with friendly, supportive staff committed to high standards
                                                                                    Level, to include Physics
in teaching and research, you will also benefit from small class sizes and           and Mathematics may be         Year 3
flexibility in choice of final degree title. You will study core topics in physics,   considered for Year 2 entry.   In this year the course covers the core physics topics of electromagnetism,
along with other subjects you choose yourself to reflect your interests and                                         solid-state physics, atomic and nuclear physics, optics and relativity.
                                                                                    Year 2 HNC in Physics,
career aspirations.                                                                                                There is a choice of medical physics modules, and a free option, allowing
                                                                                    Applied Sciences or a
        After first year, the maths you require is integrated into the physics       related subject.               you to choose from other suitable disciplines.
teaching. During the first three years of the course, practical classes
integrated into each module will enhance your familiarity with the principles       Year 3 HND in Physics,         (Optional) Industrial Placement
and techniques of experimental physics, which underpin the lectures that            Applied Sciences or a          This is an optional year spent in industry or a relevant scientific
                                                                                    related subject.               research laboratory.
cover the theory.
        During your Honours year you will undertake a project in one of             Students with less than the    Year 4 (Honours)
our research groups. The Honours Sandwich programme also offers you                 minimum entry requirements     The subjects encountered in this year are more advanced developments
                                                                                    should contact Dr Klaus
the benefit of a year’s paid work experience with an industrial or scientific                                        of those undertaken in third year, with additional topics such as statistical
                                                                                    Spohr (see contact details
employer in the UK or abroad.                                                                                      physics, ultrasonics and nanotechnology. An important feature of this year
                                                                                    opposite) for advice on
        Students from the University have worked with a variety of leading          routes into the physical       is the project where skills and knowledge acquired during the course are
organisations such as CERN, the nuclear and particle physics laboratory in          sciences.                      applied to an original research problem. In addition, your professional
Geneva; the UK’s National Physical Laboratory in London; and QinetiQ, the           Duration                       skills are further developed, to prepare you for the job market. Projects are
largest scientific research organisation in Europe.                                  BSc 3 years                    usually carried out along with a research group or under the supervision of
                                                                                    BSc Hons 4 years               a member of staff with research interests and experience in the chosen field.
                                                                                    BSc Hons (Sandwich) 5 year     Project topics span the full range of physics and its applications. >
192                                                                                                                                                                                          193

                                                                                    Science Physics with
                                                                                                                                                                    Part-time option also
                                                                                                                                                                    available, contact
                                                                                                                                                                    University Direct tel

                                                                                    Medical Technology/                                                             0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                                                                                                    uni-direct@uws.ac.uk


                                                                                    Multimedia

Career Prospects                                                                    The Physics with Medical Technology course is                                   UCAS
There is always a strong demand for graduates in physics from technology-           designed to provide a solid grounding in key areas of                           Physics with Medical
based industries in Scotland and elsewhere. These industries cover areas            physics along with a special focus on the application                           Technology –
                                                                                                                                                                    F3B8 P BSc/PhyMT
such as microelectronic telecommunications, optics and energy, a topic              of physics to medicine. It covers the full range of
                                                                                                                                                                    Physics with Multimedia –
of hugely growing interest because of global warming. Physicists are also           technologies used in modern hospitals including                                 F3G4 P BSc/PhyM
in demand in the public services including schools and hospitals, the civil         magnetic resonance imaging, radiotherapy, CAT                                   Physics with
service and research labs. You may, for instance, work as a systems manager,        scanning and ultrasound. Physics is finding more                                 Earth Science –
process engineer, medical physicist, teacher or in a research-based area,           and more applications in medicine and the Physics                               F3F6 P BSc/PhysES
such as astronomy. Our physics graduates have gone on to work with                  with Medical Technology degree will put you in                                  Physics with
major companies such as BAE Systems, Fujitsu, Logica, Motorola and                  a perfect position to take advantage of many                                    Mathematics –
Nikon Europe, as well as to further studies and jobs in universities.               new opportunities.                                                              F3G1 P BSc/PWM
                                                                                                                                                                    Campus
Professional Accreditation                                                          The University’s degree is the only one of its kind in Scotland. Developed      Paisley
The Physics degrees (single honours and major titles) at the University have        in close collaboration with staff from the National Health Service, topics      Entry
been accredited by the Institute of Physics (IoP).                                  in physics are taught by professionally-qualified academic staff in physics      Higher BCC including
NB: Physics can also be combined with Earth Science (UCAS code F3F6 P BSc/PhyES –   at the University, and topics in medical technologies are taught by subject     Mathematics and Physics,
see page 167); Multimedia (UCAS code F3G4 P BSc/PhyM – see page 195); Medical       specialists. During your studies, you will have a substantial placement in      plus English @ S Grade.
Technology (F3B8 P BSc/PhyMT – see page 193); and Maths (F3G1 P BSc/PWM –           a clinical setting or medical devices company, to allow you to carry out a      A-Level DD, including
see page 195).                                                                      project on a particular aspect of medical physics or medical technology in      Mathematics or Physics.
                                                                                    a real work environment.                                                        Applicants with BCC at
                                                                                            The Physics degrees at the University have been accredited by the       A-Level including Physics
                                                                                    Institute of Physics (IoP). As such, you may be eligible to apply for an IoP    and Mathematics may be
                                                                                    bursary, worth £3000 over four years. Further details on the criterion for      considered for Year 2 entry.
                                                                                    award of these bursaries may be obtained by phoning +44 (0)141 848 3630.        Year 2 HNC in Physics,
                                                                                    Course Content                                                                  Applied Sciences or a
                                                                                                                                                                    related subject.
                                                                                    Years 1 & 2
                                                                                    The Physics with Medical Technology course covers the same core content as      Year 3 HND in Physics,
                                                                                    the Physics course in Years 1 & 2, with additional modules in topics covering   Applied Sciences or a
                                                                                    human anatomy, physiology and medical instrumentation. See page 190 for         related subject.
                                                                                    more details.                                                                   Students with less than
                                                                                                                                                                    the minimum entry
                                                                                    Year 3                                                                          requirements should
                                                                                    Students cover core modules in physics and specialist modules in medical        contact Dr Klaus Spohr on
                                                                                    imaging and nuclear medicine and radiotherapy and health physics. >             +44 (0)141 848 3630 for
                                                                                                                                                                    advice on routes into the
                                                                                                                                                                    physical sciences.
194                                                                                                                                                                                                                195
                                                                                                                                                                                                 Related course(s):
                                                                                                                                                                                                 Physics, see page 190.




Year 4 (Honours)                                                               Duration                   Physics with Multimedia
In addition to studies in core physics, students undertake a hospital          BSc 3 years                Like the course in Physics with Medical Technology, the Physics with
placement working on one or two medical physics or medical technology          BSc Hons 4 years           Multimedia course is based on core topics in physics, with additional
applications areas under the supervision of experienced staff. Additionally,   Contact                    multimedia classes taken each year. These can cover a range of topics
                                                                               Dr Klaus Spohr
there is an emphasis on professional practice, aimed at equipping graduates                               including multimedia design and authoring, programming, learning
                                                                               0800 027 1000
with the skills they will need for a career in medical technology. Students    (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                                          technologies and networked multimedia. In these topics, the course takes
study the physics core modules at each level of the programme.                 UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk   advantage of the University’s huge investment in multimedia technologies
Career Prospects                                                                                          and experience in running multimedia technology courses at undergraduate
There are many well-defined career paths in the exciting and rewarding field                                and postgraduate levels.
of medical technology so the job prospects for graduates from this course                                 Career Prospects
are excellent, as are the professional development opportunities. A number                                The course in Physics with Multimedia opens up opportunities in the
of previous graduates in physics from the University have already gone                                    multimedia sector which has expanded rapidly in recent years. Students will
on to work in this area and there are also opportunities in research and                                  gain a good understanding and experience of industry-standard hardware
development with medical equipment manufacturers. Further information                                     and software, enhancing their attractiveness to industry not just as numerate,
on career opportunities can be found at www.ipem.org.uk                                                   computer-literate graduates but as experts in specific areas of computing.
                                                                                                          Many graduates have gone on to teaching and if you are interested in this
                                                                                                          possibility, studying Physics with Multimedia will provide you with an excellent
                                                                                                          opportunity to develop and evaluate educationally valuable resources for your
                                                                                                          students. Increasingly, such technologies are being used in education at all levels.
                                                                                                          Physics with Earth Science
                                                                                                          Along with the core topics in Physics you will study the basic processes
                                                                                                          which shape the Earth’s environments – such as how volcanoes are built,
                                                                                                          what triggers earthquakes and what drives weather systems. In later years
                                                                                                          you will be introduced to surveying and map making, and study the issues
                                                                                                          of global environmental change.
                                                                                                          Career Prospects
                                                                                                          With a degree in Physics with Earth Science you could seek a career in resource
                                                                                                          extraction or environmental protection, or go on to further study in geophysics.
                                                                                                          Physics with Mathematics
                                                                                                          Mathematics is essential for the study of Physics, and is integral in the
                                                                                                          Physics teaching. This degree provides the opportunity for those students
                                                                                                          who enjoy both physics and maths to study further maths topics such as
                                                                                                          financial mathematics, statistics and operational research.
                                                                                                          Career Prospects
                                                                                                          A degree in Physics with Mathematics would provide an excellent
                                                                                                          background for a career in the financial services industry or in business.
196                                                                                                                                                                                                                   197

Science
                                                                                  Part-time option also                                                                                         Related course(s):
                                                                                  available, contact                                                                                            Psychology (BA),
                                                                                  University Direct tel                                                                                         see page 206.

Psychology (BSc*)                                                                 0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                  uni-direct@uws.ac.uk




The principal aim of the Psychology degree is                                     UCAS                         Year 3                                                                         *NB: The Psychology content
to allow you to develop a critical understanding                                  C800 P BSc/Ps                Further study of topics in psychology such as child development, social         of the BA (page 206) and
of the methods and approaches within this                                         Campus                       psychology, biological psychology and cognitive psychology will be covered. BSc programme is identical:
                                                                                  Paisley                                                                                                      the appropriate programme
discipline. Throughout the programme of study,                                                                 You will also have the option of selecting a specialist module covering either
                                                                                  Entry                                                                                                        depends on students’
you will develop a range of generic, transferable                                                              psychology or science options.                                                  academic background and
                                                                                  Higher BBC/BCCC including
skills, valued by today’s employers, including                                                                 Year 4 (Honours)                                                                the other subjects they wish
                                                                                  English and a science
IT, numeracy, group work, communication and                                       subject, plus S Grade        Core studies in psychology will cover individual differences and                to study.
problem-solving.                                                                  Mathematics.                 psychological theory. You will also be able to choose two specialist modules
Initially, the course offers a broad overview of scientific study, providing the   A Level CD, including        from a range of topics, including forensic and criminal psychology, education
opportunity to gain an understanding of the range of outlooks and methods         English and a science        and psychology, clinical psychology, health psychology and organisational
within science and emphasis on the interdependency of approaches.                 subject, plus GCSE English   psychology. All students undertake an in-depth dissertation on a specialised
You will go on to develop a deeper awareness of psychology methods                and Mathematics.             topic of their choosing.
and methodology.                                                                  Year 2 Contact Admissions    Career Prospects
        In Years 3 and 4 emphasis is clearly placed on developing an              Officer for details.          Psychologists find employment in a broad range of areas such as marketing,
understanding and awareness of core psychology areas including: social            Duration                     management, the media, teaching, academic research and industry.
and developmental psychology, biological psychology and cognition.                BSc 3 years                  As a graduate of Psychology with a scientific background you will also be
Your critical and analytical skills will be further developed. In addition to     BSc Hons 4 years
                                                                                                               well-qualified to pursue a career in research-based activities within industry,
studying modules such as individual differences, you will address issues          Contact
                                                                                                               health and public services. Your degree will also allow you to continue your
about psychological theory and have the opportunity to undertake an               Dr Richard Thacker
                                                                                  0800 027 1000
                                                                                                               studies with a postgraduate course allowing you to enter the professions of
in-depth study of a subject of your choice for your dissertation.                                              clinical, educational, forensic or occupational psychology.
                                                                                  (44 141 848 7044 outwith
Course Content                                                                    UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk     Professional Exemptions
Year 1                                                                                                         The BSc Hons Psychology is recognised by the British Psychological
You will study one module in psychology as well as science modules                                             Society as conferring eligibility for Graduate Membership and the status
which cover areas such as biology, chemistry, mathematics and physics.                                         of Graduate Basis for Registration (GBR), provided a minimum of second
The psychology module will introduce you to ideas about psychological                                          class Honours is achieved. This is the first step towards becoming a
research, individual differences, learning and cognitive processes.                                            Chartered Psychologist.
Modules will also be selected which develop skills in computing,
word processing and presentation.
Year 2
Studies in psychology will be further advanced through the modules
introduction to social science methods, social cognition and understanding
development. You will also study science modules of your choice determined
by the previous year of study.
198                               199




Social
Sciences



           I’m Rachel
           from Glasgow
           I’m 22
           I’m studying
           Psychology.
           I’m dreaming of
           travelling the world
           and then studying
           further to get a job
           as an Educational
           Psychologist.
200                                                                                                                                                                                                                   201

Social Sciences examine the world
we live in – from the way we think
and behave to the decisions made
that shape our society.

Flexibility                                                                    Section contents                Professional recognition                                                         UWS graduate Stacey
Our degrees offer flexible study opportunities. In addition to single subject   Criminal Justice          211   The Psychology single subject honours degree is accredited by the British        Thomson, was named
degrees in Psychology, Sociology, Criminal Justice and Social Work, there      Social Sciences           202   Psychological Society (BPS) which enables graduates to move on to careers        Student Social Worker
                                                                                  Economics              204                                                                                    of the Year 2008 by the
are opportunities for joint degree combinations, for example Politics and                                      and to further study that require a professional qualification in psychology.
                                                                                                                                                                                                British Association of
Sociology. For more information see individual course entries. It is also         Politics               205   A postgraduate qualification enables students to pursue a career as, for          Social Workers in Scotland.
possible for Social Work students to transfer to a Social Sciences degree         Psychology             206   example, a clinical, educational or forensic psychologist. The Social Work       Stacey gained the award for
during their course.                                                              Social Policy          207   degree gives graduates the recognised qualification, approved by the              her outstanding work while
                                                                                  Sociology              208   Scottish Social Services Council, for employment as a professional social        on placement with an adult
Advanced entry
                                                                               Social Studies (CertHE)   210   worker anywhere in the United Kingdom.                                           mental health team at Ailsa
Social Sciences programme:
                                                                               Social Work               212                                                                                    Hospital in Ayr.
Applicants with an HND in Social Sciences will normally be accepted for                                        Applied research
entry to Year 2 of the programme; although Year 3 entry will be considered,                                    Staff undertake applied research on a wide range of topics, and a research      “Winning this award has
depending on subjects taken and their academic performance. Applicants                                         institute has been established as a focus for work in a number of policy-        given me reassurance
with an HNC in Social Sciences will be considered for entry to Year 2 of                                       relevant areas. Areas of particular interest include child employment, social    and confidence in my
                                                                                                                                                                                                ability to work with
the programme depending on their academic performance. Applicants                                              exclusion, migration and identity and health issues including the social
                                                                                                                                                                                                service users effectively
with the University’s CertHE Social Studies can enter into Year 2 of the                                       and behavioural aspects of drug use. Staff research informs the teaching         and in an individual,
BA programme. Contact the Admissions Officer, John English on 0800 027                                          programmes both through specialist modules and project and practical             person-centred manner.
1000 (44 141 848 7044 outwith UK) or e-mail uni-direct@uws.ac.uk for                                           work. To find out more about our Social Sciences provision visit                  During my placement I
general enquiries about the programme.                                                                         www.uws.ac.uk                                                                    learned a great about
Criminal Justice programme:                                                                                                                                                                     myself as an individual
                                                                                                                                                                                                and as a social worker.
Applicants with an HNC/HND in Legal Studies will be considered for entry to
                                                                                                                                                                                                I’m still developing in
Year 2 of the programme depending on subjects taken and their academic                                                                                                                          my role, but this award
performance. Applicants with the University’s CertHE Social Studies can                                                                                                                         has given me the belief
enter into Year 2 of the programme (provided they have passed the Scottish                                                                                                                      that I am heading in the
Criminal Justice option). Contact the Criminal Justice Admissions Officer,                                                                                                                       right direction.”
Geraldine O’Donnell on 0800 027 1000 (44 141 848 7044 outwith UK)
or e-mail uni-direct@uws.ac.uk for details of the programme.
Social Work programme:
Entry is normally only to Year 1, but advanced entry may be possible if
an applicant has completed the same or equivalent modules as the ones
for which he or she is seeking exemption and also meets the other entry
requirements. Contact Social Work Admissions Officer, Anne Ritchie
on 0800 027 1000 (44 141 848 7044 outwith UK) or e-mail
uni-direct@uws.ac.uk for details.
202                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              203

Social Sciences                                              with programme options in

Economics, Politics, Psychology°,
Social Policy**, Sociology
Get a solid grounding in the social sciences, with the                           UCAS                           Year 2                                                                                                  °NB: The Psychology
opportunity to specialise in an area of your choice                              Paisley – L310 P BA/SS         Students select the subjects in Year 2 which they wish to continue with in                               content of the BA and BSc
from Year 2 onwards – a great option with a myriad                               Hamilton – L310 H BA/SS        Years 3 and 4. In addition, students study research methods used in the                                  programme (see page 196)
                                                                                 Campus                                                                                                                                  is identical: the appropriate
of career pathways.                                                                                             social sciences, including research design and data analysis.
                                                                                 Hamilton, Paisley                                                                                                                       programme depends
Students follow a common foundation programme in Year 1, taking a range          Entry                          Years 3 & 4                                                                                              upon students’ academic
of social sciences including Psychology; Sociology; Politics; Economics;         Higher BBC (one of which       For information on course content in Years 3 and 4, see pages 204–208.                                   background and the other
Social Policy (at Paisley Campus); and Social History (at Hamilton Campus).      should normally be English),                                                                                                            subjects they wish to study.
Students have the opportunity to engage in critical reflection on their first      plus Mathematics @               Subject(s)                       Single subject   Single subject   Single subject    Single subject
                                                                                                                                  Psychology†
                                                                                 S Grade.                          Studied                            degree           degree           degree            degree
year of study through the preparation of a Personal Development Plan the
first and subsequent years of study.                                              A-Level CD, plus GCSE                            Single subject                    Single subject   Single subject    Single subject
                                                                                                                 Psychology†                        Sociology†
       In Year 2, most students take three subjects chosen from Psychology,      English and Mathematics.                            degree                            degree           degree            degree
Sociology, Politics, Social Policy and Economics, together with Social Science   HNC in a relevant subject                            Joint        Single subject                    Single subject    Single subject
Methods. In Years 3 and 4 Psychology and Sociology can be taken as a             (including Social Sciences       Sociology†                                           Politics
                                                                                                                                     degree           degree                            degree            degree
Single subject degree at Paisley Campus, or with another subject for a Joint     and Social Care).
degree at Paisley and Hamilton. (Politics, Economics and Social Policy can                                                            Joint            Joint                                           Single subject
                                                                                 Year 2 HND in Social               Politics                                             n/a         Social Policy**
only be studied as part of a Joint degree.) The table opposite details the                                                           degree           degree                                              degree
                                                                                 Sciences; CertHE in Social
Single subject and Joint degree programmes which are available.                  Studies; exceptionally HNC                           Joint            Joint            Joint
                                                                                                                Social Policy**                                                           n/a           Economics
Course Content                                                                   in Social Sciences.                                 degree           degree           degree

Year 1 (Foundation Programme)                                                    Year 3 Exceptionally                                 Joint            Joint            Joint             Joint
                                                                                 HND in Social Sciences.          Economics                                                                                 n/a
Psychology is concerned with explaining human behaviour, both individual                                                             degree           degree           degree            degree
and collective, and applying that understanding in a range of settings.          Duration
Sociology focuses on the social structure of modern Britain, introducing         BA 3 years                     †Psychology and Sociology single subject degrees are offered at Paisley Campus only.
sociological theories and concepts in relation to particular institutional       BA Hons 4 years                **Social Policy is offered at Paisley Campus only.
areas. Politics provides an introduction to contrasting ideas about the aims     Contact
                                                                                 John English
and goals of political organisations and an overview of modern British
                                                                                 0800 027 1000                  UCAS applications
political institutions. Social Policy provides an historical and developmental
                                                                                 (44 141 848 7044 outwith
overview of British welfare policy from the poor law to the present day.                                        Apply for the Social Sciences programme using the following codes –
                                                                                 UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
Social History provides a background to the social sciences by looking at                                       L310 P BA/SS (for study at Paisley Campus) or L310 H BA/SS (for study
the forces which have shaped contemporary society. Economics deals with                                         at Hamilton Campus). Students follow a common foundation in Year 1,
how households, business organisations and governments interact within                                          and from Year 2 select specific subject areas from Economics, Politics,
the institutional framework of an industrial economy. Students are also                                         Psychology, Social Policy, or Sociology, which continue to be studied in
introduced to the use of information technology in social science and begin                                     Years 3 and 4. More information about each of these subjects is given from
to acquire the skills necessary to become critical and reflective learners                                       pages 204–208. The table above details the single and joint degree subjects
through the ‘Reflections on the Social Sciences’ module.                                                         available as part of the Social Sciences programme.
204                                                                                                                                                                                                                    205

Social Sciences                                                                                               Social Sciences
                                                                                Related course(s):
                                                                                Business Economics,
                                                                                see page 16.

Economics                                                                                                     Politics

Money makes the world go round – find out what                                   UCAS                          Understand more about the world we live in and the                                 UCAS
role business, consumers, the financial sector and                               Apply using the appropriate   decisions that shape it. The truly fascinating subject                             Apply using the appropriate
government all play in this process and what impact                             Social Sciences code:         of politics touches every area of our lives - from the                             Social Sciences code:
                                                                                Hamilton – L310 H BA/SS                                                                                          Hamilton – L310 H BA/SS
these economic decisions have.                                                                                amount of tax we pay to the health service
                                                                                Paisley – L310 P BA/SS                                                                                           Paisley – L310 P BA/SS
                                                                                                              we receive.
Economics is concerned with the factors that influence income, wealth and        Campus                                                                                                           Campus
well-being in society. It considers questions such as the determinants of       Hamilton, Paisley             Politics examines the values and processes that underpin the way countries         Hamilton, Paisley
economic growth and national income, efficient and fair taxation, and the        Entry                         govern themselves. The programme deals with the British political system,          Entry
level and distribution of public expenditure. Economics is only available as    See Social Sciences           comparisons with the United States; the politics of the European Union; and        See Social Sciences
part of Joint degree – see page 203.                                            page 202.                     with Scottish politics after devolution. Politics is only available as part of a   page 202.
                                                                                Contact                       Joint degree – see page 203.                                                       Contact
Course Content                                                                  Alan Reeves                                                                                                      Duncan Sim
Years 1 & 2                                                                     0800 027 1000                 Course Content                                                                     0800 027 1000
See page 202.                                                                   (44 141 848 7044 outwith      Years 1 & 2                                                                        (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk      See page 202.                                                                      UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
Year 3
Students have the opportunity to study many branches of economics                                             Year 3
including industrial, international, labour, and public and social economics,                                 As well as a module in research methods, students select from topics
econometrics and economic techniques.                                                                         such as Scottish and American politics, political ideologies and
                                                                                                              comparative politics.
Year 4 (Honours)
Students continue to study specific aspects of the discipline such as                                          Year 4 (Honours)
industry and public policy, growth and industrial policy, and open economy                                    Students select from modules in specific aspects of the discipline, including
macroeconomics. They also complete a dissertation on a particular aspect                                      democracy, nationalism, and the state and revolution. They also complete a
of economics.                                                                                                 dissertation on a particular aspect of politics.
Career Prospects                                                                                              Career Prospects
Degrees including Economics will qualify graduates for managerial positions                                   Degrees including Politics will prepare students for work in both the public
in the public and private sectors, and for planning and research posts in                                     and private sectors in managerial, planning and policy analysis positions,
various levels of government and business organisations.                                                      and in education.
206                                                                                                                                                                                                                         207

Social Sciences                                                                                                  Social Sciences
                                                                                   Related course(s):
                                                                                   BSc Psychology,
                                                                                   see page 196.

Psychology*                                                                                                      Social Policy

Study the human mind and behaviour in this                                         UCAS                          Social Policy is concerned with the ways in which                                  UCAS
professionally accredited course – your first step                                  Apply using the appropriate   social needs, issues and ‘problems’ are defined and                                 Apply using the appropriate
towards becoming a Chartered Psychologist.                                         Social Sciences code:         responded to by governments and policy makers.                                     Social Sciences code:
                                                                                   Hamilton – L310 H BA/SS                                                                                          L310 P BA/SS
Psychology develops students’ understanding of individual and small group          Paisley – L310 P BA/SS        It looks at the impact of developments in welfare policy on different groups,      Campus
behaviour. The course studies findings, theories and methods in psychology          Campus                        families and individuals in society. The provision of welfare, both historically   Paisley
and social psychology with particular reference to how they apply to               Hamilton, Paisley             and today, is examined with reference to health, community care, housing,          Entry
everyday life. Students will also gain a range of additional skills such as data   Entry                         education and social security policy in both Britain and Europe, as well           See Social Sciences
gathering, report writing and computing. Psychology is available as a Single       See Social Sciences           as crime and social policy. In doing this, the objectives of, and constraints      page 202.
subject degree at Paisley Campus and as a Joint degree at both Paisley             page 202.                     on, policy makers are discussed. Social Policy is only available as a Joint        Contact
Campus and Hamilton Campus – see page 203.                                         Contact                       degree – see page 203.                                                             Lynne Poole
                                                                                   Jim McKechnie                                                                                                    0800 027 1000
Course Content                                                                     0800 027 1000                 Course Content                                                                     (44 141 848 7044 outwith
Years 1 & 2                                                                        (44 141 848 7044 outwith      Years 1 & 2                                                                        UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
See page 202.                                                                      UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk      See page 202.                                                                      NB: Social Policy is offered
Year 3                                                                        *NB: The Psychology                Year 3                                                                             at Paisley Campus only.
There is further study of core areas of the discipline including               content of the BA and BSc         Students take modules in social issues and policy responses, and
developmental, social, biological and cognitive psychology. Students also      programme (page 196) is           methodology and methods, and there is an opportunity to study more
have the opportunity to choose a specialist area of study in an applied area identical: the appropriate          specialist aspects of the subject such as community care, criminal justice
                                                                               programme depends
of psychology. In addition, students study the methods of investigation, data                                    policy, health care policy and housing policy.
                                                                               upon students’ academic
gathering and data analysis used in psychology.                                background and the other          Year 4 (Honours)
Year 4 (Honours)                                                               subjects they wish to study.      Students choose modules in specific social policy topics as in Year 3.
In the final year, core modules cover the study of personality and individual                                     They also complete a dissertation on a particular aspect of a social policy.
differences, and theory in psychology. There is also opportunity to choose                                       Career Prospects
further topics in applied psychology (including health psychology, counselling,                                  Social Policy graduates are equipped for employment in a wide range of
forensic psychology, cross-cultural psychology and organisational psychology).                                   occupations in the public, voluntary and private welfare sectors, or for
Students also complete a dissertation on a particular aspect of psychology.                                      further professional training in social work, teaching, careers guidance
Career Prospects                                                                                                 and management.
Psychology offers preparation for a professional career and for postgraduate
training in clinical, educational, forensic and occupational psychology.
Many psychology graduates use their degree as a route into employment
in personnel, marketing, public relations or the civil service.
Professional Exemptions
The Single subject BA Hons Psychology degree with at least second-class
honours is recognised by the British Psychological Society as conferring
eligibility for Graduate Basis for Registration (GBR), which is the first step
towards becoming a Chartered Psychologist.
208                                                                                                          209

Social Sciences
Sociology

Get to grips with the diverse forces that shape our                            UCAS
society. This degree offers you the opportunity                                Apply using the appropriate
to study subjects such as family, gender, crime,                               Social Sciences code:
                                                                               Hamilton – L310 H BA/SS
ethnicity and health – important issues which
                                                                               Paisley – L310 P BA/SS
impact on the world in which we live today.
                                                                               Campus
Sociology is concerned with analysing the nature of modern society.            Hamilton*, Paisley
It focuses on issues such as the sources of inequality and how inequality      (*Joint degrees only)
affects our lives, and the changing roles of men and women in the workplace    Entry
and the family. The course goes on to an examination of national identity      See Social Sciences
                                                                               page 202.
in an increasingly globalised world. Students analyse these issues using a
                                                                               Contact
range of qualitative and quantitative research methods.
                                                                               Duncan Sim
       Sociology is available as a Single subject degree at Paisley Campus
                                                                               0800 027 1000
and as a joint degree at both Paisley Campus and Hamilton Campus –             (44 141 848 7044 outwith
see page 203.                                                                  UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
Course Content
Years 1 & 2
See page 202.
Year 3
Sociology offers modules in a wide range of areas such as the family,
gender, crime in society, Scottish society, health, ethnicity and industrial
relations. Students also study sociological research methods.
Year 4 (Honours)
Students study social theory and further modules in specific aspects of
sociology, such as class and culture migration and social welfare. Students
also complete a dissertation on a particular aspect of sociology.
Career Prospects
Sociology graduates are equipped for employment or further professional
training in the social services, public and private sector management,
the careers and employment services, central and local government,
and Modern Studies teaching.
210                                                                                                                                                                                                                     211

Social Sciences                                                                                                  Social Sciences
CertHE Social Studies                                                                                            Criminal Justice

Gain entry to degree-level study with this                                       UCAS                            The way society and governments deal with crime is                              UCAS
excellent introduction to a wide range of subjects,                              L301 H CertHE/SS                an increasingly high-profile issue – this degree gives                           M211 H BA/CJ
including psychology, economics, sociology and                                   Campus                          you the chance to study the concepts and processes                              Campus
criminal justice.                                                                Hamilton                        which tackle crime in 21st century society.                                     Hamilton
                                                                                 Entry                                                                                                           Entry
This one-year course is designed to provide access to degree-level               Higher C (if not                Criminal Justice involves the study of concepts, structures, organisations      Higher BBC (one of which
education, as well as employment, by developing the skills and knowledge         English, either another         and processes involved with the prevention, investigation and prosecution       should normally be English),
appropriate to gain an understanding of individuals, society and institutions.   language-based subject          of crime, the workings of the criminal law and criminal court system            plus Mathematics @
Transferable personal skills are developed in areas such as communication        or Intermediate 2 English       and the treatment of offenders within society. It has a wide base in            S Grade.
and reflective practice.                                                          or National Certificate          the fundamental areas of the Social Sciences and combines this with             A-Level CD, plus GCSE
                                                                                 Communication 4).
Course Content                                                                                                   appropriate law-related modules.                                                English and Mathematics.
                                                                                 A-Level E plus
Core modules are Reflections in Social Sciences, Psychology and
                                                                                 GCSE English.
                                                                                                                 Course Content                                                                  HNC in a relevant subject
Sociology. There are also a range of options, including Economics, Political                                     Year 1                                                                          (including Legal Studies).
Participation, Social History and Introduction to Scottish Criminal Justice,     Scottish Vocation               Modules include introduction to Scottish Criminal Justice, Scottish Criminal    Year 2 Exceptionally HND
from which students choose three modules.                                        Qualification @ Level 3          Law, Psychology, Sociology, and History of Crime and Justice.                   in Legal Studies.
                                                                                 in a relevant discipline.
Career Prospects                                                                                                 Year 2                                                                          Duration
                                                                                 Mature students (over 21)                                                                                       BA 3 years
Employment opportunities exist in the fields of administration, local             with relevant experience will
                                                                                                                 Modules include Behavioural Aspects of Criminal Justice, Politics of Criminal
                                                                                                                                                                                                 BA Hons 4 years
government, the police service, civil service and health service, as well as     also be considered.             Justice, Criminology: Theories and Perspectives, Issues in Scottish Criminal
                                                                                                                                                                                                 Contact
social care, and community education.                                            Duration                        Justice, Scottish Criminal Law and Research Methods.                            Geraldine O’Donnell
Progression                                                                      CertHE 1 year                   Year 3                                                                          0800 027 1000
Successful students can move into Year 2 of the BA Social Sciences               Contact                         Modules include Contemporary Issues in Criminal Justice Policy, Criminal        (44 141 848 7044 outwith
programme or (provided they have passed the Scottish Criminal Justice            Fiona Veitch                    Justice Research Methods, Youth Justice, Economics of Crime and Justice,        UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
                                                                                 0800 027 1000
option) the Criminal Justice programme.                                                                          Introduction to Forensic Science, Penology and Policing.
                                                                                 (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                 UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk        Year 4
                                                                                                                 Modules include Community Safety and Crime Prevention, Comparative
                                                                                                                 Criminal Justice; Dissertation, Security in a Global Age, Human Rights Law
                                                                                                                 and Victimology.
                                                                                                                 Career Prospects
                                                                                                                 Degrees in Criminal Justice lead to employment opportunities in the police
                                                                                                                 and prison services, as well as the Criminal Courts Administration and the
                                                                                                                 Fiscal Service. Community justice provides opportunities to work in sectors
                                                                                                                 related to restorative justice and mediation, community safety and working
                                                                                                                 with offenders, victims and witnesses. The private security industry has a
                                                                                                                 demand for managers with a knowledge of the criminal justice system.
212                                                                                                                                                                                                                     213

Social Sciences
Social Work

Social workers play a crucial role in improving                                  UCAS                            Year 3                                                                        *At time of print, delivery of
people’s lives – this 4-year professionally recognised                           Dumfries* –                     Year 3 includes modules dealing with reflective social work practice, social    the Social Work programme
programme will give you the practical skills                                     L500 D BA/SW                    work law and disadvantage. An 80-day period of assessed practice learning      at Dumfries Campus is
                                                                                 Paisley – L500 P BA/SW                                                                                         subject to final University
and knowledge to operate in this dynamic and                                                                     is completed.
                                                                                 Campus                                                                                                         approval.
challenging field.                                                                                                Year 4 (Honours)
                                                                                 Dumfries*, Paisley
The University has offered professional social work education combined           Entry                           Year 4 provides for students’ continuing development as professional
with an Honours degree for over three decades. The Social Work programme         Higher BBC plus English         workers through modules in critical social work practice and working
has been drafted in collaboration with employers and service users               and Mathematics @ S Grade       in organisations. Students also complete a social work dissertation and
and combines academic and professional qualifications for entry into a            (at 1 or 2) or equivalent.      undertake 90 days assessed practice learning.
rewarding and demanding career. The programme meets the requirements             A-Level CD, plus GCSE           Professional Placement
of the Scottish Government and has been approved by the Scottish Social          English and Mathematics.        Each student will undertake a total of 200 days practice learning in both
Services Council.                                                                Mature entrants normally        traditional and innovative settings. Many opportunities involve inter-
       Applicants who meet, or are working towards, the academic entry           HNC in a relevant subject       professional learning. Assessed practice will be supervised by qualified
requirements will be interviewed by University lecturers and practising social   (especially Social Care or      practice teachers.
workers to confirm their readiness for social work education in terms of          Social Sciences) plus English
experience and interpersonal skills.                                             and Mathematics @ S Grade       Career Prospects
       The qualification promotes professional development in relation to         (at 1 or 2) or equivalent.      The University’s social work graduates have an excellent reputation
knowledge and understanding, skills and abilities, and ethical and personal      Years 2 and 3 Exceptionally,
                                                                                                                 with employers. Professionally qualified social work graduates find
commitment. In Year 1, as well as sociology, psychology and social policy,       entry may be possible if an     employment in local authority social services; the voluntary or independent
students begin the study of social work. Individual tutorials continue           applicant has completed the     sectors; in health or education. They may work in a variety of settings
throughout the course.                                                           same or equivalent modules      providing services in relation to children and families; community care
       The University is committed to providing social work education            as the ones for which he or     or criminal justice.
                                                                                 she is seeking exemption.
for mature students and those with caring commitments. We welcome                                                Professional Recognition
                                                                                 Duration
applications from a wide range of people, including individuals from black                                       The programme meets the requirements of the Scottish Government and
                                                                                 BA Hons 4 years
and minority ethnic communities and people with disabilities.                                                    has been approved by the Scottish Social Services Council (SSSC).
                                                                                 Contact
Course Content                                                                   Anne Ritchie
Year 1                                                                           0800 027 1000
Year 1 includes sociology, psychology and social policy modules, and             (44 141 848 7044 outwith
social work modules introducing ideas about the nature of social work,           UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
and discrimination and disadvantage. Students also undertake ten days
in-practice learning.
Year 2
Year 2 includes lifespan development and issues in family life as well as
introduction to social work practice and a module in communication skills.
Students also complete 20 days in-practice learning.
214     215




Sport
216                                                                                                                                                                                                                  217

Get ahead in the exciting                                                                                   Sport
                                                                                                                                                                                             Part-time option also
                                                                                                                                                                                             available, contact

and expanding sport and
                                                                                                                                                                                             University Direct tel


leisure industry.                                                                                           Exercise & Health                                                                0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                                                                                                                                             uni-direct@uws.ac.uk




Sport teaching facilities include:                                             Section contents             This degree programme is designed to build on                                    UCAS
•      Cybex computerised muscle-testing equipment                             Exercise & Health      217   knowledge, skills and experience gained during                                   CB69 P BSc/EH
•      sport science laboratory on the Hamilton Campus with technology         Sport Coaching         218   HND study.                                                                       Campus
       that allows technique and tactics to be analysed. Physiological         Sport Coaching (DipHE) 220                                                                                    Paisley
       equipment includes a GPS system, portable lactate testing and           Sport Development      222   The overriding ethos of this programme is to develop autonomous exercise         Entry
       VO2max equipment, which enable athlete assessment                       Sport Development            practitioners capable of high-quality exercise testing and prescription, for     Entry to Year 3 will be
•      sports injuries clinic and exercise physiology laboratory on the        (DipHE)                224   health and performance benefits, in normal and specialised populations.           considered for applicants
                                                                                                            Subject content is delivered via lectures and seminars, with practical           with an HND in Fitness,
       Paisley Campus                                                          Sports Therapy         226
                                                                                                            physiological testing within the laboratory; exercise testing and prescription   Health and Exercise, Sports
Students also enjoy access to resources across the campuses including sports                                under field conditions.                                                           and Exercise Science or
halls; conditioning gymnasiums; fitness suites; floodlit, third-generation                                                                                                                     HND containing similar
all-weather pitches; full-sized turf pitches; and training areas.                                           Course Content                                                                   subject content. Preferential
                                                                                                            Year 3                                                                           consideration will be given to
A sporting career                                                                                           In Year 3, students will study exercise physiology, nutrition, exercise          students with superior marks
Employment prospects in a growing number of sports and health-related                                       psychology, drugs in health and exercise and sports injuries with an             or Merit profile; evidence
roles include:                                                                                              optional research methods module for those intending to progress to the          of industry experience (in
•      lifestyle officer                                                                                     Honours year.                                                                    addition to mandatory
•      active schools co-ordinator                                                                                                                                                           placement); voluntary work
•      exercise and health development officer                                                               Year 4 (Honours)                                                                 in appropriate sector and
•      health promotion officer                                                                              In Year 4, students will study exercise for special populations, cardiac         holding (or working towards/
•      sports coach                                                                                         rehabilitation, nutrition and immunology, pharmacology in exercise and           attended workshops)
                                                                                                            health and will carry out a research thesis.                                     recognised NGB qualification
•      strength and conditioning coach                                                                                                                                                       e.g. American College of
•      postgraduate researcher                                                                              Career Prospects                                                                 Sports Medicine (ACSM)
•      sport performance analyst                                                                            Graduates in this area are to be found in a variety of roles including GP        Certified Fitness Instructor
•      sport and exercise scientist                                                                         Referral; Cardiac Rehabilitation Officer; Lifestyle Officers; Active Schools       or Health Fitness Specialist.
                                                                                                            Co-ordinator; Exercise and Health Development Officers and Health                 Duration
                                                                                                            Promotion Officers. For those interested in further study, Masters degree         BSc 1 year
                                                                                                            programmes are available across the UK in areas such as exercise                 BSc Hons 2 years
                                                                                                            physiology, strength and conditioning and exercise science.                      Contact
                                                                                                                                                                                             Scott Murray Graham
                                                                                                                                                                                             0800 027 1000
                                                                                                                                                                                             (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                                                                                                                             UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
218                                                                                                                                                                                                                    219

Sport
                                                                               Part-time option also
                                                                               available, contact
                                                                               University Direct tel

Sport Coaching                                                                 0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                               uni-direct@uws.ac.uk




This programme is built around achieving                                       UCAS                           Course Content                                                                   All students will be required
athlete-centred goals that are influenced by policy,                            CX6C H BSc/SpC                 The curriculum is structured in 4 levels of study, each valued at 120 credits.   to successfully complete a
age, maturation, ability and the athlete’s own goals.                          Campus                         In order to be awarded an Honours degree, students must achieve 480              Disclosure Scotland Check
                                                                               Hamilton                                                                                                        at the point of entry to the
By the end of the programme, students will be able                                                            credits. The degree design provides for an exit point at Level 3 with an
                                                                               Entry                                                                                                           course. Candidates may
to work independently and take on programme                                                                   ordinary degree (360 credits) or at Level 2 with a Diploma (240 credits).        be required to attend an
                                                                               Year 1 3 Highers at Grade
management in a sport coaching setting, while                                                                 Year 1                                                                           interview.
                                                                               BBC or above or equivalent;
also having a commitment to their own continued                                for mature students (over      Subjects will include foundations of coaching, personal development in           This programme will develop
development.                                                                   21) relevant experience of     sport, organisation of sport, foundations of sport science, and issues in sport. skills and knowledge that
The course places emphasis on the theory of sports coaching, to enable         and/or a strong interest in                                                                                     will allow students to
                                                                               sports coaching or voluntary   Year 2
students to develop a fuller understanding of the profession through                                                                                                                           design and run coaching
                                                                               leadership.                    Core subjects include motor learning and performance, sport biomechanics
classroom-based learning. This includes practical and applied sessions, to                                                                                                                     programmes.
                                                                                                              for coaches, methods of enquiry in sport, coaching practice, and the
underpin the knowledge required to become an effective coach. Applicants       Year 2 HNC/CertHE in                                                                                            Duration
                                                                                                              physiology of training.                                                          BSc 3 years
for the course are encouraged to attend applicant information days to          a relevant discipline.
enable them to speak with staff and current students and to learn more                                        Year 3                                                                           BSc Hons 4 years
                                                                               Year 3 HND/DipHE in a
                                                                                                              Core subjects include performance analysis in sport, sport performance           Contact
about the content and structure of the programme.                              relevant discipline, e.g.
                                                                                                              physiology, advanced coaching practice, research methods in sport, and           Mark McKenna
       The programme covers the factors relevant to sporting performance –     Sport Coaching with Sport
                                                                                                                                                                                               0800 027 1000
sports psychology, physiology, biomechanics tactics and decision-making,       Development or Fitness         mental skills training.
                                                                                                                                                                                               (44 141 848 7044 outwith
and models of athlete development – and marries the theoretical aspects        Health and Exercise.           Year 4 (Honours)                                                                 UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
of these subjects to their application in coaching situations. During the      Please note: applicants        Core subjects include dissertation, coaching issues: children, coaching
course, all students will coach local schoolchildren in the first year and go   are expected to have           issues: adults, and professional development.
on coaching placements in the second and third year.                           Mathematics at S Grade 3
                                                                               or equivalent.                 Progression
       Alongside these scientific aspects of sport performance, the course
                                                                                                              This programme fulfils the requirements for entry to a number of
also provides an introduction to the management and development of             Applications for advanced      postgraduate programmes in management, sport, leisure and other
sport. Additionally, the course provides other key transferable skills such    standing onto Year 2 or 3 of
                                                                                                              related disciplines.
as information technology application, communication skills and objective      the BSc in Sport Coaching
problem-solving.                                                               will be accepted from mature
       Students will be required to purchase kit (tracksuit, polo shirts,      students with a level 3 or
                                                                               above coaching award,
sweatshirt). Students with financial hardship will be able to apply to
                                                                               a demonstrable history
Student Services for help towards the cost.
                                                                               of attending professional
       In producing this programme, consultation has been sought from          development short courses
national sport organisations, national governing bodies, sport development     run by their own NGB
officers and expert coaches.                                                    or Sports Coach UK or
       Upon successful completion of Year 1 you will have the opportunity      other relevant agencies,
to articulate to Year 2 of the BA Sport Development if you so choose.          and significant coaching
                                                                               experience.
220                                                                                                                                                                                                 221

Sport
DipHE Sport Coaching

This course will develop skills and knowledge that                                 UCAS                            Consultation has been sought from national sport organisations, national
will allow students to design and conduct basic                                    CX6C H DipHE/SpC                governing bodies, sport development officers and expert coaches in the
coaching programmes. These programmes will                                         Campus                          development of this course.
be built around achieving athlete-centred goals                                    Hamilton                              You will also have the opportunity to articulate to Year 2 of the DipHE
that are influenced by age, maturation, ability                                     Entry                           in Sport Development if you so choose.
                                                                                   Year 1 2 Highers at Grade
and the athlete’s own goals. By the end of the                                                                     Course Content
                                                                                   C or above or equivalent;
course, students will be able to work effectively                                  for mature students (over       The curriculum is structured in 2 levels of study, each valued at 120 credits.
and independently in a routine sport coaching                                      21), relevant experience of     In order to be awarded a Diploma you must achieve 240 credits.
environment, with little supervision, while also                                   and/or a strong interest in
having a commitment to their own continued                                         sports coaching or voluntary
                                                                                                                   Year 1
development.                                                                       leadership.                     Subjects will include foundations of coaching, personal development in
                                                                                                                   sport, organisation of sport, foundations of sport science, and issues
The nature of this course means that a significant amount of time is spent          Year 2 HNC/CertHE in a          in sport.
in classroom-based situations. While we take every opportunity to display          relevant discipline (contact
ideas and theory in an applied and practical manner, it is important that          course leader for more          Year 2
                                                                                   details).                       Core subjects include motor learning and performance, sport biomechanics
new students realise that we adopt a long-term approach to developing
                                                                                   Please note:                    for coaches, methods of enquiry in sport, coaching practice, and the
practical skills that are underpinned by the knowledge required to become
                                                                                   • applicants are expected       physiology of training.
an effective coach. In order for students to make sure that they have chosen
the correct programme, we encourage early application and attendance at              to have Mathematics at        Progression
                                                                                     S Grade 3 or equivalent.
information days, so that they can learn more about the programme and                                              The vast majority of students use this qualification to gain entry to the third
                                                                                   • all students will be
meet current students.                                                                                             year of the BSc (Hons) Sport Coaching degree programme (see page 218).
                                                                                     required to successfully
       The course covers the factors relevant to sporting performance –              complete a Disclosure
sports psychology, physiology, biomechanics, tactics and decision-making,            Scotland check at the point
and models of athlete development – and marries the theoretical aspects              of entry to the programme.
of these subjects to their application in coaching situations. All students will   • candidates may be
coach local schoolchildren in the first year and go on a coaching placement           required to attend
in the second year.                                                                  an interview.
       Alongside the scientific aspects of sport performance, the course            Duration
also provides an introduction to the management and development of                 DipHE 2 years
sport. Students will be expected to apply this knowledge in the workplace.         Contact
Additionally, other key transferable skills such as information technology         Mark McKenna
                                                                                   0800 027 1000
application, communication skills and objective problem-solving are provided.
                                                                                   (44 141 848 7044 outwith
       Students will be required to purchase kit (tracksuit, polo shirts,          UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
sweatshirt). Students with financial hardship will be able to apply to
Student Services for help towards the cost.
222                                                                                                                                                                                                                      223

Sport
                                                                               Part-time option also
                                                                               available, contact
                                                                               University Direct tel

Sport Development                                                              0800 027 1000 or e-mail
                                                                               uni-direct@uws.ac.uk




This programme will develop skills and knowledge                               UCAS                           Course Content                                                                    All students will be required
that will allow students to work as effective Sport                            Hamilton – C600 H BA/SD        The curriculum is structured in 4 levels of study, each valued at 120 credits.    to successfully complete a
Development practitioners. This involves showing                               Paisley – C600 P BA/SD         In order to be awarded an Honours degree, students must achieve 480               Disclosure Scotland check
                                                                               Campus                                                                                                           at the point of entry on to
awareness and value of ethical and cultural issues                                                            credits. The degree design provides for an exit point at Level 3 with an
                                                                               Hamilton*, Paisley**                                                                                             the course. Candidates
in sport and society. By the end of the programme                                                             ordinary degree (360 credits) or at Level 2 with a Diploma (240 credits).         may be required to attend
                                                                               Entry
students will be able to work independently and take                                                          Year 1                                                                            an interview.
                                                                               Year 1 3 Highers at Grade
on programme leadership in a sport development                                 BBC or above or equivalent;    Subjects will include foundations of coaching, personal development               Duration
setting, while also having a commitment to their own                           for mature students (over      in sport, organisation of sport, foundations of sport science, and issues         BA 3 years
continued development.                                                         21) relevant experience,       in sport.                                                                         BA Hons 4 years
                                                                               including experience of                                                                                          Contact
The programme places emphasis on the theory and practice of sports                                            Year 2
                                                                               and/or a strong interest in                                                                                      Catriona Tedford
development, to enable students to develop a fuller understanding of                                          Core subjects include sport and communities, delivering sport development,
                                                                               sports coaching or voluntary                                                                                     (Hamilton) or Alasdair
the profession through classroom-based learning. This includes practical       leadership.                    methods of enquiry in sport, applied event management, and physical               Galloway (Paisley)
and applied sessions, to underpin the knowledge required to become a                                          activity and health.                                                              0800 027 1000
successful practitioner. Students will also have regular contact with a wide   Year 2 HNC/CertHE in a
                                                                                                                                                                                                (44 141 848 7044 outwith
range of sport development practitioners.
                                                                               relevant discipline (contact   Year 3                                                                            UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
                                                                               number below for more          Core subjects include sport marketing, research methods in sport, sport
        Applicants for the programme are encouraged to attend applicant        details).                                                                                                       ** Years 3 and 4 offered at
information days to enable them to speak with staff and current students                                      policy, sport development practice, and social issues in sport.
                                                                                                                                                                                                Paisley Campus and entry is
                                                                               Year 3 The minimum
and to learn more about the content and structure of the programme.                                           Year 4 (Honours)                                                                  available at Year 3 only, see
                                                                               requirement will be to
        The major factors relevant to sport development are covered –                                         Core subjects include dissertation, developing potential, sport and society,      entry conditions opposite.
                                                                               have an HND/DipHE in
professional and ethical practice, sport in society, sport management.         a relevant discipline, e.g.    and professional development.                                                    *All four years of this
These are married with the theoretical aspects of these subjects to their      Sport Coaching with Sport      Progression                                                                       programme are offered at
practical application within sport development.                                Development, Sport and                                                                                           the Hamilton Campus and
                                                                                                              This programme fulfils the requirements for entry to a number of
        The programme is about developing skills and knowledge to support      Recreation Management.                                                                                           entry is available at Year 1,
                                                                                                              postgraduate programmes in management, sport, leisure and other
graduates in the design of strategies and programmes leading to the            However, applications will                                                                                       2 or 3, see entry conditions
                                                                                                              related disciplines.
achievement of policy-based goals such as greater participation, improved      be also assessed on broader                                                                                      opposite.
health, improving social responsibility, and developing talent. Graduates      issues such as experience,
of this programme will, therefore, be able to work independently and           other relevant qualifications
undertake programme management within a sport development setting,             and reference from HND
                                                                               course tutor.
while also having a commitment to their own continued development.
        In producing this programme, we have consulted with national sport     Please note: applicants
organisations, national governing bodies, sport development officers and        are expected to have
expert coaches. Students may be required to purchase kit (tracksuit, polo      Mathematics at S Grade 3
                                                                               or equivalent.
shirts, sweatshirt). Students with financial hardship will be able to apply
to Student Services for help towards cost.
        Upon successful completion of Year 1 at the Hamilton Campus you
will have the opportunity to articulate to Year 2 of the BSc (Hons) Sport
Coaching if you so choose.
224                                                                                                                                                                                                225

Sport
DipHE Sport Development

This programme will develop skills and knowledge                                  UCAS                            Course Content
that will allow you to design basic strategies and                                C601 H DipHE/SD                 Year 1
programmes that can contribute to the achievement                                 Campus                          Subjects will include foundations of coaching, personal development in sport,
of policy-based goals such as greater participation,                              Hamilton                        organisation of sport, foundations of sport science, and issues in sport.
improved health, improving social responsibility,                                 Entry
                                                                                  Year 1 2 Highers at Grade       Year 2
and developing talent.                                                                                            Core subjects include sport and communities, delivering sport development,
                                                                                  C or above or equivalent;
The programme covers factors relevant to sport development – understanding        for mature students (over       methods of enquiry in sport, applied event management, and physical
sport performance, sport in society and sport management – and marries            21), relevant experience,       activity and health.
the theoretical aspects of these subjects to their practical application within   including experience of
                                                                                  and/or a strong interest in     Progression
a sport development context in the workplace. Additionally, the programme                                         The vast majority of students use this qualification to gain entry to the third
                                                                                  sports coaching or voluntary
provides other key transferable skills such as information technology                                             year of the BA (Hons) Sport Development degree programme (see page 222).
                                                                                  leadership.
application, communication skills and objective problem-solving.
       During the programme, you will complete a work experience                  Year 2 HNC/CertHE in a
opportunity and organise and conduct an event. This will enable you to            relevant discipline.
develop a CV at the same time as gaining your qualification. In producing          Please note:
this programme, consultation has been sought from national sport                  • applicants are expected
organisations, national governing bodies, sport development officers and             to have Mathematics at
expert coaches.                                                                     S Grade 3 or equivalent.
                                                                                  • all students will be
       Students will be required to purchase kit (tracksuit, polo shirts,
                                                                                    required to successfully
sweatshirt). Students with financial hardship will be able to apply to Student       complete a Disclosure
Services for help towards the cost.                                                 Scotland check at the point
       You will also have the opportunity to articulate to Year 2 DipHE Sport       of entry to the programme.
Coaching (see page 220), if you so choose.                                        • candidates may be
                                                                                    required to attend
                                                                                    an interview.
                                                                                  Duration
                                                                                  DipHE 2 years
                                                                                  Contact
                                                                                  Catriona Tedford
                                                                                  0800 027 1000
                                                                                  (44 141 848 7044 outwith
                                                                                  UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
226                                                                                                                                         227

Sport
Sports Therapy

This programme is designed to allow students to                                   UCAS
build on HND Sports Therapy. Students undertake                                   BC96 P BSc/ST
analysis of issues relating to sport rehabilitation                               Campus
practice and this enables sport therapy students                                  Paisley
to demonstrate appropriate knowledge and                                          Entry
                                                                                  Year 3 Entry to Year 3 will
understanding with reference to areas of practice
                                                                                  be considered for applicants
and study.                                                                        with HND in Sports Therapy.
Course Content                                                                    Preferential consideration
Year 3                                                                            will be given to students
In Year 3, topics include: kinesiology, nutrition of sport and health, exercise   with superior marks or
physiology and sports psychology. Attaining the necessary academic                Merit profile.
achievement will allow progression to Honours level.                              Duration
                                                                                  BSc 1 year
Year 4 (Honours)                                                                  BSc Hons 2 years               I’m Katrina
Students will further advance their critical knowledge and understanding of       Contact                        from Carluke
issues related to injuries and rehabilitation. Subsequently, students will put    Colin Brow                     I’m 20
into practice a defined project of related research.                               0800 027 1000                  I’m studying
                                                                                  (44 141 848 7044 outwith       Sports Development.
Career Prospects                                                                                                 I plan to take a gap
                                                                                  UK) uni-direct@uws.ac.uk
Opportunities for graduate employment exist for successful graduates.                                            year to travel the world
Also potential employment includes opportunities within the sports, exercise                                     and then come back and
and rehabilitation sectors.                                                                                      study to be a teacher.
                                                                                                                 I like dancing and
                                                                                                                 going on holiday.
                                                                                                                 I don’t like busy
                                                                                                                 shopping centres when
                                                                                                                 everyone walks in front
                                                                                                                 of you – so annoying!
228                                                                                                                                                                                                                     229

Applying
                                                                               Section contents                   the Universities and Colleges Admissions Service      Clearing – late applications stage
                                                                               Applications                 228   (UCAS). This includes applications to the second      If you have not yet applied or secured a place,
                                                                               International applications   231   and subsequent years of programmes.                   then the UCAS Clearing system allows you to
to UWS                                                                         Finance
                                                                               Further information
                                                                                                            233
                                                                                                            240
                                                                                                                  UCAS applications are made online at
                                                                                                                  www.ucas.com You can complete your
                                                                                                                                                                        make late application to us until the end of
                                                                                                                                                                        September for remaining vacancies; you should
                                                                               Important notice                                                                         contact University Direct 0800 027 1000
                                                                                                                  application at a time and location that best
                                                                               to all applicants            236                                                         (44 141 848 7044) for advice on late application
                                                                                                                  suits wherever you have internet access. You
                                                                               Index                        238                                                         procedures and the availability of places on the
                                                                                                                  can save your application to complete later.
                                                                               Learning & Teaching          235                                                         University’s programmes.
                                                                                                                  School and college students can save their draft
                                                                                                                  application and amend it as required before their     Mature applicants
UCAS application deadline for                         required to gain admission to a programme.                  adviser submits their final application. Personal      (full-time/part-time)
2010 entry – 15 January 2010                          Entry requirements are intended only as a guide             statements and references can be prepared in          We welcome applications from mature students
(later applications may be accepted until the end     and other factors may also be taken into account            advance and cut and pasted into the application       and may take work experience and relevant
of June, subject to availability)                     when your application is considered. For advice on          as necessary. Support and advice is available at      professional training to account when making
                                                      entrance requirements and the suitability of your           www.ucas.com UCAS information on courses
Applications                                                                                                                                                            a decision on application. Students coming to
                                                      planned programme of study contact University               and programmes is also online and is
All applicants are expected to provide evidence of                                                                                                                      University with a college qualification may wish
                                                      Direct 0800 027 1000 (44 141 848 7044).                     updated regularly.
proficiency in Mathematics and English, usually at                                                                                                                       to take the “Next Steps at University” module
least at Standard Grade 1, 2 or 3 (or equivalent).    Admissions requirements to                                  UCAS contact details                                  which is specifically designed for college students
                                                      undergraduate courses                                       UCAS Application Requests                             who are continuing their studies to degree level.
In addition to the minimum entrance requirements,
                                                      For admission to degree programmes, applicants              UCAS                                                  Further details on this option are available from
some programmes ask for specific subject
                                                      should possess as a minimum passes in five                   Rosehill, New Barn Lane                               the Centre for Lifelong Learning on
passes and others are recommended. Details of
                                                      subjects to include three at Higher Grade C or              Cheltenham, Gloucestershire GL52 3LZ                  0141 848 3193 (44 141 848 3193).
competitive entrance requirements are given under
                                                      above; or passes in five subjects to include two             tel 0871 468 0468
the relevant course entries in this catalogue.                                                                                                                          Students with disabilities
                                                      at GCE Advanced Level; or an appropriate award              (0870 112 2200 outside UK)
•      for applicants with Irish Leaving Certificate                                                                                                                     Applicants should contact the appropriate
                                                      of the SQA, Edexcel, the AQA or OCR; or Irish               e-mail enquiries@ucas.ac.uk
       (ILC) Higher level qualifications, the SQA                                                                                                                        Admissions staff listed if they require further
                                                      Leaving Certificate with five subjects at Grade C,            web www.ucas.com
       Higher subjects and requirements can be                                                                                                                          information about their chosen course of study.
                                                      or above, to include at least three subjects at the
       taken as an approximate guide to entry.                                                                    When to apply                                         Applicants are also advised to contact the
                                                      Higher level; or other equivalent qualifications
       Further details of ILC requirements can be                                                                 Applications should reach UCAS between                Enabling Support Team, who support students
                                                      acceptable to the University. If you have less than
       obtained from the Admissions contacts                                                                      1 September 2009 and 15 January 2010.                 with disabilities and specific learning difficulties.
                                                      three Highers you may be able to gain entry to a
       listed in the prospectus – call University                                                                 This ensures that your application is given equal     It is important that the University is notified
                                                      Certificate/Diploma programme and progress to
       Direct on 0800 027 1000                                                                                    consideration. It is not necessary to have taken,     of students’ disabilities in advance, to enable
                                                      related degree study upon successful completion.
       (44 141 848 7044 outside UK).                                                                              or know the result of, qualifying examinations        individual support mechanisms to be put in
•      the Advanced Higher is also recognised         In addition to standard qualifications, such as              before applying to the University as a conditional    place prior to commencement of studies.
       for admissions purposes and for certain        Highers, Advanced Highers and A Levels, University          offer can be made at an early stage. Applications     Call 44 (0)1292 886267 (Ayr), 44 (0)1387
       programmes the University will consider        of the West of Scotland will consider other                 sent after 15 January 2010 will be considered         702066 (Dumfries), 44 (0)1698 894448
       applicants with a combination of Highers/      combinations of qualifications and experience,               if there are suitable vacancies. You can select       (Hamilton), or 44 (0)141 848 3518 (Paisley).
       Advanced Highers or AS Levels/A Levels in      such as International Baccalaureate, Scottish               up to five programmes. University of the West          Nursing and midwifery applications
       certain subjects for Year 2 entry.             Baccalaureate, Professional Development Awards              of Scotland’s institution code is U40 and the         Course        Campus Intake Application
•      applicants with HNCs that contain less than    and Youth Achievement Awards, in support of                 individual course codes are listed at the beginning   Adult Nursing A,D,H,P Feb 2010 CATCH*
       120 credit points will be required to make     your application, including application for                 of each course entry in this catalogue. The codes                   A,D,H,P Sep 2010  UCAS
       up this credit deficit prior to graduation.     advanced entry.                                             contain the appropriate campus indicator              Mental Health    H    Feb 2010 CATCH*
•      the University will accept HND qualifications   How to apply – UCAS                                         (A, D, H or P). A fee of £17 must be sent with                      A,D,H,P Sep 2010  UCAS
       as a means of entry, based either on specific   All applications for entry to full-time Honours             your completed UCAS form. Alternatively, you can      Midwifery†       P    Feb 2010 CATCH*
       grades in the graded units or on merits.       degree, degree, Diploma and CertHE programmes,              enter one choice only on the UCAS form and pay                        H,P   Sep 2010  UCAS
Competition for places means that qualifications       including those in Nursing and Midwifery, starting          a reduced fee of £7. Full instructions on payment     Campus key
above the minimum pass standard are usually           in September 2010 should be submitted through               can be found in the “How to Apply” section.           A Ayr / D Dumfries / H Hamilton / P Paisley
230                                                                                                                                                                                                                     231
*For Feb 2010 entry it is recommended that application     Applying to UWS in 2010                                 2010                                                  Scottish Wider Access Programme
should be made through CATCH before 31 August 2009.                                                                15 January                                            As part of our commitment to widening access to
All September 2010 applications should be made             2009
                                                                                                                   •    this is the recommended UCAS deadline for        courses, the University is a participating member
through UCAS.                                              April onwards
†The Feb 2010 intake for the Midwifery programme is
                                                                                                                        applications to the majority of courses.         of the Scottish Wider Access Programme (SWAP).
                                                           •       start to think about what you’d like to study
                                                                                                                   End February                                          SWAP provides an alternative route into Higher
currently under review. For more information contact               and what you see as your career goals.
                                                                                                                   •    applicants can refer themselves through          Education through an Access course that consists
Maria Cummings, tel 0141 848 4271.                         •       contact University Direct 0800 027 1000
                                                                                                                        UCAS Extra.                                      of one year’s full-time study of SQA modules
From September 2009 all full-time pre-registration                 (44 141 848 7044 outside UK) or e-mail
                                                                                                                   End March                                             with guaranteed entry to Higher Education
nursing and midwifery applications will be processed               uni-direct@uws.ac.uk for advice
                                                                                                                   •    universities and colleges should aim to have     for successful candidates. Access courses in a
through UCAS (for details see page 228). [If you                   on options.
                                                                                                                        sent decisions on all applications received      range of subjects are offered at various colleges
have already applied through CATCH for 2010 entry,         •       ask about our info sessions relevant to you.
there is no need to duplicate this through UCAS as all                                                                  by 15 January.                                   throughout the West of Scotland. For more
                                                           May–June
applications in the CATCH system before 31 August                                                                  Beginning May                                         information about SWAP call 0800 731 0949
                                                           •       school and college exam periods across
2009 will be processed by CATCH].                                                                                  •    universities and colleges must have sent         or e-mail swapwest@btconnect.com
                                                                   the UK.
                                                                                                                        decisions on all applications received by        or contact University Direct 0800 027 1000
Contact details                                            August
                                                                                                                        15 January.                                      (44 141 848 7044).
UCAS – see page 228                                        •       exam results out – your indicator for
                                                                                                                   Mid May
CATCH – Centralised Applications to Nursing                        study possibilities.                                                                                  International applications
                                                                                                                   •    applicants must make their decisions on first
and Midwifery Training Clearing House;                     1 September                                                                                                   International students should apply for full-time
                                                                                                                        choice of institution and insurance choice.
tel 0131 220 8660 (44 131 220 8660 outside UK)             •       UCAS starts accepting applications online                                                             undergraduate programmes online through
                                                                                                                   30 June
or write to: NBS CATCH,                                            at www.ucas.com                                                                                       Universities and Colleges Admissions Service
                                                                                                                   •    last date for receipt of applications for
PO Box 21, Edinburgh EH2 2YS.                              Once you’ve submitted your application,                                                                       (UCAS) – see page 228. You should apply
                                                                                                                        immediate consideration. Those received
                                                           you’ll receive a welcome letter from UCAS                                                                     independently unless your school or college
Age restrictions                                                                                                        after this date held for Clearing.
                                                           confirming your details and the courses you have                                                               is registered with UCAS. You can access all
Applicants should be 17 or over when commencing                                                                    August–September
                                                           applied to. Your letter will include your applicant                                                           the information required at www.ucas.com –
their nursing or midwifery course at the University.                                                               •    UCAS Clearing.
                                                           ID number which you will need so you can follow                                                               however if you do not have access to the internet,
Financial support                                                                                                  September
                                                           the progress of your application and respond                                                                  you can contact UCAS at the address shown
Nursing and Midwifery students are exempt from                                                                     •    University term begins.
                                                           to offers using the online UCAS Track service at                                                              on page 229.
course tuition fees and eligible for a non means-          www.ucas.com                                                                                                  Applicants resident overseas should not leave their
tested bursary (personal allowance) and, where             October 2009                                            Scottish Baptist College applications
                                                                                                                                                                         home country in order to attend the University
applicable, a means-tested dependant’s allowance           Campus Open Days – find out more about                   The Scottish Baptist College is located on Paisley
                                                                                                                                                                         until they have received an unconditional offer of
administered through the Student Awards Agency             studying at UWS:                                        Campus and its programmes are validated by
                                                                                                                                                                         admission. As the level of overseas tuition fees is
for Scotland (SAAS). At present, current levels            •       Dumfries Campus Open Day – Thursday             the University. Courses on offer include the
                                                                                                                                                                         substantial, prospective students should check the
of personal allowance for all students are                         1st October, 3–7pm (event also covers entry     Degree of Bachelor of Divinity in Theology and
                                                                                                                                                                         approximate amount of these fees for the duration
£6100 per annum*. The dependant’s allowance                        from college sector)                            Pastoral Studies, Diploma in Applied Theology
                                                                                                                                                                         of their study, and the maintenance costs to cover
is income assessed and is intended to support              •       Hamilton Campus Open Day – Tuesday 6th          through work-based learning and Diploma in
                                                                                                                                                                         books, accommodation and living expenses should
students’ dependants.                                              October, 3–7pm                                  Pastoral Studies.
                                                                                                                                                                         also be considered. Information on this can usually
*Please note: this rate is reviewed on an ongoing basis.   •       Paisley Campus Open Day – Wednesday 7th         The College is increasingly attracting non-Baptists   be obtained from British Council Offices overseas
                                                                   October, 3–7pm                                  who are looking to train for full-time ministry,      and government educational agencies in your own
NB: The University also offers a part-time DipHE Nursing
                                                           •       Ayr Campus Open Day – Thursday 8th              chaplaincy or RE teaching. The College also offers    or home country.
programme by open learning, aimed at enrolled nurses.
                                                                   October, 3–7pm (event also covers entry         a range of part-time courses, both on-site and
Further details are available from Mary Milligan on                                                                                                                      Students paying international fees must pay 50%
                                                                   from college sector)                            in churches.
0141 849 4202.                                                                                                                                                           on enrolment, the balance being due at the start
                                                           November 2009
                                                           Information sessions for college students and           For further information, please check                 of Trimester 2. The University has a new online
                                                           adult returners: -                                      www.scottishbaptistcollege.org,                       payment facility allowing students to pay tuition
                                                           •       Paisley Campus – Tuesday 3 November             give the College a call on 0141 848 3988 or           fees or University accommodation by debit or
                                                                   (1–3pm & 5–7pm)                                 e-mail scottishbaptistcollege@uws.ac.uk               credit card. The online payment facility will allow
                                                           •       Hamilton Campus – Wednesday                                                                           you to make single, one-off payments or you can
                                                                   4 November (1–3pm & 5–7pm)                                                                            set up a recurring payment in the same way as
232                                                                                                                                                                                                            233

                                                                                                        Finance
a direct debit. Both methods allow you to print        Qualification                     Minimum
a receipt for your reference and you will receive                                     requirement
an e-mail confirmation of your payment details.         International English           Average score
Payments can also be made by cash/bank transfer.       Language Testing System          of 6, and for
Students from overseas may be interested to note       (IELTS)                       each component 5
that the University is involved in the International   TOEFL Paper-based test                550
Foundation Programme – Scotland which provides         Computer-based test                   213
access to the degree courses offered by Scottish       Internet-based test                   80
universities, and certain participating colleges.      University of the West               Pass
Three foundation programmes are offered                of Scotland English Language
for international students to give them solid          Foundation Course B                              Scottish & EU students                                Degree courses in Nursing
preparation for undergraduate study at university      Cambridge ESOL Certificate          Grade C       Applicants normally resident in Scotland or in        and Midwifery
in Scotland. Specialised programmes and expert         in Advanced English (CAE)                        other EU countries (excluding England, Wales          Health Department bursaries are available for
advice are offered to IFPS students.                   Cambridge ESOL Certificate          Grade C       and Northern Ireland) may be eligible for fee         these courses. For further information, please
For further details contact:                           of Proficiency in English (CPE)                   payment by the Student Awards Agency for              contact the School of Health, Nursing &
International Foundation                               Cambridge ESOL Certificate         Pass in all    Scotland (SAAS).                                      Midwifery on 44 (0)141 849 4200.
Programme – Scotland                                   in English Language Skills          4 skills     Application for tuition fee payment                   English, Welsh and Northern
77 Southpark Avenue, Glasgow,                          (CELS) Higher                                    You must apply to the Student Awards Agency           Irish students
G12 8LE, Scotland, UK                                  City & Guilds International          Pass        for Scotland (SAAS) annually for the University to    For applicants normally resident in England,
tel 44 (0)141 357 0123                                 ESOL Expert or Mastery                           receive tuition fees. Applications can be processed   Wales and Northern Ireland there will be a
fax 44 (0)141 357 0199                                 International Baccalaureate        Grade 5       by SAAS from May each year and you are advised        requirement to pay an annual tuition fee,
e-mail ifps@mac.com                                    Standard English                                 to apply at this time. You must bring your SAAS       subject to means testing by the appropriate
website www.ifps.ac/                                   International Baccalaureate        Grade 4       Award letter on your enrolment day to confirm          Local Education Authority (LEA) or Library
English language requirements                          Higher English                                   funding. If you do not have your Award letter, you    Board. It is important that students apply to
It is essential that you have a good command of        International Foundation           Grade C       will be treated as self-financing and be required to   the appropriate funding body to have their fees,
written and spoken English if you wish to excel        Programme Scotland English                       pay a standard one-module deposit (£200 at time       or a portion of their fees, paid. Applicants should
in your studies. As a rough guide, a TOEFL score       International GCSE English         Grade C       of print) to continue the enrolment process. For      contact their Local Education Authority or the
of 550 or above, or an IELTS score of 6 or above       as Second Language                               more details of support available to students and     free student support line on 0800 731 9133
(minimum of 5 in each component) is acceptable         London Chamber of Commerce Third Level           to apply for funding, visit www.saas.gov.uk           or www.dfes.gov.uk/studentsupport
as evidence of proficiency in English. The table        English for Business Examination
                                                                                                        Student Loans                                         Applicants from the Channel Islands or the Isle of
opposite gives more detail. Other qualifications        London Chamber of Commerce
                                                                                                        Student Loans are processed via the Student           Man – special arrangements exist and you should
may be acceptable.                                     English for Commerce              Third Level
                                                                                                        Loans Company Ltd, tel 0800 40 50 10 or               contact the appropriate student awards section.
                                                       Examination
For further information contact our EFL team,                                                           visit www.slc.co.uk Students should apply             Self-financing students
                                                       London Tests of English             Level 4
tel 44 (0)141 848 3347/fax 44 (0)141 848 3533                                                           via the Student Awards Agency for Scotland            UK & EU students who are not eligible for funding
                                                       (Pearson/Edexcel)
or e-mail david.bowker@uws.ac.uk                                                                        (SAAS) or their Local Education Authority.            are regarded as self-financing students. A standard
                                                       SQA ESOL Higher                    Grade C
                                                                                                        Continuing students ie students who entered           one-module deposit (£200 at time of print) will be
                                                       Trinity College London              Level III
                                                                                                        Higher Education before 1998 should contact           required at time of enrolment and information on
                                                       Integrated Skills in English (ISE)
                                                                                                        the University’s Student Services who will be         instalment plans for any outstanding balances will
                                                                                                        able to help with enquiries on eligibility -          be shown on your invoice. Details of our current
                                                                                                        Ayr Campus tel 44 (0)1292 886267                      tuition fees and our online payment facility can
                                                                                                        Dumfries Campus tel 44 (0)1387 702066                 be found at www.uws.ac.uk/schoolsdepts/
                                                                                                        Hamilton Campus tel 44 (0)1698 283100                 finance/students
                                                                                                        ext 8248
                                                                                                        Paisley Campus tel 44 (0)141 848 3803
234                                                                                                                                                                                                                   235

                                                                                                               Learning & Teaching
Company sponsorship                                     If you would prefer, your tuition fees can be paid
If you are being sponsored by your company, you         over 2 instalments with no discount. A minimum
must provide a letter of authorisation, addressed       first instalment of 50% is required at the time of
to the University on company letterhead or a valid      your enrolment. The second instalment is due at
purchase order at time of enrolment. Failure to         the start of your Trimester 2, but no later than the
do so will result in you being held liable for the      end of the week of formal classes commencing.
outstanding debt and will be required to pay a          University scholarships
standard one-module deposit (£200 at time of            The University is regularly supported by
print) to continue with enrolment.                      organisations who offer scholarships/bursaries
International students                                  to eligible students each year. Students are also
                                                        encouraged to apply to other trust funds for           The prospect of university study can seem               Lectures
Undergraduate fees for international (non-EU)
                                                        additional funding. SAAS (Student Awards Agency        daunting, but we provide all the help and               Lectures last around 1–2 hours and they’re a
students in session 2009/10:
                                                        for Scotland) maintain the Register of Educational     support you will need to make your time at              really important part of your learning. Class sizes
•     arts-based (£9,300)
                                                        Endowments which is a list of educational trusts       university successful.                                  range from small groups to up to 250 students
•     science-based (£10,050)
                                                        in Scotland. They will search their database if you    How is the academic year                                depending on the subject area. The aim is to
*The figures quoted for the University’s international
                                                        complete an enquiry form. Details and advice on        made up?                                                provide you with detailed information about
tuition fees include all tuition, registration and
                                                        scholarships and trust funds are available at your     Our degree courses are made up of modules.              your chosen subject area. You’ll be expected
examination costs.
                                                        local library or the University’s Student Services,    The academic year is split into three trimesters –      to take notes and your lecturer may provide
A number of international scholarships are              telephone 44 (0)141 848 3803 (Ayr, Dumfries            which begin in September, February and June,            supplementary handouts.
available and many of our international students        or Paisley campuses) or 44 (0)1698 283100              lasting around 12 weeks. Most undergraduate             Tutorials & labs
are eligible for an award. More details can be          (Hamilton Campus) or visit www.uws.ac.uk               students begin their course in September each year.     Lasting around 1–2 hours, tutorials are smaller
found at www.uws.ac.uk/international/
                                                        Withdrawal fee                                         Students sit exams twice a year – in January and        classes allowing more interactivity with the
scholarships.asp
                                                        If you change course or withdraw from your             May. Following the first set of exams in January,        lecturer and fellow students. Here, you ask the
Further details on the fees for undergraduate,          course, you must contact the Finance Office to          undergraduate students then begin the second            tutor questions, have in-depth discussion and
postgraduate courses and research opportunities         discuss any financial implications and pro-rata         trimester in February, finishing in May for the          further explore the subject. Labs (2–3 hours)
are available from the University’s Finance             charges. Please note, this is for all students,        second set of exams.                                    provide you with hands-on practical experience
Office on tel 44 (0)141 848 3196/3351/3190               including those sponsored by SAAS.                                                                             of a subject. This is where you really turn
or visit www.uws.ac.uk/schoolsdept/finance/                                                                     In each trimester, you will study 3 modules. You        theory into practice. Whether it’s a science or
students                                                Graduation registration                                will find that for most courses, there are a number      computing lab, you’ll learn the practical aspects
                                                        You will be required to pay a £40 graduation           of ‘core’ modules which you will have to study as       of the subject.
Accommodation within our halls of residence for         registration fee in order to graduate.                 part of your course. You’ll also be able to choose
full-time, self-financing, international students                                                               from a range of optional modules – your course          Examination and assessment
is guaranteed (providing they apply for a place                                                                advisor can help you choose which ones to take          Examination and assessment varies depending
in the halls by the 1st August). At present, a                                                                 if you’re not sure.                                     on the subject or course you are studying.
£1,000 bursary is available towards University                                                                                                                         Some subjects contain only end-of-trimester
accommodation. For more information visit                                                                      How will I learn?                                       examinations, while others are a mixture of
www.uws.ac.uk/international/scholarships.asp                                                                   Most courses feature a mix of teaching methods,         continuous assessment throughout the trimester
                                                                                                               which vary according to your course’s aims and          plus coursework.
If you pay all your tuition fees and accommodation                                                             learning outcomes. These include lectures, labs,
charges in full prior to, or on enrolment,                                                                     tutorials, self-study and, of course, examinations.
providing this is within one week of formal classes                                                            The amount of time you spend in classes depends
commencing, you may be eligible for a discount                                                                 on the subject/course you have chosen and will
of 10% on tuition fees and 5% on accommodation                                                                 vary from year to year. Blackboard is our online
charges. No discounts will be given in the event                                                               learning resource – you log on to Blackboard via
of late arrival for any courses or to students                                                                 the internet and use it to access information that
undertaking discounted courses.                                                                                your course tutors or lecturers post, such as lecture
                                                                                                               handouts and other relevant information about
                                                                                                               your course.
236                                                                                                                                                                                     237

Important notice                                                                                             Complaints procedure                                   Please note: information
                                                                                                             The University is committed to providing               in this prospectus is
                                                                                                                                                                    correct at time of print

to all applicants
                                                                                                             high-quality services for its students. However,
                                                                                                                                                                    but may be subject to
                                                                                                             it recognises that students, applicants, or
                                                                                                                                                                    change at a later date.
                                                                                                             members of the public may have legitimate

University terms & conditions                                                                                complaints about the services or facilities
                                                                                                             provided by the University. Therefore the
                                                                                                             University has a Complaints Procedure which
                                                                                                             should be used in these instances. Further
                                                                                                             details on this procedure are available from
All students will be required, as a condition         The Data Protection Act 1998                           www.uws.ac.uk/schoolsdepts/foi/index.asp
of enrolment, to abide by, and submit to,             The University is registered as a data user with       The remit of the Scottish Public Services
the procedures of the University’s Rules and          the Office of the Information Commissioner.             Ombudsman includes the University, and
Regulations as amended from time to time.             The University holds data relating to its students     complaints that are not satisfactorily resolved
A copy of the current Regulations, including the      for the purposes of maintaining the student record     may be referred to the Ombudsman. Normally
Disciplinary Regulations, can be consulted in the     (including personal and academic details) and          this should be within 12 months of an issue
University libraries and is available on request      management of academic processes (for example,         arising. Further information about the role of
from the Academic Registrar. The University will      academic audits, examination boards and                the Ombudsman is available from
use all reasonable endeavours to deliver courses      awarding of degrees).                                  www.scottishombudsman.org.uk
in accordance with the descriptions as set out in     The University also discloses student information      An inclusive institution
this prospectus. However, the University does not     to a variety of recipients including employees         The University has a tradition of commitment to
provide education to UK undergraduates on a           and agents (including University appointed             the widening of access to Higher Education from
commercial basis. It is also very largely dependent   debt recovery companies) of the University,            all sectors of the community and in attracting
on public funds which the University has to           the University’s Students’ Association, partner        students from under-represented socioeconomic
manage in a way that is efficient and cost effective   institutions of the University, current or potential   backgrounds.
in the context of provision of a diverse range        employers, providers of education and relevant
of courses to a large number of students.             government departments to whom it has a                We aim to build on this reputation as an inclusive
The University therefore:                             statutory obligation to release information.           institution and ensure that our commitment
•      reserves the right to make variations to                                                              extends all applicants and students, regardless
                                                      The University undertakes to maintain student          of age, disability, gender, sexual orientation,
       the contents or methods of delivery of
                                                      data in secure conditions and to process and           race, religion or belief. As a student at any of our
       courses including campus location, to
                                                      disclose data only within the terms of its Data        campuses, you will find that staff will work to
       discontinue courses and to merge and
                                                      Protection notification.                                promote understanding and integration between
       combine courses, if such action is
       reasonably considered to be necessary          Under the Data Protection Act 1998 students            groups of different backgrounds and beliefs
       by the University. If the University           have a right to access current personal information    and will not tolerate any exclusion, harassment
       discontinues any course it will use its        held by the University and a right to object to data   or victimisation of students. We will tackle
       reasonable endeavours to provide a             processing that causes damage and distress.            discrimination and prejudice where they are found
       suitable alternative programme.                For details of these procedures please contact         to exist and tackle the systems, behaviour and
•      cannot accept any responsibility, and          the University Data Protection Officer.                 attitudes that cause them or sustain them.
       expressly excludes liability, for damage                                                              Students have individual responsibility to abide by
       to students’ property and transfer of                                                                 the University’s commitment to eliminate unlawful
       computer viruses to students’ equipment.                                                              discrimination. We all have a part to play by
•      cannot accept responsibility for the                                                                  treating each other fairly, with dignity and respect
       non-availability of services, teaching                                                                and individuals should challenge any inappropriate
       and/or examinations outwith its control.                                                              behaviour and report any harassment.
       Students are not eligible to graduate if
       they are in debt to the University.
238                                                                                                                                                                                                        239

Index
                                                                                    Campus key
                                                                                    Ayr                A
                                                                                    Dumfries           D
                                                                                    Hamilton           H
                                                                                    Paisley            P




A                                                         Computer Games Technology         56          P   I                                                     Primary Education                  108     A
Accounting                              12         H, P   Computer Networking               58       H, P   Information Management              30           P    Product Design & Development        98   H, P
Adult Nursing                          134   A, D, H, P   Computing                         50    D, H, P   International Marketing             34        H, P    Psychology (BA)                    206   H, P
Applications                           228                Corporate Real Estate Management 20           P   International Marketing and                           Psychology (BSc)                   196      P
Applied Bioscience                     152        H, P                                                      Management                          11           D
                                                          Criminal Justice                 211          H                                                         Q
Applied Bioscience (CertHE)            163           H                                                      Information Technology              60     D, H, P
Applied Bioscience with                                   D                                                                                                       Quality                            100     P
Biochemistry/Environmental Science     154           P    Data Protection Act               236             J
                                                                                                                                                                  S
Applied Bioscience with                                   Design                             94        P    Journalism                          80           H
                                                                                                                                                                  Science                            175     P
Forensic Investigation                 155           H    Design with Manufacturing Systems 96         P    L                                                     Science (CertHE)                   175     P
Applied Bioscience with                                   Design with Product Development    97        P    Languages                                             Scottish Baptist College           231
Forensic Investigation (DipHE)         162           H    Digital Art                        76        A    (French, Spanish, German)          144           P    Social Policy                      207      P
Applied Bioscience with Immunology     157           P
                                                          E                                                 Law                                 36        H, P    Social Sciences                    202   H, P
Applied Bioscience with Microbiology   158           P
                                                          Earth Science                                     Levels of study                      3                Social Studies (CertHE)            210      H
Applied Bioscience with Multimedia     159           P
                                                          (minor option stream)             167        P    M                                                     Social Work                        212   D, P
Applied Bioscience and Psychology      160           P
                                                          Economics                         204     H, P    Management                          38        A, P    Sociology                          208   H, P
Applied Bioscience and/with Zoology    161           P
                                                          Enabling Support Team             229             Mathematical Sciences                                 Sport Coaching                     218      H
B                                                         Engineering Management            119        H    (joint option stream)              180           P    Sport Coaching (DipHE)             220      H
Biomedical Science/                                       Enterprise                         22        P    Medicinal Chemistry                182           P    Sport Development                  222   H, P
Applied Biomedical Science        164                P    Enterprise and HRM                 11        D    Mathematical &                                        Sport Development (DipHE)          224      H
Broadcast Production               72               A     Enterprise and                                    Professional Education             110           A    Sports Therapy                     226      P
Business Analysis                  14                P    International Marketing            11        D    Mechanical Engineering             121            P   Sports Journalism*                  86      H
Business Economics                 16                P    Enterprise and Management          11        D    Mechanical Engineering (HNC)       123            P
Business Studies                   18             H, P                                                                                                            T
                                                          Environmental Biology             171        P    Mental Health Nursing              136   A, D, H, P
Business study at Dumfries Campus 11                 D                                                                                                            Tourism                             40     P
                                                          Event Management                   26     H, P    Midwifery                          138         H, P
Business Technology                48                P    Exercise & Health                 217        P                                                          U
                                                                                                            Motorsport Design Engineering      124            H
C                                                                                                                                                                 UCAS                               229
                                                          F                                                 Multimedia Technology               62            P
                                                                                                                                                                  University terms and conditions    236
Chemical Engineering                   115           P    Film-making & Screen Writing       78        A    Music Technology                    82            P
Chemistry                              168           P    Finance                           233                                                                   W
                                                                                                            O
Childhood Practice                     110       A, H,    Forensic Science                  172        P                                                          Web Development                     64     P
                                                                                                            Occupational Safety and Health     184           P
Childhood Studies*                     106     A, D, H                                                                                                            * subject to University approval
                                                          H                                                 P
Civil Engineering                      117           P
                                                          Health and Lifestyle              176         H   Performance                         84           A
Commercial Music                        74           A
                                                          Health and Lifestyle (DipHE)      177         H   Pharmaceutical Science             186           P
Computer-Aided Design                   92           P
                                                          Health Science                    178         P   Physics                            190           P
Computer Animation
                                                          HRM and International Marketing    11         D   Physics with Medical Technology/
(with options in Digital Art/
                                                          HRM and Management                 11         D   Multimedia                         193           P
Games Development*/Multimedia)          52           P
                                                          Human Resource Management          28   A, H, P   Politics                           205        H, P
Computer Games Development              54        H, P
240

Further
information
Campuses
Ayr Campus
Beech Grove, Ayr
KA8 0SR Scotland
Tel +44 (0)1292 886000

Dumfries Campus
Rutherford McCowan Building,
Dumfries DG1 4XX Scotland
Tel +44 (0)1387 702075

Hamilton Campus
Almada Street, Hamilton
ML3 0JB Scotland
Tel +44 (0)1698 283100

Paisley Campus
Paisley
PA1 2BE Scotland
Tel +44 (0)141 848 3000

Contact us
University Direct
0800 027 1000
(44 141 848 7044)
www.uws.ac.uk

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Tags:
Stats:
views:25
posted:10/15/2011
language:English
pages:123
ktixcqlmc ktixcqlmc
About